CoC Bridges and Structures Design Guidelines 2015 - Rev 2

CITY OF CALGARY
DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR BRIDGES AND STRUCTURES

FIFTH EDITION, 2015
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE i
2015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DISCLAIMER..1
1.0 INTRODUCTION___________________________________________________________ 1
1.1
Purpose ___________________________________________________________________ 1
1.2
Modifications and Revisions___________________________________________________ 1
1.3
Consultant Terms of Reference ________________________________________________ 2
1.4
Definitions _________________________________________________________________ 2
2.0
QUALITY AND STANDARDS _______________________________________________ 3
2.1
General ___________________________________________________________________ 3
2.2
Codes and Standards ________________________________________________________ 3
3.0
GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA _______________________________________________ 4
3.1
Design Life _________________________________________________________________ 4
3.2
Safety _____________________________________________________________________ 4
3.3
Function___________________________________________________________________ 4
3.4
Efficiency and Economy ______________________________________________________ 5
3.5
Aesthetics of Structures ______________________________________________________ 5
3.6
Environmental Considerations _________________________________________________ 6
3.7
Special Considerations for Pedestrian Bridges and Structures ________________________ 6
4.0
BRIDGE GEOMETRY _____________________________________________________ 7
4.1
Vertical Clearance ___________________________________________________________ 7
4.2
Horizontal Clearances ________________________________________________________ 8
4.3
Grades and Slopes___________________________________________________________ 9
4.4
Approach Slabs _____________________________________________________________ 9
4.6
Other Requirements ________________________________________________________ 10
4.7
Camber and Deflections _____________________________________________________ 11
5.0
LOADS AND LOAD EFFECTS ______________________________________________ 12
5.1
General __________________________________________________________________ 12
5.2
Live Load _________________________________________________________________ 12
5.3
Pedestrian Load ___________________________________________________________ 12
5.4
Maintenance Vehicle Load ___________________________________________________ 12
5.5
Multiple Use Structure Loads _________________________________________________ 13
5.6
Vehicle Collision Load _______________________________________________________ 13
5.7
Construction Loads _________________________________________________________ 13
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE ii
2015
5.8
Seismic Loads _____________________________________________________________ 13
5.9
Methods of Analysis ________________________________________________________ 13
5.10
Diaphragms _______________________________________________________________ 14
5.11
Construction and Temporary Load Conditions ___________________________________ 14
6.0
DURABILITY___________________________________________________________ 14
6.1
General __________________________________________________________________ 14
6.2
Concrete Structures ________________________________________________________ 14
6.3
Concrete Cover ____________________________________________________________ 15
6.4
High Performance Concrete (HPC) _____________________________________________ 16
6.5
Protective Coatings _________________________________________________________ 16
6.6
Structural Details __________________________________________________________ 18
6.7
Drainage _________________________________________________________________ 19
6.8
Bridge Deck Drainage _______________________________________________________ 19
6.9
Deck Drains _______________________________________________________________ 20
6.10
Drip Grooves ______________________________________________________________ 20
6.11
Utilities on Bridges _________________________________________________________ 20
6.12
Steel Structures ____________________________________________________________ 21
6.13
Uncoated Weathering Steel __________________________________________________ 21
6.14
Corrosion Protection________________________________________________________ 21
6.17
Masonry Structures ________________________________________________________ 23
6.18
Other Materials ____________________________________________________________ 24
6.19
Inspection and Maintenance Access ___________________________________________ 24
6.20
Approach Slabs ____________________________________________________________ 24
6.22
Construction ______________________________________________________________ 24
7.0
SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES ____________________________________________ 25
7.1
General __________________________________________________________________ 25
7.2
Crack Control ______________________________________________________________ 25
7.3
Stress Limits ______________________________________________________________ 27
7.4
Deformation ______________________________________________________________ 27
7.5
Vibration _________________________________________________________________ 27
8.0
FATIGUE LIMIT STATE ___________________________________________________ 28
8.1
Reinforced and Pre-stressed Concrete __________________________________________ 28
8.2
Structural Steel ____________________________________________________________ 28
THE CITY OF CALGARY

9.0
PAGE iii
2015
DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES _______________ 28
9.2
Codes and Specifications ____________________________________________________ 29
9.3
Geotechnical Report ________________________________________________________ 29
9.4
Design ___________________________________________________________________ 29
9.5
Loads ____________________________________________________________________ 29
9.7
Construction Methods ______________________________________________________ 31
9.8
Proprietary Walls __________________________________________________________ 32
9.9
Inspection and Quality Assurance _____________________________________________ 32
10.0
CABLE STAYED BRIDGES _________________________________________________ 32
10.1
General __________________________________________________________________ 32
10.2
Reference Publications ______________________________________________________ 32
10.3
Limitations________________________________________________________________ 33
10.4
Design ___________________________________________________________________ 33
10.5
Corrosion Protection________________________________________________________ 35
10.6
Construction Considerations _________________________________________________ 35
10.7
Quality Assurance __________________________________________________________ 35
10.8
Maintenance ______________________________________________________________ 36
11.0
INTEGRAL ABUTMENT BRIDGES __________________________________________ 36
11.1
Characteristics of Integral Abutment Bridges ____________________________________ 36
11.2
Limitations________________________________________________________________ 36
11.3
Design ___________________________________________________________________ 37
12.0
SEMI-INTEGRAL ABUTMENT BRIDGES ______________________________________ 39
12.1
Characteristics of Semi-Integral Bridges ________________________________________ 39
12.2
Limitations________________________________________________________________ 39
12.3
Design ___________________________________________________________________ 40
12.4
Details ___________________________________________________________________ 40
13.0
BRIDGE DECK JOINTS AND BEARINGS ______________________________________ 41
13.1
General __________________________________________________________________ 41
13.2
Design Requirements _______________________________________________________ 41
13.3
Temperature Variation Effects on Deck Joints and Bearings ________________________ 41
13.4
General Policy for Deck Joints ________________________________________________ 41
13.5
Deck Joints - Functional Requirements _________________________________________ 41
13.6
Deck Joints - Design and Detailing _____________________________________________ 42
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE iv
2015
13.7
General Design Policy for Bridge Bearings _______________________________________ 43
13.8
Bearing Types and Specifications ______________________________________________ 43
13.9
Bearing Design ____________________________________________________________ 43
13.10
14.0
Bearing Detailing ________________________________________________________ 44
TRAFFIC BARRIERS _____________________________________________________ 44
14.1
Barrier Selection and Detailing Criteria _________________________________________ 45
14.2
Traffic Barrier Joints ________________________________________________________ 45
15.0
HIGHWAY ACCESSORY SUPPORTS _________________________________________ 46
15.1
General Considerations _____________________________________________________ 46
15.2
Design and Construction_____________________________________________________ 46
16.0
NOISE BARRIERS _______________________________________________________ 46
16.1
Design ___________________________________________________________________ 46
16.2
Durability and Maintenance Requirements______________________________________ 47
16.3
Functional Requirements ____________________________________________________ 48
16.4
Construction ______________________________________________________________ 48
17.0
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ________________________________________________ 49
17.1
Drawings _________________________________________________________________ 49
17.2
Specifications _____________________________________________________________ 51
17.3
Preliminary Design Report ___________________________________________________ 51
17.4
Quality Control and Quality Assurance _________________________________________ 52
17.5
Project Closure Documentation _______________________________________________ 53
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE v
2015
LIS T OF AP P ENDICES
APPENDIX A: SUPPLEMENTARY GUIDELINES
A1
HIGHWAY ACCESSORY SUPPORTS GUIDELINES FOR STRUCTURAL

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
APPENDIX B: DESIGN SUBMITTALS

B1
B2
B3
TITLEBLOCK
DESIGN BRIEF FORMAT
ASSURANCE OF ENGINEERING FIELD REVIEW AND COMPLIANCE
FORM
APPENDIX C: STANDARD CITY SPECIFICATIONS

02510 (a)
02510 (b)
02510 (c)
02850
03200
03300
03301
03483
05210
07100
BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SINGLE LIFT

BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING MULTIPLE LIFTS
BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING REHABILITATION
NOISE BARRIERS
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH RETAINING WALLS
STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPLY AND FABRICATION
BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING
APPENDIX D: WARRANTY FORMS

D1
D2
D3
D4
BEARINGS
EXPANSION JOINTS
GALVANIZING
COATINGS (PAINTING included)
APPENDIX E: TYPICAL DETAILS

DG01
DG02
DG03
DG04
DG05
DG06
DG07
BRIDGE BARRIER SECTION TYPICAL

INTEGRAL/ SEMI INTEGRAL ABUTMENT Approach Slab End Detail
SEMI INTEGRAL ABUTMENT Wingwall Detail
INTEGRAL/ SEMI INTEGRAL ABUTMENT APPROACH Slab Interface Detail
DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM with 80mm Two-course Hot Mix Asphalt
Concrete Pavement
DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM with 80mm Two-course Hot Mix Asphalt
Concrete Pavement
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE vi
2015
LIS T OF TABLES
TABLE 6.3.1
Surfaces exposed to de-icing chemicals, Cover to Principal Reinforcing
TABLE 10.4.4
Standard Classification for Pre-stressing Steels for Cable Stays
TABLE 17.1.4
Typical List of Drawings
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 1
2015
CITY OF CALGARY
2015
DISCLAIMER:
The City is providing these Design Guidelines for use in the design of bridges and structures
owned by The City of Calgary. The City does not undertake any duty of care or obligation
whatsoever; and receipt of these documents does not in any way relieve the Consultant of his
responsibility or liability for his own work and obligations.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 P u rp o s e
This Document sets forth The City of Calgary design criteria that govern design of new
bridges and structures, as well as evaluation and rehabilitation of existing structures. The
Guidelines apply to the structures including, but not limited to, the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Vehicular bridges
Pedestrian bridges
Large culverts and tunnels
Light Rail Transit platforms and stations
Retaining walls
Highway Accessory Supports
Noise barriers
This document reflects the current City of Calgary policies governing planning, design,
construction and rehabilitation of structures owned and managed by The City of Calgary.
This document provides basic design considerations and any unique applications, issues, or
departure from the Guidelines shall be referred to The City of Calgary, Transportation
Infrastructure, Bridges and Structures for review and acceptance at the early stage of design
or construction as applicable.
This document supersedes City of Calgary Design Guidelines for Bridges and Structures,
Fourth Edition, 2013 Revision 3.
1.2 Mo d ific atio n s a n d Re vis io n s
1.2.1
Revisions to Guidelines:
Revisions to the Guidelines occur periodically upon changes of reference codes,
modifications to the policies governing structures management or due to an
ongoing process of improving the document due to recent experience gained
from designs, construction, maintenance, and as a result of most current
research and new technologies available.
Other City of Calgary Business Units, at their discretion, may consider
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 2
2015
alternatives to or relaxations of the Guidelines and Specifications when the

Developer or their agent, or the contractor or their agent, provides a written
submission identifying the reasons for special considerations.
Comments and suggestions to improve the Guidelines are welcome and should
be referred to:
Ms. Jadwiga Kroman, P.Eng.
Manager, Bridges and Structures
Transportation Infrastructure
City of Calgary
P.O. Box 2100, Stn. M, #8481
Calgary, Alberta T2P 2M5
E-mail: jadwiga.kroman@calgary.ca
City of Calgary, Transportation Infrastructure, Bridges and Structures, will
conduct necessary research, review or analysis of the proposed modifications
and, if the proposed modification is deemed appropriate, the implementation of
the revision will follow.
1.2.2
Revisions to Specifications:
Specifications included in the Appendices of this Document shall not be altered
when used as part of Contract Documents. Modifications to the specifications as
applied to the specific projects may be made through the use of the Modifications
to Technical Specifications section of the project specifications. Such
modifications shall be made only upon the prior review by the authorized City
personnel.
1.3 Co n s u lta n t Te rm s of Re fe re n c e
Consultants should refer to the Consultant Terms of Reference for project-specific
requirements pertaining to planning, design, and construction review and project closure.
1.4 De fin itio n s
The following are the administrative definitions that shall be used in conjunction with the
Guidelines as well as with codes and standards referenced herein:
i.
Approved or Approval - means approved or approval, in writing

by The City of Calgary.
ii. Engineer of Record- means an Engineer licensed in the Province
of Alberta that, through a contract with The City of Calgary, is
responsible for design and verification of construction compliance
with the Contract Documents.
iii. For the purpose of these Guidelines, the terms Engineer and
Engineer of Record are used interchangeably.
iv. Owner - means The City of Calgary or its representative(s),
agent(s) or assignee(s).
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 3
2015
v.
Reviewed or Review means planning, design or construction

work is accepted by The City without detailed checking of
calculations and application of engineering principles.
vi. The City - means The City of Calgary.
2.0 QUALITY AND STANDARDS

2.1 Ge n e ral
2.1.1
This document takes precedence over all other applicable codes and/or
standards, unless Approved otherwise.
2.1.2
Expertise: New design and evaluations of existing bridges and structures shall be
performed by a Professional Engineer employed by a firm pre-qualified by The
City of Calgary. The design shall be independently checked by an experienced
bridge engineer or structural engineer, as applicable to the scope of the design.
2.1.3
Design requirements assigned to construction contractors or suppliers shall be

clearly outlined in construction contract documents.
2.1.4
Wherever standards (e.g., CSA, ASTM and others) are referred to in this
document, the current edition, including supplements, shall apply.
2.2 Co d e s a n d S ta n d ard s
2.2.1
Permanent and Existing Structures

The Design Standard shall be Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code (CHBDC)
CAN/CSAS6, latest edition, except as noted otherwise in this Document.
Section 14 of the CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition shall be used for load limit
restrictions of the existing bridges and for assessment of serviceability or fatigue
life of the existing bridge elements. It should not be used for justification of a
design that does not meet the requirements of other Clauses of the CHBDC.
References to American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO) have been made for selected aspects of bridge and
structures design.
Use of loads and strength formulas from other codes in conjunction with the
CHBDC requires an investigation; Approved by The City, into compatibility and
safety levels with appropriate calibration of load and resistance factors.
2.2.2
Temporary Structures
Temporary structures shall be designed in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6, latest
edition, except for Falsework and temporary access scaffolding which shall be
designed to CSA Standards S269.1 and S269.2.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 4
2015
Falsework and temporary access scaffolding shall be designed and

independently checked by a professional engineer.
Design loads and load combinations shall be described and accounted for. A
note regarding exclusions of certain loads from the original design, i.e.
construction-specific loads, shall be included on the drawings.
2.2.3
Buildings and Parkades

Building structural components shall conform to the Alberta Building Code,
current edition and all of its supplements.
Parkade structure design shall conform to CAN/CSA-S413, latest edition. The
upgrade and repair procedures for existing structures shall conform to CAN/CSAS448.1, latest edition.
2.2.4
Plus 15 and Plus 30 Elevated Walkways

Design of Plus 15 Elevated Walkway System, connecting two buildings shall
conform to the Alberta Building Code, current edition, unless specified otherwise.
3.0 GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA

3.1 De s ig n Life
Unless Approved otherwise, the design life of new structures shall be 75 years with the
annual target reliability index of 3.75.
Design life of retaining walls, river crossings, railway or light rail transit (LRT) crossings and
tunnels shall be 100 years.
3.2 S a fe ty
Safety of the structures shall be assured through application of design methodology based
on Limit States in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition, choice of multiple-load-path
structural systems (unless Approved otherwise), assurance of clear and continuous flow of
forces and detailing that enhances durability and facilitates maintainability of the structures.
3.3 Fu n c tio n
Functional requirements for a structure shall be established or reviewed and Approved by
The City. The design may proceed upon Approval of the functional criteria. Functional
requirements include purpose, use, location, environmental and socio-economic impacts
and any other applicable terms of reference. Provisions for, or impact on ALL users (i.e.
motorists, cyclists, pedestrians, wheelchair) shall be considered in the project functional
definition.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 5
2015
3.4 Efficie n c y a n d Ec o n o m y
The efficient structural design shall result in minimum use of structural materials as
controlled by safety.
The design shall result in an economical structure. The economy of the design shall be
based on minimum cost controlled by safety, serviceability and lifetime maintenance. Unless
Approved otherwise, life-cycle costs shall be used along with initial construction costs in the
cost analysis of alternative structure types.
3.5 Ae s th e tic s o f S tru c tu res
Aesthetic considerations, appropriate to function and location shall be included in the design
of bridges and structures.
The majority of City of Calgary structures will be constructed in the urban environment and
the visual impact of the structures on the environment shall be considered in the design.
The proportion and configuration of the bridge elements shall be compatible with the context
of the space and the immediate environment. In the selection of the bridge type and its
components, the following essentials shall be considered:
3.5.1
Good visibility achieved through provision of large under-span openings and

avoidance of vertical lines of piers and walls close to the driving lanes.
3.5.2
Visual continuity of the bridge form with topography of the environment.
3.5.3
Superstructure geometry: an overall pleasing bridge line achieved through

balanced span-to-depth proportion, smooth horizontal and vertical alignment and
camber or vertical crest curve of the bridge spans.
3.5.4
Substructure geometry: shape and location of piers, placement, height and shape
of abutments.
3.5.5
Clarity of function expressed by form.
3.5.6
Harmony of all elements of the bridge expressed by compatibility, contrast and

rhythm of shapes, weight, and materials used.
3.5.7
Proper design of details is essential to producing aesthetic design of structures.

The following elements shall be considered:
i.
ii.
High quality surface finishes.

Consistent and compatible color and shape of all structure
components.
iii. Careful detailing of joints. In particular, expansion joints shall be
designed to prevent the uncontrolled flow of water over concrete
surfaces and to prevent staining.
iv. Control of surface water runoff from the structures.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 6
2015
v. Use of hidden pier caps, diaphragms and screen walls.

vi. Signage, lighting, and landscaping shall be carefully planned to
complement the appearance of the structure and avoid clutter.
vii. Construction joints in exposed concrete surfaces shall be concealed
by reveals or other architectural details.
3.5.8
Aesthetic design shall be submitted for Approval by The City prior to proceeding
to the detailed design phase.
3.6 En viro n m e n ta l Co n s ide ra tio n s

3.6.1
General
Bridges and structures shall be designed to comply with all environmental
requirements established for the project site. The design shall include
assessment of possible environmental impacts and measures proposed to
mitigate or minimize any adverse effects.
The design shall consider optimization of the project footprint, elements of
landscaping, and methods of conservation of natural environment.
3.6.2
Sustainable Products and Materials

Use of environmentally sustainable materials and methods of construction is
encouraged. Materials and products shall be specified through conscientious
choices of the following characteristics:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
3.6.3
Durability, thus enhancement of bridges and structures life-cycle

Minimum use of natural non-renewable resources
Use of recyclable and recycled materials
Minimum wastage of space, materials and energy
Energy-efficient processes and products
Innovative materials, systems and solutions promoting sustainable
solutions
Noise Control
Where stipulated in the project scope, structure design shall incorporate features
that tend to minimize the generation and propagation of noise.
3.6.4
Drainage
Refer to Section 4.0 BRIDGE GEOMETRY for minimum slopes and grades and
to Section 6.2.5 Bridge Deck Drainage for drainage criteria. Sustainable
drainage solutions, such as bio-swales, are encouraged.
3.7 S p e c ia l Co n s id e ratio n s fo r P e d e s tria n Brid g e s a n d S tru c ture s

3.7.1
Types of Structures
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 7
2015
Conceptual design of pedestrian bridges and other pedestrian grade separations

shall consider functional requirements such as safety, connectivity with adjacent
pathways, recreational, public transportation and other facilities, community fit
and local context.
3.7.2
Pedestrian Underpasses
Narrow and/ or long pedestrian underpasses and tunnels should be avoided
unless justified for a specific location and require an Approval from the City prior
to proceeding with the design.
Should a pedestrian underpass be warranted, consideration should be given to:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
3.7.3
Visibility and Security of users (Crime Prevention Through

Environmental Design: CPTED)
Geometry (see Section 4.0 for allowable length and width) Length is
to be minimized and width and clearance are to be maximized
whenever possible.
Adequate lighting
Drainage
Maintenance
Aesthetics
Signage
Bridge Approaches
Considerations shall be given to provision of safe access and exit areas for
pedestrian structures. Good visibility at entrance and exit approaches as well as
across the structure, safe connection to pathway/walkway systems, directional
railings, grab rails if applicable, fence, signage or other means of directing
pedestrian and cyclist traffic shall be included in the design.
3.7.4
Lighting
Street lighting and/or pathway lighting shall be utilized for the illumination of
pedestrian overpasses. In areas of transit oriented design or underpasses, a
minimum lighting level is required.
Light standards shall not be located on the pedestrian overpasses, except for
river crossings or where Approved otherwise.
4.0 BRIDGE GEOMETRY

4.1 Ve rtic al Cle a ra n c e
4.1.1
Vehicular Bridges
Vertical clearance over roadways shall be minimum 5.4 m (posted) plus 0.1m to
account for construction tolerance, long term deformations and future paving.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 8
2015
Vertical clearance over the Federal Railways shall be minimum 7.16 m (or 23
feet, 6 inches) above the base of rail.
Vertical clearance over light rail transit (LRT) tracks shall be minimum 6.0 m
above the top of rail.
4.1.2
Pedestrian Bridges, Underpass and Sidewalks

Over roadways: minimum 5.7 m (posted), plus 0.1m to account for construction
tolerance, long term deformations and future paving.
Over pedestrian pathways/bikeways: minimum 2.5 m, measured from the
pathways/bikeways to the underside of the structure.
Over pedestrian pathways/bikeways located in tunnels* and underpasses*:
minimum 3.6 m.
*See Section 3.7.2: Pedestrian Underpasses
4.2 Ho rizo n tal Cle a ra n c e s

4.2.1
Vehicular Bridges
Horizontal clearances shall include considerations for any future widening plans
of the roadway below.
Horizontal clearances shall include substructure protection by traffic barriers,
unless the clear zone requirements can be met.
4.2.2

Minimum clear widths are outlined as follows. Some locations may require a
wider structure, based on site-specific analysis (land use, expected volumes,
etc.)
Land crossings
Pathways and sidewalks integrated with interchange bridge structures.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Part of regional pathway system

Part of pathway system
Part of sidewalk system
Stand alone pathway underpasses
Stand alone pathway overpasses
3.0 m
2.5 m
2.0 m
3.0 m
3.0 m
River crossings
Pathways and sidewalks integrated with bridge structures.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

i.
ii.
iii.
Part of pathway system

Part of sidewalk system
Stand-alone bridges
PAGE 9
2015
3.0 m
2.5 m
4.0 m
4.3 Gra d e s a n d Slo p e s

4.3.1
Vehicular Bridges
Vehicular bridges shall have a minimum grade of 1%, unless otherwise
Approved.
Roadway cross slopes shall be 2%, except on super-elevated road alignments,
where special assessment of safety and drainage may be required.
Construction of bridges on spiral horizontal alignments shall be avoided unless
Approved. Safety and drainage analyses shall be required to justify exceptions.
4.3.2

Longitudinal grade shall be:
i.
ii.
Max 5% or
Max 1:12 (8.33%) over a 9 m horizontal distance with landings of
minimum 1.5 m long and a 1% longitudinal slope
Pedestrian bridge decks shall have a centered crown, unless otherwise

Approved. Crown on ramps are not required, provided 1% longitudinal grade is
provided.
Sidewalks and pedestrian bridge decks shall be provided with a 2% cross-fall,
sloping towards the roadway and a minimum 1% longitudinal grade.
4.4 Ap p ro a c h S la b s
4.4.1
Vehicular Bridge
Vehicular bridges shall be provided with reinforced concrete approach slabs
anchored to the abutments. The minimum length of slabs shall be 6.0 m, except
for integral or semi-integral bridges, unless otherwise Approved. The approach
slab shall extend to the lateral limits of the roadway, but shall not be integral with
the curbs or barriers to allow differential settlement to occur, except for integral or
semi-integral bridges. Longitudinally, the slab shall not extend into the
intersecting roadway.
4.5 Ho rizo n tal La yo u t

4.5.1
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 10
2015
Tight switch-back alignment of ramps should be avoided. Switch-back landings

should be round-shaped and should allow for unobstructed sight lines for both
downward and upward traffic.
Spiral ramps, if Approved, shall have a minimum radius of 25 m and shall
conform to vertical clearance requirements.
Landings at entry/exit locations shall facilitate the anticipated traffic to and from
the bridge and shall safely direct the traffic to connecting pathways.
Way finding features, landscaping, public art and viewing features are
encouraged within the approaches and pedestrian crossing facilities.
4.6 Oth er Re q u ire m e nts
4.6.1
Accessibility
Design of access ramps for overpasses should take into consideration The City
of Calgary Access Design Standards and CAN/CSA -B651 Accessible Design for
the Built Environment. Access via stairs only requires Approval by the City.
4.6.2
Grab Rails and Railing

Pedestrian railings shall be 1050 mm high; bicycle or mixed use bridge railings
shall be 1400 mm high.
Pedestrian railings shall be constructed such that maximum space between solid
elements (i.e. vertical pickets) of the railing shall not exceed 100 mm, within the
height of 1050 mm.
Pickets shall not be required between the top pedestrian rail and horizontal
bicycle rail.
In some locations, railings higher than 1400 mm may be required. Please consult
project manager for project specific requirements.
Grab rail at the height of 865 mm to 965 mm (from wearing surface to top of rail)
shall be required on all sloped ramps and the intermittent landings. Grab rail
section diameter should be between 30 mm to 43 mm.
Grab rails are required for pedestrian bridges unless otherwise Approved.
Exceptions may be considered for bridges with 5% or less longitudinal grade
upon Approval.
Design of railings should discourage climbing.
4.6.3
Light Rail Transit (LRT)

For bridges located over LRT tracks, railings shall be grounded as per The City of
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 11
2015
Calgary LRT Design Guidelines Manual.

For bridges located over LRT tracks, protective shrouds shall be required over
the centenary wires.
Additional design considerations may be provided by Calgary Transit for specific
project items.
4.6.4
Crash Walls
Structure elements located within the LRT or Canadian Pacific Railway (CPR)
clear zone shall be protected by a suitably designed crash wall.
4.6.5
Finishes, Curbs, and Joints

Deck surface shall be broom finished or shall have an Approved non-slip finish.
Pedestrian overpass curbs shall be minimum 75 mm high unless otherwise
Approved.
Construction joints in bridge barriers shall be positioned over the drains from
sidewalk to roadway.
Expansion joint cover plates shall be coated with PPG Protective & Marine
Coatings SFT675 (grey) non-slip coating or Approved equivalent.
4.7 Ca m b e r a n d De fle c tio ns

4.7.1
Bridges shall be built to match the profile grade after permanent Dead Load has
been applied.
4.7.2
Steel girders typically are cambered for 100% of dead load effects. Self weight,
superimposed dead loads and final roadway grade line shall be considered. Data
shall be presented on a camber diagram on the drawings that shows overall
camber as well as net camber values for individual camber segments.
4.7.3
For precast girders, camber and deflection diagram(s), including effects of prestressing, post-tensioning and stages of construction, shall be shown on the
drawings. Camber should be designed to take into account the effects of creep
and shrinkage. The design height of haunches shall be shown on camber
diagrams. Verification and adjustment, of the height of haunches shall be made
at all applicable stages of construction.
4.7.4
Cast-in-place superstructure shall be shown on the drawings with elevations

shown for setting of forms. The deflection and camber data shall be shown on the
drawings.
4.7.5
Deflections on Pedestrian Bridges

The following maximum limits of Live Load (LL) deflections shall apply:
THE CITY OF CALGARY

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Pedestrian Load
Maintenance vehicle Load
Cantilever arm due to pedestrian LL
Horizontal deflection due to wind
PAGE 12
2015
Span/500
Span/500
Cantilever Length/300
Span/500
The above limits are not to replace other serviceability criteria, provided in
CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition, which may govern the design as being more
stringent.
5.0 LOADS AND LOAD EFFECTS

5.1 Ge n e ral
Bridge and structure design shall be based on Limit States philosophy, with equal emphasis
being given to Ultimate Limit States (ULS), Serviceability Limit States (SLS) and Fatigue
Limit State (FLS), in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
5.2 Live Lo a d
5.2.1
The design live load for new highway bridge structures shall be a CL-800 Truck
Load increased by dynamic load allowance, or CL-800 Lane Load. The uniformlydistributed portion of the CL-800 Lane Load shall be 9 kN/m and shall have a
width of 3.0 m.
5.2.2
Overload Trucks shall not be used for new bridge design.
5.2.3
Evaluation of existing bridges shall be done using Load Evaluation Trucks CL1800, CL2-800, and CL3-800.
5.3 P e d e s tria n Lo a d
5.3.1
Pedestrian Load shall be included in the design for all designated occupancy
areas such as sidewalks /pathways on bridges, or pedestrian bridges and ramps,
in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
5.3.2
Pedestrian/bicycle bridges and ramps shall be designed for a maintenance

vehicle as specified in CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
5.4 Ma inte n a n c e Ve hic le Lo a d

5.4.1
Maintenance Vehicle Load shall be considered along with Snow Load on the
bridge where the geometry of the facility warrants entry of small snow removal
vehicles.
5.4.2
Maintenance Vehicle Loads for sidewalks on bridges shall be included at the ULS
only.
5.4.3
Maintenance Vehicle Loads for pedestrian bridges shall be considered at ULS
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 13
2015
and SLS.
5.5 Mu ltiple Us e S tru ctu re Lo a d s
For bridges that carry Light Rail Transit (LRT) in addition to vehicular traffic, the City and
Calgary Transit will specify the live loads and load factors for particular bridge sites.
5.6 Ve h ic le Collis io n Lo a d
5.6.1
Bridge piers located within 10 m from the edge of the road pavement shall be
designed for a Collision Load, regardless of the presence of guardrail. The
magnitude and application of the equivalent horizontal static force shall be in
accordance with Clause 3.15 of CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
5.6.2
LRT underpasses shall be designed for a Collision Load as specified in The City
of Calgary LRT Design Guidelines; however, in no case shall the total factored
load effect of Collision Load and the relevant load combination be less than that
specified herein.
5.7 Co n s tru c tio n Lo a d s

5.7.1
Construction Dead Load shall include weight of materials, formwork, falsework,

stationary lifting devices and equipment.
5.7.2
Construction Live Load shall include weight of workers, equipment and other
elements subject to movement during construction at the construction stage
considered.
5.7.3
Concurrent Loads due to wind, ice, stream flow, temperature change shall be
considered at a ten (10) year return period, as applicable.
5.8 S e is m ic Lo a d s
Seismic analysis and design shall be based on requirements pertinent to Seismic
Performance Zone 1.
5.9 Me th o d s o f An a lys is
5.9.1
For short and medium span bridges conforming to the conditions stated in
CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition), a simplified method of analysis may be used.
5.9.2
Regardless of the method of analysis load distribution factors used for girder
design shall be shown on the Drawings.
5.9.3
All relevant structural responses including deformation shall be analyzed. Refined

methods of analysis shall be selected based on the criteria outlined in CAN/CSAS6 (latest edition).
THE CITY OF CALGARY

5.10
PAGE 14
2015
Dia p h ra g m s
Intermediate diaphragms are required in bridges with steel or concrete girders and concrete
decks, unless Approved otherwise.
5.11
Co n s tru c tio n a n d Te m p o ra ry Lo a d Co n d itio ns
During design, evaluation of the structure for the following temporary construction load
conditions shall be performed:
i.
ii.
Prior to superstructure installation

During all stages of superstructure installation and deck casting.
The assumed magnitude of construction loads, methodology and sequence shall be

included in the Drawing Notes. Any deviation from these assumptions shall be re-evaluated
prior to construction and shall be based on the Contractors proposed construction
methodology.
6.0 DURABILITY
6.1 Ge n e ral
6.1.1
Consideration shall be given in all aspects of design to minimizing the

deterioration of the appearance, and to maximizing structural capacity as well as
performance of the structures during the design lifetime.
6.1.2
Structural design and detailing shall focus on minimizing the impacts of such
environmental factors as temperature variations, snow, ice, salt, rain, wind and
solar radiation. Structural site investigation shall include testing of soils,
groundwater, local runoff water, and atmospheric pollution level and, where
relevant, drainage system discharge to detect corrosive substances.
6.1.3
Durability shall be enhanced by selection of the proper structural systems,

adequate design for strength and serviceability, choice of materials, as well as
adequate Quality Control and Quality Assurance during design, fabrication and
construction.
6.2 Co n c re te Stru c ture s

Standard Specifications are included in this document for concrete elements (see Appendix
C):
003300
003301
003200
003483
Cast In Place Concrete

High Performance Concrete
Concrete Reinforcement
Mechanically Stabilized Earth Retaining Walls
Durability of concrete structures shall be assured through design and detailing, application of
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 15
2015
high performance materials, protection of reinforcing steel and application of concrete

sealers.
6.3 Co n c re te Co ve r
6.3.1
The requirements for concrete cover over reinforcing steel shall be as shown in
Table 8.5 of CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition), except as specified in Table 6.2.1
herein.
Table 6.3.1
Surfaces exposed to de-icing chemicals, Cover to Principal Reinforcing:
Concrete Cover*** and
Structure Element
Tolerances
Concrete decks and sidewalks
Top Surface
70+5/-10 mm
Soffit:
5010 mm
Precast LRT Platform Top Surface
60 + 10 mm
Precast LRT Platform Soffit
40 + 10 mm
Traffic Barriers:
Front Surface
70 5 mm
Back Surface
70 5 mm
Medians, Curbs
60 10 mm
Substructures and Retaining Walls**
70 10 mm
Precast T, I and Box Girders****
Soffit
40 + 10 mm
Exterior Surface
35 5 mm
Precast Panels for Retaining Walls
60+10 mm
** Front surface within splash zone.
*** Average concrete cover as placed shall conform to the specified values,
excluding the tolerances. (I.e. tolerances shall apply to construction only).
**** Girders of bridges spanning over the roadways shall be considered exposed
to de-icing chemicals.
6.3.2
The applicable concrete covers shall be shown on the Drawings.
6.3.3
For bundled bars, the concrete cover shall be the smaller of the diameter of a
single bar having area equal to that of the bundle and 50 mm, but not less than
that given for single bars. Bundled bars shall not be specified for use within 100
mm of surfaces exposed to moisture containing de-icing chemicals.
6.3.4
Anchorages and mechanical connections for bars shall have concrete cover of at
least that specified for reinforcing bars.
6.3.5
Anchorages and mechanical connections for post-tensioning tendons shall have
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 16
2015
a concrete cover sufficient to eliminate concrete splitting, and not less than that
specified for post-tensioning ducts.
6.3.6
When deformed reinforcing bars are in contact with other embedded items such
as post-tensioning ducts, the actual bar diameter, including deformations, must
be taken into account in determining the design dimensions of concrete members
in applying specified concrete covers.
6.4 Hig h P e rfo rm a n c e Co nc re te (HP C)

6.4.1
High Performance Concrete shall be used for structure components exposed to

severe conditions. Typically the following elements shall be constructed using
HPC:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Bridge decks on concrete or steel girders, Including diaphragms,

block outs and grout keys;
Cast-in place concrete superstructures;
Bridge substructure components and earth retaining structures
within the traffic splash zone (10 m horizontally from the paved
traffic lane and 3 m vertically from the surface of pavement);
All concrete curbs, medians, sidewalks, walls and barriers within the
splash zone;
Concrete LRT platform panels and ramps;
Bridge abutment back walls complete with screen wall;
Precast girders;
Bridge approach Slabs.
6.4.2
Use of HPC for specific elements of the structures shall be established and/ or
Approved by The City of Calgary, Transportation Infrastructure, Bridges and
Structures.
6.4.3
The City of Calgary High Performance Concrete Specification, included in

Appendix C, shall be used, unless otherwise Approved. Any modifications to the
High Performance Concrete Specification require Approval by the City.
6.4.4
Where sulphate concentrations are present in combination with chlorides,

sulphate -resistant cement shall not be used. High Performance Concrete shall
be used instead.
6.5 P ro te c tive Co a tin g s

6.5.1
Post-tensioning Ducts
Sheaths for internal post-tensioning ducts shall be made of bright steel,
galvanized steel or poly-vinyl-chloride.
6.5.2
Concrete Inserts
Exposed inserts and plates shall be protected from corrosion by approved
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 17
2015
methods such as galvanizing or the use of stainless steel material.

6.5.3
Corrosion Protection for Reinforcement

The following alternatives of the reinforcing material and/or protection against
corrosion may be included in the design of the corrosion protection systems for
the bridge superstructure components exposed to severe conditions as described
in section 6.4.1 of this Document. Approval of the corrosion protection system is
required.
Hot dip galvanized steel is a preferred protection system. Top and bottom mats
of bridge deck, suspended slab and sidewalk reinforcing, front and back
reinforcing of traffic barriers or walls, reinforcing of curbs and medians shall be of
grade 400W, if galvanized reinforcing steel is used.
Use of non-corrosive concrete reinforcing material such as FRP (Fibre
Reinforced Polymer) is encouraged.
Stainless steel bars and stainless steel-cladded reinforcing may be used upon
Approval.
Epoxy coated reinforcing steel is not to be used except in special cases upon
Approval.
Detailing of reinforcing steel shall reflect the type of protection system used.
Special care during handling, installation and concrete placement will be
necessary to avoid abrasion of coating.
Galvanized reinforcing shall be fabricated, galvanized, handled and placed in
accordance with the City of Calgary Specification Section -03200 Concrete
Reinforcement, included in Appendix C. The ASTM A767/A767M-97, Standard
Specification For Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars For Concrete
Reinforcement shall be used for galvanizing reinforcing steel, as modified by the
Section 03200 of The City of Calgary Specification.
Chairs, tie wires, nuts, bolts, washers, other devices and incidental hardware that
is to be used to support, position or fasten the galvanized reinforcement shall be
hot dip galvanized.
Plastic chairs or plastic coated metal hardware, in lieu of galvanized components,
may be used.
6.5.4
Sealers
Only Approved sealers shall be used. Please refer to Cast In Place Concrete
Specification (Appendix C)
Penetrating sealers shall be used in the following structure elements, unless
otherwise specified for a particular project:
THE CITY OF CALGARY

i.
PAGE 18
2015
Exposed (i.e. not paved over with Polymer Modified Asphalt or not
protected by a pavement membrane system) surface of bridge deck;
All surfaces of exposed medians, walls and curbs;
Sidewalks and pedestrian walking surface;
Bearing seats.
ii.
iii.
iv.
For new concrete surfaces Type 1c penetrating sealers shall be used. The
sealers shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.
For existing/repaired concrete Type 1b penetrating sealers shall be used.
Pigmented sealers (Type 3) shall be applied to the following structure elements:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Exterior (side) surface of superstructure;

Substructure of pedestrian bridges and highway bridges (unless
specified otherwise by the City);
Soffit of superstructure of pedestrian bridges;
Soffit of exterior girders;
Deck fascia including soffit of cantilevered deck;
Concrete railing balustrades;
Traffic barriers, all surfaces;
Other structural installations and elements, such as retaining walls
or noise walls, as required by site-specific design considerations
and as Approved.
Banff Beige and Concrete Gray pigmented (Type 3) sealers have been
typically used for the above applications, unless Approved otherwise.
6.6 S tru c tu ra l De ta ils
6.6.1
Structural detailing shall include provision of free air circulation for the aboveground components. All formwork material shall be removed from the
superstructure elements, such as box girders.
6.6.2
Steel stay-in-place forms shall not be used. Concrete stay in place forms may be
used, subject to Approval.
6.6.3
Voids, drain holes and other structure discontinuities shall be detailed so as to

prevent entry of birds, insects or animals.
6.6.4
Surfaces that are susceptible to nesting of birds should be protected by use of

bird deterrent. Proposed system is to be submitted for Approval.
6.6.5
Bearing seats shall be designed so that contact with salt-laden water runoff,
debris or leakage is prevented. The bearing seats shall be sloped at 3% away
from the bearing assemblies. Level areas for jacking of the superstructure for
bearing replacement shall be provided.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 19
2015
6.6.6
Elements shall be detailed to minimize the number of pockets, recesses and

other means of water and debris traps. Pockets or recesses in the top surface of
bridge decks are not permitted.
6.6.7
Precast concrete element connections using steel hardware exposed to

environmental conditions are not permitted. Continuity of elements shall be
provided through post-tensioning.
6.6.8
Acceptable locations of construction joints and construction details of the joints

shall be shown on the Drawings.
6.6.9
Bridge deck joints may be a source of structural deterioration, thereby giving rise
to a major bridge maintenance demand. Consideration shall be given to
minimizing the use of expansion joints by providing deck slab continuity at
intermediate supports and, where feasible, integral or semi-integral abutment
system (see Chapters 11 and 12).
6.6.10
Joints between bridge abutment back wall and approach slab, or between
integral superstructure and approach slab, shall be sealed.
6.7 Dra in a g e
6.7.1
In general, a nominal slope should be provided on the surfaces of concrete

elements to facilitate drainage away from the structure. Water should be directed
to appropriate catch basins or settling areas.
6.7.2
The use of swales is recommended adjacent walls to help direct water away from
the structure.
6.7.3
Drainage measures should be clearly outlined on the Drawings. Preliminary

design of the drainage system shall be submitted for review by the City at the
30% Design review stage.
6.8 Brid g e De c k Dra in a g e

6.8.1
Slopes and Grades

Refer to Section 4.0 BRIDGE GEOMETRY for minimum cross slopes and
grades.
6.8.2
Vertical curves on bridge decks should provide a minimum grade of 1% percent,

unless Approved otherwise. If the longitudinal grade is less than 1% percent,
additional drains or special sloping of the gutters may be required.
6.8.3
Deck drainage shall not be discharged on unprotected embankments or any

travelled way (either vehicular, railroad or pedestrian). When applicable and
feasible, drain pipe shall be hidden from the view of oncoming traffic.
6.8.4
Long term deformations, such as creep should be taken to the consideration in
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 20
2015
design of bridge deck drainage.

6.9 De c k Dra in s
6.9.1
Bridge deck drainage requirements shall be determined based on project-specific

design and drainage volume analysis. Bridge drains are generally not
recommended on bridge structures less than 100 meters long if they have full
width shoulders, adequate cross slopes and have adequate catch basins on the
bridge approaches.
6.9.2
Drains shall be located in the areas of maximum flow. Drains shall be of minimum
200 mm diameter for roadway bridges and 100 mm diameter for pedestrian
bridges. For the protection of pedestrians, one dimension of every opening shall
not be greater than 50 mm. The grate inlet top surface shall be set slightly lower
than the surface of pavement, and the pavement shall be slightly dished around
the inlet. The dishing shall not be deeper than 20 mm.
6.9.3
Bridge drainage systems shall avoid horizontal runs of drain pipe if a reasonable
modification to the design of scupper spacing permits the placement of drains
adjacent to piers at the low end of spans. Where horizontal runs of drain pipe
cannot be avoided, the minimum slope shall be 8% or unless other means of
protection against freezing and clogging are used.
6.9.4
The use of scuppers for deck drainage shall be minimized. Scuppers or deck
drains shall pipe the drainage to the storm water drainage system. All drainage
hardware shall be galvanized.
6.9.5
Deck waterproofing membranes shall be adequately detailed around deck drains

and along the gutter lines to disallow water penetration underside the membrane.
6.10
Drip Gro o ve s
Continuous drip grooves underside of outer edge of superstructure shall be provided. Drip
grooves shall be 20 mm deep and min 50 mm wide. Minimum cover to reinforcing shall be
maintained at the drip grooves.
6.11
Utilitie s o n Brid g e s
6.11.1
Utilities, if Approved by the City, shall be placed in non-corrosive type conduits,

located in non-structural elements or in low stress areas of secondary
components. All utilities and attachments shall be of non-corrosive material or
galvanized steel. The attachments to primary structural elements, if Approved,
shall not compromise the structural integrity or long term durability of structures.
6.11.2
At transition points, such as expansion joints, couplings and fittings shall be

capable of accommodating the bridge translation. An allowance shall be made for
a vertical movement due to bridge jacking during bearing replacement.
6.11.3
No fluid-carrying or gas utility lines shall be placed carried under the bridge
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 21
2015
superstructure, unless Approved otherwise.

6.12
S te e l Stru ctu re s
A Standard Specification is included in Appendix C for structural steel elements:

005201
6.13
Structural Steel
Un c o a te d We ath e rin g S te e l
6.13.1
General
Generally, the use of weathering steel for bridges will not be aesthetically suitable
in most environments within the City of Calgary.
6.13.2
Handling and Cleaning

Weathering steel, if Approved, shall be cleaned and handled in accordance with
the Technical Specifications. Substructures shall be protected from staining by
proper detailing of steel girders, and by application of protective coating in the
proximity of the substructure. Painting of the exterior girder/fascia may be
required as an aesthetic enhancement.
6.14
Co rro s io n P ro te ctio n
6.14.1
Dissimilar Metals
Careful attention shall be given in selecting combinations of metal components
that do not promote dissimilar metals corrosion. Provisions shall be made to
ensure proper separation of dissimilar metals if the use of dissimilar metals is
Approved. Use of separation materials or coatings shall be detailed in Drawings
where possibility of dissimilar metal contact may occur.
6.14.2
Stainless Steel
Stainless steel is a preferred corrosion protection system. Grade of steel must be
specified.
6.14.3
Structural Steel Paint System

If Approved, steel structures may be painted with an Approved high quality
coating.
All structural steel bridge members that require coatings shall receive a threecoat paint system in accordance with an Approved Specification.
A paint warranty form for the paint system (see Appendix D for Warranty Forms)
shall be included with the Specifications.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

6.14.4
PAGE 22
2015
Galvanizing
6.14.4.1
Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members

Galvanizing of structural steel shall be performed in accordance with the
Structural Steel Specification 005201(Appendix C).
6.14.4.2
Repairs of galvanized elements

Repairs of galvanized elements shall be made using metalizing, unless
Approved otherwise.
If Approved, repairs of galvanized elements may be done using zinc rich
paint, such as ZINGA. Zinc rich paint should contain a pure zinc content
of at least 95%.
6.14.4.3
Galvanizing of Bolts for Bridges

All anchor bolts, tie-down hardware, and miscellaneous steel (ladders,
platforms, grating, etc.) are to be hot-dip galvanized. While ASTM A307
(coarse thread) bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized, A325M (fine thread)
bolts must be mechanically galvanized when utilized either with
galvanized steel components, or coated with single-coat inorganic paint
systems when slip critical connections are utilized. Other applications
not requiring full torque of the bolts may use hot-dip galvanized A325M
bolts.
6.14.4.4
Galvanizing of Bolts for Miscellaneous Structures

Bolts for connections of structural steel members of miscellaneous
structures other than bridges, including overhead sign structures, traffic
mast arms, ground-mounted signs, etc., shall be ASTM - A325M, and
shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel, unless Approved
otherwise.
6.14.5
Paint Coating of Galvanized Steel Elements

Where specified, galvanized elements may be painted using Approved urethane
paint. Pre-approved systems such as GALVATONE or equal shall be used.
6.15
De s ig n a n d Deta ilin g
6.15.1
Deck Joints
Generally, steel-girder superstructure should be combined with jointless concrete
deck construction and, if feasible, semi-integral or integral abutments.
Deck joints on steel girder superstructures shall be erected by bolting to girders.
Bolted connections shall utilize slotted holes to provide adjustment in all
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 23
2015
directions.
6.15.2
Steel Girders
Stiffened girder plate girder webs shall in no case have intermediate transverse
stiffeners spaced farther than 150% of the girder height.
Vertical connection plates, such as transverse stiffeners, which are used for
connecting diaphragms or cross frames, shall be rigidly connected to girder
flanges.
Diaphragms shall be 30% and preferably 50% of the girder height.
Crevice-creating details shall be eliminated when possible; therefore, the use of
stiffeners and bracing should be minimized.
Fracture-critical elements shall be clearly identified on the Drawings.
6.16
We ldin g
6.16.1
Field welding is not permitted, unless Approved otherwise.
6.16.2
Welding of steel structural elements shall be done using continuous welds,

regardless of structural requirements.
6.16.3
Prior to the commencement of steel fabrication, a meeting shall be set up with the
fabricator, General Contractor, Engineer, third party testing, and City
representatives to discuss the fabrication process and quality assurance
procedures.
6.16.4
Welding components after galvanizing is generally not acceptable. In some

exceptional cases, upon submission and Approval of detailed procedure, welding
of components after galvanizing may be allowed.
6.16.5
Quality control and quality assurance of welding shall be project-specific and

shall be clearly outlined on the Drawings.
6.17
Ma s o n ry S tru c tu re s
A Standard Specification addressing masonry structures, such as noise walls, is included in

Appendix C:
002850
Noise Barriers
Only pre-approved masonry products and systems shall be used for noise walls and
retaining walls. Masonry products shall not be used for highway-loaded ramps or retaining
walls in splash zones (10 m horizontally from the paved traffic lane and 3 m vertically from
the surface of pavement).
THE CITY OF CALGARY

6.18
PAGE 24
2015
Oth er Ma terials
The composition, properties, and performance of materials not specifically covered in this
Document or in the reference Standards, shall be specified by taking into account design
loads and environmental degradation during the structure design life.
All new materials and products proposed for application in bridges and structures shall be
pre-Approved or submitted for review and Approval.
6.19
In s p e c tio n a n d Main te na n c e Ac c e s s
Provisions shall be made in all bridge design and detailing to accommodate routine bridge
condition inspections of all bridge components. Sizes, location and clearances shall be
designed to enable access to all components for inspection and maintenance activities.
6.20
Ap p ro a c h S la b s
Bridges on roadways with asphalt wearing surfaces shall be provided with reinforced
concrete approach slabs anchored to the abutments. The joint between the abutment and
approach slab shall be sealed.
6.21
Ove rla ys
Unless Approved otherwise, vehicular bridge decks shall receive a deck waterproofing
membrane and two layers of asphalt overlay in accordance with the City of Calgary
Specification included in Appendix C.
Polymer Modified Asphalt overlay may be proposed for some specific bridge locations, such
as widening of an existing structure with similar overlay or in deck rehabilitation, in
accordance with City of Calgary Specification included in Appendix C.
6.22
Co n s tru c tio n
6.22.1
The quality of materials, construction or performance standards and performance

of final products shall be specified on Drawings or in the Specifications. Quality
assurance standards and methods shall be specified on Drawings or in the
Specifications.
6.22.2
Strict conformance of construction with the technical contract documents is the

responsibility of the Engineer of Record and the Contractor.
6.22.3
Conformance of the construction with contract documents is of paramount

importance as related to durability of structures. Deviation from construction
methods assumed for design purposes may cause load effects, built-in stresses
and component resistances different from those anticipated in the design.
6.22.4
The Engineer of Record shall be responsible for compliance of construction

scope and quality with Contract Documents.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

6.22.5
PAGE 25
2015
Alternate methods of construction may be proposed to the Engineer of Record for

review and consideration. A recommendation authenticated by the Engineer of
Record shall be submitted to the City prior to construction using alternate
construction methods.
7.0 SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES

7.1 Ge n e ral
Structural components shall be designed to satisfy the requirements for:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Crack control
Stress limits
Deformation control
Vibration control*
*Bridges only
Structures shall be designed and constructed as good and as robust as necessary in order
to satisfy the required service life with minimum amount of foreseen maintenance.
7.2 Cra c k Co n trol
Cracks in reinforced and partially pre-stressed concrete structures are expected to occur,
however, crack width and spacing shall be controlled by adequate and well-detailed
reinforcement.
Pre-compression of concrete superstructures, thus preventing cracks under tensile stresses
through use of pre-stressed concrete, is required. Partially pre-stressed bridge components
shall have sufficient amount of pre-stress so that under permanent loads the cracks caused
by live load remain closed.
For best crack control detailing, the reinforcing bars should be located closer to the tensile
face than the pre-stressing tendons.
7.2.1
Crack Control and Reinforcement

Crack control shall be implemented by limiting the crack widths using one of the
methods specified below.
i.
Calculated Crack Width
At the Serviceability Limit State, if the tension in concrete exceeds f cr , the crack
widths shall be calculated using a method proposed in CAN/CSA-S6.
ii.
Measuring Crack Width
Cracks shall not be wider than the following:
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 26
2015
Concrete exposed to de-icing chemicals:

0.25 mm for non-pre-stressed concrete
0.15 mm for pre-stressed concrete
Concrete not exposed to de-icing chemicals:
0.30 mm for non-pre-stressed concrete
0.20 mm for pre-stressed concrete
Note: Concrete decks (with or without Waterproofing Membrane) are considered
surfaces that are subject to spray or surface runoff containing de-icing chemicals.
Girders of bridges spanning over the roadways shall be considered exposed to
de-icing chemicals.
7.2.2
Amount and Distribution of Tension Reinforcement

Crack control shall be achieved by proper distribution of tension reinforcement in
the zones of maximum tensile stresses, selection of bar sizes, reinforcement
ratios and control of stresses at Serviceability Limit States.
The following conditions shall be met in order to satisfy the crack control
requirements:
i.
For Concrete exposed to chlorides:

Maximum tensile stress in reinforcing steel f s shall be 180 MPa
Maximum bar spacing 200 mm
Maximum bar diameter:
20M for reinforced concrete
15M for pre-stressed concrete
ii.
For Concrete exposed to freeze thaw conditions:

Maximum tensile stress in reinforcing steel f s shall be 200 MPa
Maximum bar spacing lesser of 20d or 300 mm
Maximum bar diameter:
25M for reinforced concrete
20M for pre-stressed concrete
7.2.3
Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement

Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement normal to the principal reinforcement
shall be provided in each face of concrete structural elements. The shrinkage and
temperature reinforcement shall be provided as required by the analysis, but not
less than 15M @ 250 millimeters in each face and each direction, unless
Approved otherwise.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 27
2015
7.3 S tre s s Lim its

Under service load conditions the limitation of stresses may be required for:
i.
Tensile stresses in concrete Limitation of tensile stresses in

concrete is an adequate measure to reduce probability of cracking.
ii. Compressive stresses in concrete Limitation of compressive
stress in concrete controls plastic strains and longitudinal cracks.
iii. Tensile stress in steel Limitation of tensile stress in reinforcement
prevents uncontrolled cracking.
The stresses at Serviceability Limit State loads shall include any effects of re-distribution of
moments due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation of pre-stressing steel.
7.4 De fo rm atio n
7.4.1
Dimensional changes, deflections and rotations shall be included in the design to

assure proper and safe functioning of the structures, avoidance of damage to
non-structural elements and good appearance. Effect of short and long term
deformations shall be analyzed and included in the design and detailing of
structures. Structures shall be designed with camber so as to compensate for
long term deformations of concrete.
7.4.2
All flexural members shall have adequate stiffness in order to limit deflections and
to control vibration, which may adversely affect the strength or serviceability of
the structure. Deflections and vibration control shall be designed in accordance
with CAN/CSA S6 (latest edition).
7.5 Vib ra tio n

7.5.1
General
Vibrations of structures may affect serviceability as follows:
i.
ii.
Functional effects (i.e. discomfort of pedestrians)

Structural effects on secondary and non-structural elements
The vibration behaviour of structures can be influenced by the following

measures:
i.
ii.
7.5.2
Change of the natural frequency by changing the rigidity of the

structure or vibrating mass.
Increase the effectiveness of damping features.
Superstructure Vibration
Design and Construction of New Bridges:
Dynamic design analysis shall be performed for all bridges with spans longer
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 28
2015
than 20 m length, or with first flexural frequency below 6Hz.

Design to control vertical, transverse and longitudinal vibrations of bridges used
by pedestrians shall be done in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition) and
the Commentary. Wind, traffic-induced vibrations as well as load of pedestrian
traversing the superstructure shall be considered.
Modifications to the Existing Bridges:
Dynamic analysis shall be performed to assess impacts of superstructure
modifications, particularly where the original first flexural frequency of the
structure is altered as a result of the modifications.
8.0 FATIGUE LIMIT STATE

Refer to Section 5.11 Dynamic Analysis of CAN/CSA-S6.
8.1 Re in fo rc e d a n d P re-s tre s s e d Co n c re te
8.1.1
Fatigue design shall be performed for structural elements and the requirements
of Fatigue Limit State shall be satisfied. Special care shall be exercised in areas
of complicated load path. In partially pre-stressed concrete members, fatigue is
considered to be a critical limit state.
8.1.2
Tack welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted. Bends and welded joints of
reinforcing steel shall be avoided in areas of high stress range.
8.2 S tru c tu ra l S te e l
The fatigue criteria for structural steel shall be in accordance with the standard specification
for Structural Steel Supply and Fabrication (see Appendix C).
9.0 DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES

9.1 S c o p e
9.1.1
This section describes the structural design requirements for the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
9.1.2
Foundations;
Retaining walls;
Buried reinforced concrete and steel structures;
Tunnelled structures;
Portal structures.
A Standard Specification is included in this document for mechanically stabilized

earth retaining walls:
003483
MSE Wall (see Appendix C)
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 29
2015
9.2 Co d e s a n d S p e c ific ation s

The design shall, where applicable, be in accordance with the requirements of:
i.
ii.
CAN/CSA S6 (latest edition)

Canadian Foundation Engineering Manual, latest revision.
9.3 Ge o te c h nic a l Re p o rt
9.3.1
A geotechnical engineer shall provide a Geotechnical Report that shall include all
necessary information for design and construction of foundations and earth
retaining structures.
9.3.2
The report shall be based on suitable subsurface investigation and laboratory

tests, and shall describe the soils conditions in detail, and provide
recommendations for suitable foundation types with consideration for
constructability issues.
9.3.3
The report shall include appropriate design parameters pertaining to permanent

conditions and, where applicable, to temporary conditions.
9.3.4
The report shall identify subsurface conditions or seasonal effects that could have
a significant impact on construction, such as slope stability or the presence of
large boulders or artesian ground water. Requirements for casing of foundations
shall be also identified.
9.3.5
Impact of the proposed structure and its construction on adjacent property shall
be addressed.
9.3.6
Consultation between the structural engineer and geotechnical engineer shall

take place during planning, design and construction.
9.4 De s ig n
Foundations and retaining walls shall be designed to satisfy requirements of Ultimate Limit
States and Serviceability Limit States.
9.5 Lo a d s
9.5.1
General
Permanent and temporary loads that require evaluation include:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Horizontal and vertical forces from soil pressure;

Forces from hydrostatic pressure;
Loads from structures adjacent to the designed structure
Loads from surface traffic;
THE CITY OF CALGARY

v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
9.5.2
PAGE 30
2015
Loads from surface storage of materials and equipment;

Loads from major underground utility structures;
Environmental loads (e.g. snow; ice, frost);
Loads arising from differential settlement and soil consolidation;
Other site-specific loads.
Lateral Earth Pressure and Vertical Earth Pressure

Vertical pressure from superimposed earth load shall be calculated as per
Section 7 of CHDBC, with a mass density as determined by the geotechnical
engineer. For submerged or partially submerged conditions, recommended
densities of the earth shall be obtained from the geotechnical engineer. Due
consideration shall be given to temporary loads arising from construction
equipment or from stockpiling of construction material or excavated materials at
the ground surface.
A minimum earth load assuming that one (1) meter of fill may be removed, for
example for road or utility construction, shall also be considered.
Structures which retain earth shall be designed for horizontal earth pressure due
to earth abutting against the structure and load surcharges resting on the abutting
earth. The pressure shall be determined by considering the relevant parameters
including:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
Configuration, nature and drainage properties of the backfill

material;
Displacement characteristics of the retaining wall or structure;
Interface conditions between the wall and the backfill;
Method and degree of compaction of the backfill material;
Location of groundwater (existing/ or future);
Artesian conditions;
Live and dead loads imposed by adjacent foundations;
Location of the wall or structure relative to ground surface.
Effect of construction methodology and sequencing.
The earth pressure acting on a retaining wall or structure may range from active
earth pressure to passive earth pressure, depending on the displacement
characteristics of the wall and the methods of compaction of the backfill.
Values of loads, earth pressure coefficients and relevant assumptions shall be
shown on the Drawings. In case of any deviations of the site conditions or
construction methods from the original assumptions, the design adjustments shall
be made and the changes shall be reflected on Record Drawings.
9.5.3
Water Pressures and Buoyancy

The effects of water pressure and buoyancy shall be considered whenever the
presence of groundwater is indicated. High and low water tables shall be
established for the life of the structure with due consideration given to the
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 31
2015
possibility of future changes in groundwater elevation.

The design shall take into account the effect of water pressures pertaining to
construction sequence.
9.5.4
Flooding
Local flooding may add load to underground structures or may undermine the
stability of superstructures. Design of structures shall make allowance for flood
elevations based on the 100 year flood. An allowance of one (1) meter clearance
from 100 year flood elevation shall be made. The elevations used for design shall
be subject to review by The City.
9.5.5
Loads from Adjacent Building Foundations or Other Structures

Horizontal and vertical distribution of loads from foundations of existing buildings
shall be determined by the Engineer, in consultation with the geotechnical
engineer.
Consideration shall be given to the minimum and maximum loads which can be
transferred to the underground structure. Where possible, these loads shall be
based on the actual design loads for the adjacent structure. In the absence of this
information, a rational approach should be used by the Engineer to evaluate the
probable loading from the existing structure.
When performing the above analyses, the Engineer shall determine the need for
all permanent underpinning of buildings or other structures.
9.6 S tru c tu ra l Ele m e nts

Footings, deep foundation components, ground anchors, Mechanically Stabilized Earth
structural systems and other retaining structures shall be considered as structural elements
and shall be designed in accordance with the appropriate sections of the CAN/CSA-S6 by a
qualified structural Engineer registered in Alberta.
9.7 Co n s tru c tio n Me th o d s
9.7.1
The method(s) and/or sequence of construction influences the behaviour and

loading conditions applied to a structural system. Consequently, if a structural
analysis is based on a particular method or sequence of construction, these
conditions must be defined in the construction documents.
9.7.2
The design and construction of all underground structures, whether temporary or

permanent, must ensure that movements of adjacent structures and ground do
not exceed acceptable levels. The effect(s) of movement on adjacent structures
must be evaluated by a structural engineer. Allowable limits on movement or
differential settlement must be identified and protective measure taken to ensure
that these limits are not exceeded. Protective measures must be agreed to by
the City and the Owner of the structure under consideration.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

9.7.3
PAGE 32
2015
Groundwater inflow shall be controlled during construction in accordance with the

relevant technical Specification.
9.8 P ro p rieta ry Wa lls

9.8.1
The City reserves the right to reject any alternate wall system or details which do
not conform to the control plans, pre-approved details, City of Calgary Design
Guidelines or CAN/CSA-S6 Standard.
9.8.2
Investigation shall be done to identify if the location of any underground utilities

would interfere with the wall systems and their modules or straps in any way.
9.8.3
MSE walls or bin type walls shall not be used in situations in which maintenance
crews of the underground utilities will potentially dig into the straps, mesh or
modules. Conventional retaining walls shall be used in these instances.
9.8.4
Foundations for bridges and overhead sign structures shall not be placed on the
reinforced backfill of MSE walls (i.e. separate rigid foundation shall be provided).
9.9 In s p e c tio n a n d Qu ality As s u ra n c e

9.9.1
During construction, installation of foundations, ground anchors, MSE and other

retaining walls, shall be inspected by the geotechnical engineer to confirm that
the actual soil conditions are consistent with the design assumptions and that the
geotechnical aspects of the project are consistent with the design assumptions.
9.9.2
Any impact of actual site conditions or construction method on the new or existing
structure shall be assessed by both the geotechnical and the structural engineer.
9.9.3
Copies of the Inspection Reports shall be included in the construction records

and any Approved variance of construction installation or details, from the
Drawings or Specifications shall be reflected on Record Drawings.
10.0 CABLE STAYED BRIDGES

10.1
Ge n e ral
The following supplementary requirements to CAN/CSA S6, latest edition shall be met for
cable stayed bridges designed and constructed for The City of Calgary, unless Approved
otherwise.
10.2
Re fe re n c e P u blic atio n s
Recommended reference publications include:

i.
Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI) Recommendations for Stay-Cable

Design, Testing and Installation
THE CITY OF CALGARY

ii.
10.3
PAGE 33
2015
Fdration Internationale du bton (Fib) CEB FIP Acceptance of

Stay Cable Systems Using Pre-stressing Steels.
Lim itatio n s
Cable stayed structures should be chosen where the context is appropriate. These
structures can have very high pylons that may not be suitable for certain urban areas.
10.4
De s ig n
10.4.1
General
Design life of cable stayed bridges shall be 100 years.
10.4.2
System
The Citys preference is to use redundant cable stay systems where systems
consisting of multiple tensile elements rather than systems relying on a single
tensile element. However, mono-bar stays may be considered upon Approval if
the design addresses redundancy.
Analysis of the structure shall include, but not be limited to, elongations and
forces during all stages of construction, service, pylon deformations, cable
replacement, etc.
10.4.3
Loads
Transverse loads applied from stay cables to the structure.
Guide deviators shall be installed near the anchorage to protect the stay cable
anchorages from the effects of transverse loads caused by:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Cable vibration
Deformation of the structure
Change of cable sag
Wind
Temperature changes
Live load
Construction tolerance
Other transverse loads specific to the conditions
Each component of the cable stay system, from stressing end anchorage,
through free length to saddle (if applicable) to next anchorage, etc., shall have
the same safety and durability considerations under Serviceability Limit States,
Fatigue Limit States, and Ultimate Limit States.
10.4.4
Materials
Choice of structural steel material for cable stay systems is based on chemical
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 34
2015
and mechanical characteristics as well as on performance-or fatigue criteria.

High quality steels shall be specified for stay cable performance.
High strength pre-stressing steels should meet the criteria as outlined in Table
10.4.4 for stay cable applications:
Table 10.4.4:
Standard Classification for Pre-stressing Steels for Cable Stays
Cable Stay Bar diameter
Cable Stay Tensile strength
10.4.5
26 50 mm
1030 1050 MPa
Cable Stay and Anchorages

Cable stay systems should be replaceable either one or several at a time.
Only tested cables and anchorages are acceptable. In the cases where
commercially available systems are not used, testing of cables and anchorage
assembly shall be specified. Testing shall include axial fatigue testing with
bending effect and purely axial fatigue test at 2.0 million cycles. A minimum
factor of safety of 1.5 shall be used for fatigue strength values obtained from the
tests.
Cable stays and anchorages shall be designed for fatigue and strength with
respect of all applicable loads and deformations.
Minimum length adjustment capacity must be provided at the anchorages of stay
cables for re-stressing and de-tensioning. Instrumentation capable of verifying
and controlling cable stress forces throughout the construction process must be
considered when selecting cable stay and anchoring systems.
Cable vibrations, including risk of parametric excitation as well as train traffic,
wind and rain induced vibration, shall be evaluated, and based on expected
internal damping).
10.4.6
Grounding
Lightning protection through grounding shall be included in the design.
10.4.7
Functional Requirements
The design for the specified lifetime shall be satisfied for exposure conditions
defined as High Corrosion Risk.
A clearly defined corrosion protection system shall be submitted and verified or
tested as applicable.
Stay cable design should include protection measures to mitigate against impact,
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 35
2015
vandalism, fire and lightning.

Stay cables shall be located such that they do not pose a climbing hazard.
Design shall take into consideration birds and wildlife that may come in conflict
with the stay cables. If necessary, bird deterrent shall be provided.
Connections and clamps shall be designed to avoid transverse forces or effects
that would be harmful to the fatigue and tensile strength of the stay cable.
10.5
Co rro s io n P ro te ctio n
10.5.1
Multi-layer corrosion protection which is adequate for the entire life of the stay
cables is required.
10.5.2
Materials in cable stay systems shall be designed for the design life of the entire
system. This includes any planned replacement at predictable intervals. The cost
of such replacements shall be included in the life-cycle cost analysis.
10.5.3
Recommended metallic coating is hot dip galvanizing with zinc or zinc/ aluminum
during the manufacturing process of pre-stressing steel. Stainless steel may also
be considered, upon Approval.
10.5.4
Recommended soft filling materials include wax with low oil content. Stay pipe
material shall be Approved by The City.
10.5.5
Any exposed metallic surface on anchorage components shall be protected

against corrosion. Generally, anchorage components are factory-provided with
corrosion protection.
10.6
Co n s tru c tio n Co n s id era tio n s
10.6.1
Specialist contractor responsible for the bridge erection shall prepare a detailed
erection plan and procedure. Limitations of bridge erection over water bodies,
CPR and live lines of LRT shall be discussed with the respective Right of Way
owners or regulatory agencies, as applicable.
10.6.2
Construction tolerances: directional installation tolerance of the bearing plates

and guide pipes is +/- 5 mrad (+/- 0.3 degrees) around the theoretical axis of the
stay cable and +/- 10 mm in positioning of the anchorage.
10.6.3
Transverse loads on the anchorages must be kept low by appropriate use of

guide deviators. Transverse forces in the transition zone must be absorbed as to
avoid fretting corrosion. Any possible effects of angular deviations or fatigue may
be verified by full scale testing.
10.7
Qu a lity As s u ra n c e
The fatigue and ultimate capacity of the cable stay system must be verified by testing.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

10.8
PAGE 36
2015
Ma inte n a n c e
10.8.1
A maintenance program for the cable stay system from the system supplier shall
be evaluated during design. Allowance for maintenance and inspection of stay
cable systems shall be included in the bridge design.
10.8.2
The warranty period for the performance of the cable stay systems shall be
minimum ten (10) years.
10.8.3
Project closure documents shall include a maintenance manual for all bridge
elements including cable stays.
11.0 INTEGRAL ABUTMENT BRIDGES

11.1
Ch a ra c te ris tic s of In te gra l Ab u tm e n t Brid g e s
11.1.1
Integral abutment bridges accommodate superstructure movements without

expansion joints or bearings. The superstructure is rigidly connected to the
substructure and any movement caused by volumetric changes is facilitated
through flexible piling of bridge abutments.
11.1.2
Approach slabs, connected to the abutment and deck slab with reinforcement,
move with the superstructure. At its junction to the approach pavement, the
approach slab shall be supported by a sleeper slab. If a sleeper slab is not
utilized, the superstructure movement is accommodated using flexible pavement
joints. Please refer to typical detail in Appendix E.
11.1.3
Stability of single span bridges is provided by passive pressure behind the back
wall. In multi span bridges, piers contribute to the bridges stability.
11.2
Lim itatio n s
11.2.1
Length of Structure
The maximum length for integral abutment bridges shall be as follows:
Steel girder bridges: 80 m
Pre-stressed concrete girder bridges: 100 m
Span length and configuration shall be considered when selecting an integral
type for the bridge.
11.2.2
Geometry
Integral bridge design and construction shall not be used for bridges with curved
or flared alignment.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

11.2.3
PAGE 37
2015
Skew
The maximum skew angle for integral abutment bridge designs shall be twenty
(20) degrees. Skew angles greater than this shall preclude the use of integral
abutment bridge construction.
11.2.4
Grades
The maximum grade between integral abutments shall be 5%.
11.2.5
Piles
Integral bridges require that abutment piles be flexible. Sufficient pile penetration
into acceptable soil is required to ensure adequate flexibility and sufficient lateral
support for piles.
An integral abutment system shall not be considered where the lengths of the
piles are less than 5 m or if rigid foundations are required.
11.3
De s ig n
11.3.1
Loads
Integral abutment bridges shall be designed to resist all vertical and horizontal
forces acting on them in all applicable load combinations and stages of
construction and service.
Dynamic load allowance shall be included in design of integral abutments and
piles.
At-rest earth pressure should be used for bridges not exceeding 25 m.
11.3.2
Pile Orientation
Typically primary structure movement would produce bending about the weak
axis of piles. The weak axis of piles shall be perpendicular to the centreline of
the girders regardless of the skew. The orientation of the piles shall be based on
the design considerations.
In stiff soils, piles shall be placed in 600 mm diameter pre-augured holes that are
typically 3 m deep. The holes shall be cased with corrugated steel pipes and
filled with loose granular material.
11.3.3
Structural Analysis
The connection between the abutments and the superstructure shall be assumed
as pinned for the analysis and design of the superstructure.
Analytical model should be based on soil-pile interaction modelled as a series of
springs along the length of the piles, based on modulus of subgrade reaction.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 38
2015
The equivalent cantilever method may also be used. The piles shall be designed
as beam-columns.
11.3.4
Girder Design
Girders shall be designed assuming no fixity at abutments. The superstructure
design shall include a check for the effects of fixity.
Beneficial effect of axial compression induced in girders due to earth pressure
shall not be included in the design of the girders.
11.3.5
Abutment Design
The maximum bending moment obtained from frame analysis should be
assumed to act at the corners of the idealized frame.
The distribution of moments from wing walls to the abutments shall be considered
in the design of horizontal reinforcement of the abutments.
The abutment shall be supported on a single row of vertical H-piles. The top of
piles shall be embedded a minimum of 600 mm into the abutment and shall be
adequately reinforced to transfer the bending forces.
11.3.6
Piers
In modeling multi-span bridges, pier shafts with elastomeric bearings may be
modeled as equivalent springs. If pier shafts are monolithic, they may be
modeled as rigid frames.
11.3.7
Approach Slabs
Approach slab lengths typically vary from a minimum of 3.0 m to a maximum of
6.0 m unless Approved.
Special provisions shall be made to allow free movement of the approach slabs if
curbs or barriers are present. Approach slabs shall always be a separate pour
from the superstructure slab, but shall have a positive connection between the
approach slab and the abutment.
The approach slab shall be specified to be cast on two (2) layers of six (6)
millimeter thick polyethylene sheets or other Approved durable friction-reducing
materials. It shall be designed as a structural slab that is supported at each end.
Provisions shall be made for expansion at the end of each approach slab. See
details in Appendix E for expansion joints at the ends of the approach slab.
A lateral drainage system should be provided at the end of the approach slab
adjacent to the sleeper slab.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 39
2015
12.0 SEMI-INTEGRAL ABUTMENT BRIDGES

In lieu of conventional deck joint bridges, or where a full integral bridge is not desirable, semiintegral bridges may be considered.
12.1
Ch a ra c te ris tic s of S em i-In te gra l Brid g e s
12.1.1
Semi-integral abutment bridges are single or multiple span bridge structures with
rigid foundations and a continuous superstructure whose integral characteristics
include a joint-less deck, integral end diaphragms, compressible backfill and
movable bearings.
12.1.2
In semi-integral bridges, the transfer of displacement due to the piles is

minimized. The rotation is generally accomplished by use of a flexible bearing
surface at a horizontal interface in the abutment.
12.1.3
Horizontal displacements not eliminated in a semi-integral concept must still be

considered in the design. A control joint is provided at the end of the approach
slab that is detailed to slide between the wing walls. See details in Appendix E.
12.2
Lim itatio n s
12.2.1
Length of Structure
The overall length of semi-integral abutment bridges should not exceed 130
meters.
12.2.2
Geometry
This type of design shall only be used for symmetric, straight girder structures.
The effects of other geometric constrains such as curved, flared alignments, shall
be thoroughly investigated.
Bridges with approach slabs formed at super-elevation, curved, horizontally flared
or of irregular shapes shall not be designed as semi-integral abutment structures.
12.2.3
Skew
The effect of skew angle on bridge performance for semi-integral abutment
bridges shall be carefully analyzed.
12.2.4
Piles
A single row of piles should not be utilized. The foundation piles should be
stiffened by inclusion of battered piles, or the foundation may be founded on
bedrock.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

12.3
PAGE 40
2015
De s ig n
The geometry of the approach slab, design of the wingwalls and transition parapet, if any,
must be compatible with the freedom required for the integral configuration (girders, deck,
backwall and approach slab) to move longitudinally.
Lateral restraint should be provided to prevent rotation of the superstructure caused by an
eccentric lateral force in the horizontal plane. This force is usually the result of lateral earth
pressure acting on both ends of the superstructure.
12.3.1
Use of Retained Soil System

A retained soil system may be used to resist lateral earth pressure; however the
vertical loads shall be transferred to the rigid foundations (spread footing or group
of piles) through the use of columns placed behind the fascia of the retained soil
system. Consideration shall be given to the location of columns so that any
conflict with the earth reinforcing system is avoided.
12.3.2
Articulation of Superstructure
The articulation of the superstructure at the supports of multi-span structures
shall be selected such that equal movement would occur at each end of the
structure.
A positive movement restraint shall be provided for longer spans, super-elevated
and skew bridges. For multi-span bridges, anchorage to piers to prevent lateral
transition can provide extra longitudinal restraint.
12.4
De ta ils
Consideration shall be given to detailing of joints, use of appropriate bearings, arrangement

of diaphragms and details of wingwalls and approach slabs.
12.4.1
Approach Slabs
Separation joints shall be detailed such that movement is accommodated without
breaking continuity and restricting movement of the superstructure with respect to
substructure. The length of wingwalls and approach slabs shall be minimized.
The movement system at the ends of the approach slabs shall be able to
accommodate the superstructure deformation.
Reference Chapter 11, Section 11.3.5 and Appendix E for approach slab
requirements.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 41
2015
13.0 BRIDGE DECK JOINTS AND BEARINGS

13.1
Ge n e ral
Deck joints and bearings shall be designed to resist loads and accommodate movements at
the Ultimate Limit States (ULS) and Serviceability Limit States (SLS). All exposed surfaces
of joints and bearings shall be protected against corrosion. The method and details of
corrosion protection shall be Approved by The City.
13.2
De s ig n Re q u ire m e nts
13.2.1
The selection and location of bearings and joints shall be consistent with the
designed articulation of the structure.
13.2.2
The moving components of the joints shall be designed to function in concert with
the bearings in order to avoid binding the joints and adversely affecting force
effects imposed on bearings. Thus, whether in an expansion or a contraction
mode, the movement range of the joint must be compatible with that of the
bearings supporting that joint.
13.2.3
Besides movement due to temperature variation, the design of expansion joints

and bearings must consider the effects of creep, shrinkage, skew, rotation, lateral
shear, vertical shear, elastic shortening due to pre-stressing, traffic loading,
construction tolerances and other effects specific to the designed structure. The
restraint of movement may result in significant internal forces. These forces shall
be carefully assessed and submitted for review.
13.3
Te m p e ra tu re Va ria tio n Effe c ts o n De c k J o ints a n d Be a rin g s
Bridge movement due to temperature variation (range) shall be calculated from the extreme
temperatures (Maximum Daily Mean Temperature and Minimum Daily Mean Temperature),
as specified in Table 7 of CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
For Calgary area the extreme Daily Mean Temperatures are:
38C and + 28C
13.4
Ge n e ral P o lic y fo r De ck J o ints
Bridge deck joints are a continuous maintenance problem, and in many instances induce a
source of structural deterioration, thereby affecting the structure life cycle. Minimizing the
use of joints shall be considered. Refer to Clause 6.2.4 Durability, Structural Details.
13.5
De c k J o in ts - Fu n c tio na l Re q u ire m e nts
13.5.1
Deck joints shall be designed to provide unimpeded passage of traffic across

them.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 42
2015
13.5.2
The type of joint and size of joint gap shall facilitate safe passage of pedestrians,
cyclists, in-line skaters, wheelchair users and motorists. Maximum opening at
joints in pedestrian and bicycle paths shall not exceed 25 mm.
13.5.3
The joint must provide a good riding surface, relatively free from vibration and
noise.
13.5.4
Galvanized steel plates with skid-resistant coating shall be provided over

expansion joint gaps at pedestrian bridges and sidewalks.
13.5.5
Galvanized steel cover plates shall be used over the expansion joints at traffic
barriers, medians and curbs. Cover plates shall have an Approved non-slip
coating applied.
13.6
De c k J o in ts - De s ig n an d De ta ilin g
13.6.1
Deck joints shall be designed to resist wheel loads, including Dynamic Load
Allowance, and shall accommodate movements at the SLS, Fatigue Limit State
(FLS) and ULS, in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
13.6.2
Steel extrusions and their anchorage/ support system shall be designed as

necessary to resist all anticipated loads, including Dynamic Load Allowance.
13.6.3
Deck joints shall be detailed and designed to accommodate movement and

rotation of the structure as dictated by articulation of the structural system.
13.6.4
Special consideration shall be given when the length contributing to expansion is

greater than 75 meters or the bridge skew angle is more than 25.
13.6.5
Modular type deck joints are recommended for joint movements in excess of 100
mm.
13.6.6
The minimum joint opening shall be specified in accordance with the

manufacturers recommendations, to meet the design requirements. When
setting the joint, either the design width shall be decreased by the amount of
anticipated movement due to creep and shrinkage, or the joint shall be set to the
minimum width for installing the seal, whichever results in the wider opening.
13.6.7
Strip seal deck joints shall be used unless otherwise Approved by the City.
Sealed joints shall remain watertight at the SLS. Compression seals shall not be
used unless Approved otherwise.
13.6.8
Elastomeric strip seal joints with continuous watertight seal shall be placed so
that at the minimum gap opening the entire seal remains below the roadway
surface.
13.6.9
The neoprene gland shall be continuous for the full roadway/ walkway. Expansion
joint glands may be discontinued at bridge barriers that run between a roadway
and a sidewalk. However reliable drainage provisions must be made to prevent
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 43
2015
stormwater from impacting the structure.

13.6.10 A full steel armour plate is required over the barriers joint. The joint materials
shall be resistant to both corrosion and ultraviolet (UV) rays and shall not be
conducive to electrolytic action.
13.6.11 Armour plates shall be galvanized steel, resistant to abrasion and damage by
snow plows. The armour plates shall be detailed to eliminate formation of air
voids during placing concrete. Armour plates shall be anchored to concrete by
anchor studs spaced at 200 mm maximum.
13.6.12 The joint shall be designed for minimum maintenance and ease of access for
parts replacement.
13.6.13 Deck joints shall provide a service life warranty for a minimum of five (5) years.
The City of Calgary warranty forms shall be used (See Appendix D)
13.7
Ge n e ral De s ig n P o lic y fo r Brid g e Be a rin g s
Bridge bearings must accommodate the movements of the superstructure and transmit
loads to the substructure supports. The type of bearings to be used depends on the amount
of translation and rotation as well as the magnitude of the loads.
13.8
Be a rin g Typ e s a n d S p e c ific a tio n s
13.8.1
The choice of a type of bearing shall be determined by suitable analysis.
13.8.2
In general, simple span, prestressed concrete girders, simple span steel girders
and some continuous spans may be supported on composite neoprene bearing
pads (elastomeric bearings). Heavier reactions may be accommodated by using
polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE or teflon bearing surfaces).
13.8.3
Some structures with large bearing loads and/or multidirectional movement may
require other bearing devices such as pot, spherical or disc bearings.
13.8.4
The proposed bearing type and make shall be Approved by The City.
13.8.5
Movement stop devices shall be included with bearing design and are to be an
integral part of the bearing. Shear blocks are not recommended unless
Approved.
13.9
Be a rin g De s ig n
13.9.1
Bearings shall be designed to support and transfer all loads and to accommodate
all translations and rotations in the structure. The design shall be based on
CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition).
13.9.2
If the bearing is proprietary, it shall be designed to satisfy the critical load

combinations at the Ultimate Limit States and Serviceability Limit States. The
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 44
2015
following load information shall be included on bearing Drawings:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Dead Load: at ULS and SLS

Total Load: at ULS and SLS
Lateral Loads: at ULS and SLS
Rotations
Translations
Other information affecting design of bearings
13.9.3
The design shall be submitted for review by the Engineer of Record. Bearing
design and shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by a Professional
Engineer registered in Canada.
13.9.4
The bearings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations, unless directed otherwise in writing, by the Engineer.
13.10
Be a rin g Deta ilin g
13.10.1 The bearing must provide shock absorbing qualities relatively free from rocking
and noise.
13.10.2 Bearings must be designed as necessary to resist all anticipated loads including
dynamic load allowance.
13.10.3 The bearing shall absorb and dissipate the stresses and transfer a portion thereof
without causing overstress to the substructure.
13.10.4 Elastomers used in bearings such as pots, discs, etc., shall provide a service life
equal to or greater than that of the bearing.
13.10.5 The bearing shall be designed for minimum maintenance and for ease of access
in order to avoid excessive jacking of the superstructure during parts
replacement. Bearings shall be replaceable without removing permanent
anchorages. Maximum jacking shall not exceed the amount of vertical relaxation
recovery of the elastomeric material plus 5 mm.
13.10.6 Location of areas designated for superstructure jacking shall be clearly marked
on the drawings.
13.10.7 The bearing assembly shall be capable of sealing off moisture from the inner
components of the bearing assembly.
13.10.8 The bearing materials shall be resistant to both corrosion and U V rays and shall
not be a catalyst or vehicle for electrolytic action. Steel elements of bearing
assemblies shall be galvanized, unless Approved otherwise.
14.0 TRAFFIC BARRIERS

Structural design of bridge barriers and railings shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA S6, latest
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 45
2015
edition. Designers are encouraged to use Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) Guide to
Bridge Traffic Combination Barriers as an additional reference.
14.1
Ba rrie r S e le ctio n a n d De ta ilin g Crite ria
The following factors shall be included in selection, design and detailing of traffic,
pedestrian, bicycle and combination bridge barriers.
14.1.1
Durability in a highly corrosive environment.

Design and detailing shall conform to relevant requirements of Chapter 6.0
DURABILITY of this document.
14.1.2
Ease of repair
Modular construction, removable connections to anchorage systems shall be
considered.
14.1.3
Visibility
Visibility through and over the barrier shall be assured in order to maintain
adequate sight distances.
14.1.4
Snow accumulation on the bridge deck

Snow drifts will accumulate on bridge decks especially where solid barriers are
used. Accommodation of snow removal operation shall be assured by proper
geometric and structural design.
Where the barrier is located between the vehicular and pedestrian traffic, it shall
include a solid protection against splash.
14.1.5
Drainage and joint details

Drainage and joint detailing shall include drain paths and their interruptions or
changes at the barrier interfaces with other elements of the bridge, such as
sidewalks, abutments and approach slabs.
Construction joints in barriers shall be positioned over the drains from sidewalk to
roadway.
14.2
Tra ffic Barrier J oin ts
Traffic barrier joints shall be designed to perform adequately during vehicle impacts as well
as to accommodate bridge movements and barrier deformations.
14.2.1
The following aspects shall be assured in the design and detailing of the joints:
i.
For rigid barriers, i.e. concrete traffic barriers, adequate barrier
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 46
2015
stiffness shall be provided on each side of the joint.

ii.
For semi-rigid barriers, i.e. post and railing barriers, moment and
shear continuity across the joint shall be provided.
14.2.2
Detailing of joints shall include ease of installation and maintenance of strip seals.
14.2.3
Spacing of control joints in concrete barrier shall be assessed based on overall

bridge design parameters, including geometry, bridge deck design, articulation
system, amount of predicted volume changes and temperature gradient. In
general, concrete traffic barriers shall have full contraction joints with
discontinued longitudinal reinforcing at 3 m (approx) and increased amount of
vertical reinforcing near the joints as specified in CAN/CSA S-6, latest edition.
Joints shall be groove-formed and sealed. Refer to attached Appendix E for a
drawing of a typical Bridge Barrier Section.
15.0 HIGHWAY ACCESSORY SUPPORTS

15.1
Ge n e ral Co n s id era tio ns
15.1.1
The visual impact of signing, lighting, and traffic signal installations shall be
considered with regard to and context-sensitive fit. Supports shall be designed to
minimize hazards.
15.1.2
Overhead and cantilever highway accessory support structures located on bridge

superstructures should not be located in areas where they will be subject to the
vibrations caused by live load deflections of the superstructure. Location of
accessory supports directly on the substructure is preferred.
15.1.3
Number of accessory supports within the bridge area shall be minimized. Multiple
purpose poles and structures shall be considered.
15.2
De s ig n a n d Co n s tru ctio n
Refer to Appendix A for Guidelines for Design and Construction of Highway Accessory
Supports.
16.0 NOISE BARRIERS

16.1
De s ig n
16.1.1
Loads and Load Combinations

Noise barrier support components shall be proportioned to satisfy Ultimate Limit
States, Serviceability Limit States and Fatigue Limit States in accordance with
CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition.
Noise Barriers shall be designed to load combinations and load factors included
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 47
2015
in Table A3.2.1 of the CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition. When applicable, traffic

collision loads and bridge deformation loads shall be included in the design.
The design wind load shall be based on 1/25 return period. A gust factor of 2.5
and applicable horizontal drag coefficient shall be used.
16.1.2
Foundations
Foundations shall be designed according to Section 9.4 herein.
Foundation design shall be based on site-specific geotechnical information.
Where limited number of bore holes is available, the design shall be based on the
worst soils conditions likely to be encountered in the vicinity of the designed
barrier. Alternatively, the Canadian Foundation Engineering Manual, latest
revision may be used as reference to the design of smaller noise barrier
foundation in the areas of previously identified soil types. In most cases,
foundations for noise barriers shall be drilled shafts; however, in cases where
shallow rock formations exist, spread footings will likely be used. Provisions for
controlling the effects of frost heaving shall be included in the foundation design.
16.1.3
Standard Details and Site-Specific Design

A number of proprietary noise barrier systems are available. The materials, load
carrying mechanisms and capabilities vary with each system; however, these
systems shall conform to the criteria outlined in these Guidelines (including
specifications) and CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition.
16.1.4
Noise Barriers on Bridges

Location of noise barriers on bridge structures requires Approval.
For noise barrier retrofit onto existing bridges, the design shall include verification
that the dead and live loads from the wall do not overstress any component of the
bridge including the existing parapets, slab overhang, girders and superstructure
members. The dead load of noise barriers can affect the overload capacity and
deflection of some bridges. Consideration of impact of barrier to access for bridge
inspections shall also be made.
16.2
Du ra b ility a n d Ma inte na n c e Re q u irem e n ts
16.2.1
All exposed steel components shall be hot dip galvanized. Alternate protection
systems for steel or aluminum elements shall be subject to approval by the City.
16.2.2
The surface texture selected for noise barriers should be such that it is difficult to
place graffiti or such that graffiti is easily removed.
16.2.3
Corrosion protection systems shall be employed as required by specific exposure

conditions. Suitability of a proposed corrosion protection system shall be
submitted for review by the City.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 48
2015
16.2.4
The provision of corrosion protected reinforcement shall be as determined on a

project to project basis. The location of the noise barrier panels, in relationship to
the offset distance from the roadway shall be evaluated to determine if provision
of corrosion protected reinforcement is warranted.
16.2.5
If the location of noise barrier panels may subject the panels to splashing from
the roadway surface, provision of corrosion protected reinforcement, shall be
specified.
16.3
Fu n c tio n al Re q u ire m e nts
16.3.1
Guardrails or concrete barrier curb shall be used when the noise barrier is
located within the clear zone. Location of the noise barrier shall be Approved by
The City.
16.3.2
Barriers can obstruct sunlight as well as noise. Special consideration shall be

given to possible roadway icing and other induced environmental conditions
caused by the placement of the wall.
16.3.3
It is important to have drainage facilities along noise barriers to assure soil

stability. Soils with angle of internal friction of 25 degrees or less may develop
flowing characteristics when saturated. Surface runoffs shall be directed away
from the noise barrier.
16.3.4
Provisions shall be made to allow access to the back-side of the wall for
maintenance or emergency access. The designer should consult with The City
regarding the specific access needs.
16.3.5
For noise barriers that must bridge over utility conduits, provisions should be
made to accommodate differential settlement in the noise wall substructures.
16.3.6
The posts for noise barriers shall be detailed as plumb vertical elements,
regardless of the ground slope.
16.3.7
For noise barriers located on bridges, provisions shall be made for flexibility of
the walls to accommodate deflections and horizontal movement of the bridge.
16.4
Co n s tru c tio n
16.4.1
All material and construction requirements for Standard Noise Barriers shall be in
accordance with City of Calgary Standard Details for Road Construction.
Alternately, a site-specific design, complete with calculations, detailed drawings
and material, specifications may be submitted for review and Approval by the
City. Such submission shall be authenticated by an Engineer registered in
Alberta.
16.4.2
Standard Specification for Construction of Noise Barriers, included in the

Appendix C shall be used.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

16.4.3
PAGE 49
2015
A Letter of Assurance of Engineering Field Review and Compliance (as stipulated

in Section 16 herein and attached in Appendix B) shall accompany each sitespecific construction project submission.
17.0 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

17.1
Drawin g s
17.1.1
The drawings shall specify all necessary details of a bridge or structure, the
strength of materials, the design loads and proprietary product names.
17.1.2
The articulation system shall be indicated on the drawings, which shall include
location and type of bearings, deck joints and pre-stressing and other information
including, but not limited to, the list below.
17.1.3
Refer to attached Appendix B for a standard Drawing Title Block.
Table 17.1.4
Typ ic a l Lis t of Drawin gs
DRAWING TITLE
DESCRIPTION
Cover Sheet
City of Calgary Logo, Project Title, Consultant Logo.
Index
List of drawings.
Site Plan
Name of Contract, Tender Number, Date, Project location,

Include north arrow. May be combined with Index.
General Arrangement
Overall structure geometry including layout, elevations, and

typical cross-section(s). Calculated critical clearances and
nominal clearance box. Include work points, right of ways,
and extent of contract. Drainage path should also be
identified.
Information Drawings
Utilities, Detours, Removals.
Data Sheet
All design loads, design standards, and general construction

staging. Values of lateral distribution factors. Bending
Moment and Shear Force Live Load Capacity Diagrams with
numerical values at critical points.
Hydrotechnical Information
If applicable. Include high water level, 100 year flood, flow

rates, clearances required to structure.
Geotechnical Information
Borehole locations and profiles including underground
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 50
2015
utilities.
Foundation Layout
Piling layout and details including anticipated pile tip

elevations and pile capacities. Geometry of pile layout
referenced to a Control Line.
Foundation Details
Applied factored and unfactored loads for the critical load

combination at Ultimate and Serviceability Limit States.
Abutments
Abutment geometry: plan and elevation, reinforcing and

associated details including concrete finish and anchor bolt
locations.
Plan and Elevation Abutment Details & Reinforcement

Piers/ Substructure
Pier geometry: plan and elevation, reinforcing and

associated details including concrete finish.
Plan and Elevation Piers Details of Reinforcement

Girder Layout/ Superstructure
Overall layout of girders for complete structure. Construction/

post-tensioning sequence, location of bearings and
diaphragms, expansion joints, handrails, drains.
Girder Details & Reinforcement
Girder geometry including prestressing, post-tensioning and

reinforcing details including duct grouting details. Post
tensioning profiles, camber and haunch diagrams. Locations
of post-tensioning anchorage clearly marked at the exterior
face of concrete components.
Diaphragms
Diaphragm geometry, reinforcing and associated details.
Bearings - Layout
Overall layout of bearings for complete structure.
Bearing Details
Bearing details, type of finish and required design loads and

movements, bearing setting table.
Location of lifting jacks and required lifting capacity.

Deck Layout
Deck geometry, elevations.
Deck Details & Reinforcement
Reinforcing and associated details including construction

sequence, location of construction joints, location of deck
drains and concrete finish.
Overall layout and sections of expansion joints for the
complete structure, details and joint setting table with amount
of total movement anticipated.
Expansion Joints
Approach Slabs
Approach slab geometry, reinforcing and associated details.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 51
2015
Bridge Barrier Layout
Overall layout of barriers, barrier geometry.
Barrier Details & Reinforcement
Reinforcing, and details including joint details and, concrete

finishes.
Handrail Layout
Overall layout of handrails including panel lengths.
Guardrail/ Handrail Details
Splice and expansion details, anchorage and type of finish.
MSE Walls/ Retaining Walls
If applicable. Provide Layout and Details.
Slope Protection
Slope protection geometry, reinforcing and associated details

including concrete finish.
Miscellaneous Details
Miscellaneous details as required, including deck drain

details, waterproofing details and highway accessory support
structures.
Landscape Details
Information on finished grading, drainage, landscaping within

the project scope and contract area.
Electrical Details
As applicable to the project, information on electrical

requirements to facilitate lighting, grounding, signage or
signals.
**Note: Applicable Notes shall be included on the Drawings. Details should be specific to
that particular drawing.
17.2
S p e c ific atio n s
Project specifications, other than, or supplementing the City of Calgary Specifications

included in this document shall be consistent with the design philosophy included in this
document. City of Calgary project specifications may be modified by Special Conditions
upon Approval by the City.
17.3
P re lim in ary De s ig n Re p o rt
Items in the Preliminary Design Report should include:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
General Layout
Geometry (clearances, lengths, widths, etc.)
Right of Way
Drainage concept
Location of substructure and foundation elements
Utilities
Anticipated Retaining Structures
Railings
Articulation of structure
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 52
2015
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
Railings
Fencing
Life cycle cost analysis
Constructability
Major Risks
Aesthetics
Comparison of Options (minimum three options unless Approved
otherwise)
xvii. Surface protection and finishes
xviii. Permanent vertical loads, including bearing pressure at
serviceability limit states and deformations at construction and at
serviceability limit states.
17.4
Qu a lity Co n tro l a n d Qua lity As s u ra n c e
17.4.1
A quality management plan outlining methodology and measures of quality

control and quality assurance throughout all stages of design and construction
shall be submitted to the City for review.
17.4.2
Construction methods, reference to applicable standards and specifications,

requirements for quality control and measures of quality assurance shall be
included in the project drawings and project specifications.
17.4.3
Drawings and specifications shall be submitted to the City for review at the
following stages:
Concept/Planning - based on concept design. Information on bridge geometry,
clearances, alignment and hydraulic information, if applicable, shall be submitted.
Preliminary Design Report. Considering bridge geometry, loads, and clearances
required, a preliminary analysis and cost estimates, including Life Cycle Costs
shall be carried out and results shall be submitted in a short report form. Other
elements of the report should include constructability, construction schedule,
durability, aesthetics and environmental issues, such as drainage, minimizing
construction footprint and erosion control.
Design Brief summarizing accepted design approach and features of the
structure. Refer to Appendix B for standard format of the Design Brief.
Detailed design drawings at 60% progress (i.e. all structural element sizes and
geometry.
Detailed design drawings at 80-90% progress (i.e. inclusive of majority of details,
reinforcing and general notes).
Specifications at 95% progress.
100% complete drawings and specifications: Tender Drawings and
Specifications.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 53
2015
100% complete design Engineers cost estimate.

In itemized Price Schedules (as part of tender front end documents), items shall
be categorized for ease of TCA (Tangible Capital Assets) breakdown.
Issued For Construction (IFC) Drawings and Specifications, including all Tender
Addenda.
For all proprietary engineered products, a letter of Assurance of Engineering
Field Review and Compliance is required (see Appendix B).
Revisions to the drawings and specifications shall be clearly marked on the
documents and recorded in the Revisions Log.
Drawings and Specifications shall be sealed and signed by a Professional
Engineer registered in Alberta.
17.4.4
17.5
As part of the Quality Management Plan, an independent review of both the

design and detailed design drawings are required. A Quality Audit report of the
findings shall be submitted to the City for review. A certification letter bearing the
signature and seal of the independent design reviewer or alternatively the
signature and seal of the independent design reviewer on the Issued for
Construction Drawings shall be submitted to the City.
P ro je c t Clo s u re Do c u m e n ta tio n
At the project completion the following documentation shall be filed with the City:
17.5.1
Design Notes: one (1) set of design calculations (accompanied by an updated

version of the project design brief) both in hard copy (double-sided where
possible) and electronic in .pdf format.
17.5.2
Issued for Construction (IFC) drawings: one (1) .pdf electronic copy.
17.5.3
Quality control and quality assurance report.

The report shall include quality management plans, all review and inspection
reports, all quality assurance test results, quality control test results, any nonconforming material test results, all non-conformance reports with follow-up
inspections, corrective measures and penalties.
17.5.5
Shop Drawings: one (1) .pdf electronic copy.
17.5.6
Record Drawings shall be filed in the following formats:

i. One set of AutoCAD format electronic drawings;
ii. One full size set of mylar
iii. One copy in .pdf format.
17.5.7
Updated Block Profile Drawings, if applicable:
THE CITY OF CALGARY

i.
ii.
17.5.8
PAGE 54
2015
One full size set of mylar for review by the City;

One set of AutoCAD format electronic drawings
Product Information:
Provide a list of approved products and their Product Data Sheets, maintenance
requirements, and application/ installation record.
17.5.9
Maintenance Manual in electronic .pdf format.

Maintenance Manual shall be for elements such as lighting, electrical or other
special applications to the project, such as MSE walls. Maintenance manual
should address any ongoing maintenance requirements, as well as instructions
for repair or replacement of elements.
17.5.10 Submittals
All official contract documentation such as submittals, requests for information
with responses, site instructions, field orders, change orders or contemplated
change notices, should be included with Project Closure Documentation.
17.5.12 Reports (as applicable) in .pdf format:
i.
ii.
iii.
Geotechnical Investigation
Environmental Assessments
Hydrological Assessments
17.5.13 Signed and sealed Contractors warranty forms (see Appendix D).
17.5.14 Construction progress photos in .jpg format capturing main construction activities.
17.5.15 Provide copies of all electronic file submissions on a USB (Universal Serial Bus)
flash drive.
END OF THE DOCUMENT
CITY OF CALGARY
FIFTH EDITION, 2015
APPENDIX "A" SUPPLEMENTARY GUIDELINES

A1:
HIGHWAY ACCESORY SUPPORTS GUIDELINES FOR STRUCTURAL

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
THE CITY OF CALGARY

HIGHWAY ACCESSORY SUPPORTS GUIDELINES
FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
1.0
PAGE 1 OF 19
2015
DES IGN S TANDARDS

The design shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition and the latest edition
of the Canadian Electrical Code. The fatigue design shall be carried out in accordance
with Section 11 of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway
Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, latest edition and Interims, with modifications
contained in this document. Design for fatigue shall be required for all sign,
cantilevered, traffic signal, and high-mast luminary structures greater than 30m in height.
The design shall be carried out by a Professional Engineer registered to practice in the
Province of Alberta under the Engineering and Geoscience Professions Act (formerly
known as the APEGGA Act).
2.0
FUNCTIONAL AND P ERFORMANCE CRITERIA
2.1
Ge n e ral
.1 Highway accessory structures and their components shall be designed to provide
safe, durable and functional life of the structure. The design shall result in structures
that do not experience excessive deflections, permanent deformations, or failure due
to fatigue loads.
.2 The appearance of highway accessory supports should consider function and
aesthetics. Structural supports should be designed and located so as not to distract
the motorists attention or obstruct view of the highway or other signs. The aesthetic
effect of signing or lighting installations have on the environment should be
evaluated.
2.2
Sign Support Structures

.1 Minimum vertical clearance below the sign panels for overhead and cantilever sign
support structures shall be 5.8 meters, unless noted otherwise in the Contract
Documents.
.2 The deflection for cantilevered sign structures shall not exceed 200 mm vertically.
The 200 mm range is defined as the sum of the potential upward and downward or
potential horizontal axis displacement of the cantilever structure.
.3 This criterion is included to minimize potential vibration damage to the structure, and
ensure visibility of the information to motorists.
.4 For the overhead support structures, the maximum deflection shall be limited to
1/480 of the span length.
.5 The arms of signs and signals shall be tapered or built as truss members.
.6 The preliminary design information shall be submitted to the City for review prior to
proceeding to the final design.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

2.3
PAGE 2 OF 19
2015
Luminaires
.1 For luminaires less than 10 meters in height, the pole shall be designed to have a
maximum deflection at the pole top, under maximum loading, of 150 mm.
.2 For luminaires greater than 10 meters in height, the pole shall be designed to have a
maximum deflection at the pole top, under maximum loading, of 200 mm.
3.0
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
3.1
Sign Support Structures Sign Panel Size

.1 The design sign panel area shall be taken as the largest of:
.1
Actual area of sign panels as increased by an additional 15 % to

compensate for future sign loading.
.2
Actual area of sign panels plus an additional area of 0.915m x sign width
to compensate for future addition of three extra panels
.2 The proposed sign mounting locations shall be configured so as to produce the

maximum loading effects on the support structure and foundation.
3.2
Luminaires Sign Panel Size

.1 Unless otherwise specified, the design sign panel area shall be 1.44 m2, with the
centre of the sign panel located at 2.5 m height from the base plate.
3.3
Wind Load
.1 Structures and structural elements shall be designed for horizontal drag loads at the
Serviceability Limit States and the Ultimate Limit States, and where appropriate, shall
be designed for fatigue, as specified in this document.
.2 The hourly mean reference wind pressure shall be as per Table A3.1.1 of CAN/CSAS6, latest edition and shall be taken for the following return periods:
.1
50 years for overhead sign structures, luminaires support structures, and

traffic signal structures exceeding 16 m in height.
.2
25 years for luminaires support structures less than 16 m in height and

traffic signal support structures where locations and safety considerations
permit, and when approved by the city.
.3 The design wind pressure shall be as follows:

Pz =qCgCe Ch,
Where: q shall be taken from CAN/CSA S6-06, Table A3.1.1 for an appropriate
return period as defined above;
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 3 OF 19
2015
.4 The gust factor Cg for all elements of highway accessory support structures shall be
2.5 as specified in clause 3.10.1.3 of CAN/CSA S6, latest edition.
.5 Wind induced horizontal drag coefficient Ch shall be as specified in table A3.2.2,
CAN/CSA S6, latest edition.
.6 Exposure coefficient Ce shall be as specified in clause 3.10.1.4 of CAN/CSA S6,
latest edition.
3.4
Design for Fatigue

.1 General
The provisions of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals for structural fatigue design are
based upon an Infinite Life Fatigue Design approach, which considers a Constant
Amplitude Fatigue Limit (CAFL). Fatigue critical details shall be designed with
nominal stress ranges that are below the CAFL values for the applicable detail
categories.
Most common fatigue details are categorized and illustrated in the Specifications.
CSA W59, latest edition may be referenced for other connection details.
.2
The fatigue importance factor if shall be based on the following guidelines as it

relates to applicable importance categories, used in the wind-induced, limit-state
fatigue loads.
.1
Category I - critical cantilevered support structures installed on major

highways. Structures classified as category I present a high hazard in the
event of failure.
Use Category I for the following conditions:
.1
Structures without proven vibration damping devices;
.2
ADT (average daily traffic) >10,000 in one direction, regardless of

number of lanes or ADTT (average daily truck traffic) >1,000;
.3
Cantilevered structures with span >17m or high mast towers >30m

high
.2
Category II cantilevered support structures installed on other highways.
.3
Category III cantilevered support structures installed at low-risk

locations.
Use Category III for the following conditions:
.1
Speed limits of 60 km/h or less

All structures not meeting the criteria for either Category I or
Category III should be classified as Category II. This would
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 4 OF 19
2015
include any structures with damping devices that would otherwise

meet the Category I criteria.
.4
.5
3.5
The following wind load effects shall be included in the fatigue design:
.1
Galloping: Equivalent static vertical shear shall be taken as 1000x

IF (Pa)
.2
Natural Wind Gust for yearly mean wind speed 5 m/s
.3
Truck-induced Gust for vehicle speed of 30 m/s, unless otherwise

specified in the Contract Documents.
.4
Vortex Shedding (applicable only to luminaires structures with

taper less than 12 mm/m)
Anchor bolts with nuts both above and below a base plate cannot be
preloaded below the level of the bottom nut. The fatigue resistance of the
bolts that are not preloaded shall be governed by fatigue stress category
E.
Dead Loads
The dead load shall consist of all permanent loads due to weight of the materials and
components of the structure. The dead load shall also include weight of secondary
structural elements such as luminaires, sign structures, traffic signals and any other
appurtenances attached to the support structure.
.1 Sign Support Structures
The unit weight for the dead load of the sign components shall be taken as 0.15
KN/m2. For sign support structures the sign panel area shall be taken as defined in
Item 3.1 of this document.
.2 Luminaires
The actual weight shall be taken for the dead load of the luminaires components and
attachments. The proposed weight of attachments shall be increased by additional
15% to compensate for future alterations of the loading applied to the support
structure.
.3 Traffic signals
The actual weight shall be taken for the dead load of the anticipated components
and attachments. The proposed weight of attachments shall be increased by
additional 15% to compensate for future alterations of the loading applied to the
support structure.
3.6
Ice Accretion
Ice accretion shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA-S6, latest edition. Ice accretion of 4
mm shall be considered.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

3.7
PAGE 5 OF 19
2015
Load Combinations
Load combinations and load factors shall be as per Table A3.2.1 of the CAN/CSA-S6,
latest edition. Normal and transverse load combinations shall be applied as per Clause
A3.2.3, Figure A3.2.1, and Table A3.2.3.
4.0
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
4.1
General
.1 The Contractor shall maintain an approved quality management system throughout
the contract. The quality management system shall meet the requirements of one of
the following:
.1
The latest issue of ISO 9001
.2
The Q-base code (the Q-base code contains the basic requirements of the ISO
standard, but it is intended for small companies (i.e. Less than 10 employees)
who are not ready to advance to full ISO certification).
.3
Alternative quality management systems that fully meet the objectives of the
above standards may be accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with evidence of a documented quality management
system.
.2 The purpose of the quality management system is to ensure that the product meets
the quality requirements of the contract, is delivered on time, and is produced in a
cost-effective manner. The Contractors quality management system shall apply to
all stages of the design, procurement, manufacturing, testing and delivery of the
product.
4.2
Design Calculations and Working Drawing Submissions

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete set of design calculations and
drawings, prepared and sealed by a professional Engineer registered by the Association
of Professional Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists of Alberta (APEGGA). As
Constructed Calculations and Drawings will be required at the completion of the contract
.1 Calculation Content
The design calculations shall:
.1
Be detailed enough to allow for a technical review of the design to ensure it

meets the requirements of the contract.
.2
Include a list of all assumptions made as part of the design.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

.3
.4
PAGE 6 OF 19
2015
Include, as a minimum, calculations for the following structural components:

.1
Shaft
.2
Horizontal arm or truss
.3
Shaft or arm flange connections
.4
Base plate
.5
All welded connections
.6
Anchor bolts
.7
Foundation
Identify all horizontal, vertical and overturning loads at the base of the structure.
.2 Calculation Format
The calculations shall be presented in an orderly manner logically progressing
through the structure.
.3 Drawing Content and Organization
.1
Shop Drawings shall clearly indicate a list of materials and components,

methods of construction, erection diagrams, connections, bolt torques,
explanatory notes and all other information necessary for completion of
work.
.2
The first Drawing sheet for each structure shall contain the design criteria,
list of material and components, and the structure elevation. Show the
design combination and forces governing the design.
.3
The Drawings shall be detailed enough to allow for technical review of the
design to ensure that it meets the requirements of the contract.
.4
All details required for the fabrication of the final product shall be included
in the Drawings. Show all splice locations and details on shop Drawings.
.5
Show Anchor Bolt Orientations.
.6
Show maximum sign area that the structure is capable of supporting for
the specified wind pressure.
.7
Erection procedure, including tensioning procedure for anchor bolts, if

applicable, shall be shown on the Drawings.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 7 OF 19
2015
.4 Drawing Format
The drawing format shall be as follows:
4.3
.1
AutoCAD format (most current release.)
.2
Produced on ISO a1 size paper (other sizes shall meet the approval of
the Engineer).
.3
Metric units only
.4
Legible when reduced to 1/2 size or microfilmed.
Review of Design Calculations and Drawings

The Engineer will review the design calculations and Shop Drawings as follows:
.1 Design calculations and Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer solely to
ascertain conformance with the general design concept. Responsibility for approval
of detail design inherent in the calculations and drawings rests solely with the
Contractor. The review by the Engineer shall not constitute approval.
.2 Review by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in the calculations and drawings or for proper completion of the work in
accordance with the contract documents. The Engineer shall review all design
calculations and shop drawings and return any comments to the Contractor five
working days after receipt
.3 The Contractor is responsible for verification and correlation of field dimensions,
fabrication processes, techniques of construction, installation and co-ordination of all
parts of the work.
.4 After the Engineer review, the calculations and drawings will be returned to the
contractor. The Contractor shall revise the drawings and calculations to the
satisfaction of the Engineer prior to fabrication.
.5 The Engineer may require adjustments to the design calculations and drawings. If it
is deemed by the Contractor that such revisions affect the contract price, this must
be presented in writing to the Engineer for consideration. Written approval to proceed
must be granted the Contractor by the Engineer prior to proceeding with fabrication
and installation of work.
5.0
MATERIALS
5.1
General Material Requirements:

.1 All materials shall be new.
.2 The Contractor shall provide mill test certificates for all sheet steel and bolts to the
Engineer prior to fabrication. The mill test certificates shall contain all chemical and
physical properties of the steel to be used in fabrication.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 8 OF 19
2015
.3 The use of aluminum is not acceptable, unless specifically stated otherwise by the
Engineer.
5.2
Structural Steel
.1 Pole shafts
grade 350W*
Structural steel for handhole reinforcement, connection flanges and base plates shall
conform to CAN/CSA/ -G40.20/G40.21latest edition grade 300W or greater, as
required.
* For luminaire pole shafts < 16 m 300W may be used
.2 Silicon content of steel shall be less than 0.04% or shall be between 0.15% to 0.2%
.3 All steel shall be free of surface defects and internal discontinuities.
5.3
Concrete
.1 All concrete used for highway accessory support bases shall conform to CAN/CSA
A23.1, latest edition and shall have the following properties:*
28 Day Strength
min. 30 MPa at 28 days
Cement
Type HS**
Slump
max 80 mm
Air Entrainment
5-7%
Max. Size of Aggregate
20 mm
Max W/Cm***
0.45
* Refer to table 2 of CAN/CSA A23.1, latest edition for other acceptable concrete
properties for various site-specific exposure conditions.
** If the exposure is a combination of chlorides and sulphate, use HPC.
*** Water to cementitious materials ratio.
.2 The city may undertake, through an independent CAN/CSA certified testing firm,
random sampling, inspection and testing for the purposes of determining the
compliance with the Specification and other Contract Documents.
5.4
Reinforcing Steel
.1 Reinforcing steel to conform to CSA G30.18, latest edition, Grade 400W and
Specification Section 03200
THE CITY OF CALGARY

6.0
PAGE 9 OF 19
2015
FABRICATION
.1 Fabrication shall be performed in an enclosed area, which is adequately heated.
Field welding will not be allowed.
6.1
Submissions
.1 Welding Procedures
Welding procedures shall be submitted for each type of weld used in the structure.
The procedures shall bear the approval of the Canadian Welding Bureau and shall
also be reviewed by the Engineer.
.2 Proposed Fabrication Sequence
Prior to commencement of fabrication, the Contractor shall present for review an
outline of the fabrication sequence that clearly describes the order of make-up and
assembly of all the component parts, as well as shop assembly, inspection stations.
.3 Mill Certificates
Mill certificates shall be provided for all material before fabrication commences.
.4 Schedules
The Contractor shall provide and keep current a complete fabrication schedule in a
form satisfactory to the Engineer.
6.2
Bolted Connections
.1 Connections shall be in accordance with ASTM A325, latest edition, and shall be
snug tight plus 1/3 turn (turn-of-nut), complete with nuts and washers, galvanized.
The top 150 mm of anchor bolt should be threaded.
.2 Anchor bolts: to be fabricated from DYWIDAG thread bars conforming to the
requirements of ASTM A421/ A421m latest edition, Standard Specification for
Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete. Anchor bolts shall
be supplied with steel nuts and washers, all galvanized.
.3 Bolts and anchor bolts shall be sized to accept galvanized nuts without damaging the
protective coating.
.4 Anchor bolt top and bottom cage plates shall be labeled to ensure they are matched
with the appropriate leg.
6.3
Welding
.1 Certification
Welding to CSA W-59, latest edition. Fabricators shall be certified by the Canadian
Welding Bureau in accordance with CSA W47.1, latest edition for Division 1 or for
Division 2.
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 10 OF 19
2015
.2 Filler Metals
Low hydrogen filler, fluxes and low hydrogen welding practices shall be used
throughout. The low hydrogen covering and flux shall be protected and stored as
specified by AWS Standard D1.5, latest edition. Flux cored welding or use of cored
filler wires in the submerged arc process or shielding gas processes are not
considered as conforming to low hydrogen practice. These methods will not be
permitted. However metal core welding process utilizing low hydrogen electrodes
with AWS designation of H4 will be allowed. The deposited weld metal shall provide
strength, durability, and impact toughness and corrosion resistance equivalent to
base metal.
.3 Cleaning Prior to Welding
Weld areas must be clean, free of mill scale, dirt, grease, and other contaminants
prior to welding.
.4 Longitudinal Seams
All longitudinal seams shall be made by an approved semi or fully automatic
submerged arc or metal core welding processes.
.5 Weld Penetration
The full penetration welds shall be completed using properly fitted backing bars or
back gouged to sound metal. The longitudinal seams shall have a minimum 60%
penetration; however if backing bar is used for longitudinal seam, the weld
penetration shall be 90%. The following welds shall have 100% penetration:
.1
Column to base plate*
.2
Member to flange plate
.3
Flange plate to gusset plate.
.4
Longitudinal seam welds within 150 mm of circumferential welds and 150 mm

beyond hand holes (when provided) shall be full penetration groove welds.
Transition between full and partial penetration welds shall be ground smooth.
.5
Longitudinal seam welds, on the female section of the slip joint, shall be fullpenetration groove welds for a length equal to the minimum splice length plus
150 mm.
.6
Backing bar splices
* Luminaires and traffic signal supports not greater than 16 m in height may be
socket-type connections with a continuous fillet weld on the inside of the base plate
at the end of the shaft and another continuous fillet weld on the outside at the top of
the base plate.
10
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 11 OF 19
2015
The backing bar for full penetration weld shall be properly fitted and the member
prepared to a sharp edged 45-degree chamfer. The groove weld shall be placed in a
minimum of two passes by using 100C of preheat (unless higher preheat is required
as per AWS) and maintain a root opening of 5 mm. A rod size, no greater than 4.0
mm, shall be used for the first pass. A reinforcing fillet weld shall be placed all
around the joint.
.6 Tack and Temporary Welds
Tack and temporary welds shall not be allowed unless they are to be incorporated in
the final weld. Tack welds, where allowed, shall be of a minimum length of four
times the nominal size of the weld, and shall be subject to the same quality
requirements as the final welds. Cracked tack welds shall be completely removed
prior to welding over.
.7 Run-off Tabs
Run-off tabs shall be used at the ends of all welds that terminate at the edge of a
member. They shall be tack welded only to that portion of the material that will not
remain a part of the structure, or where the tack will be welded over and fused into
the final joint. After welding, the tabs are to be removed by flame cutting, not by
breaking off.
.8 Methods of Weldments Repair
Repair procedures for unsatisfactory weldments shall be submitted for approval by
the City and Engineer prior to repair work commencing.
.9 Arc Strikes
Arc strikes will not be permitted. In the event of accidental arc strikes, the Contractor
shall submit to the City and Engineer for approval a proposed repair procedure. The
repair procedure shall include the complete grinding out of the crater produced by
the arc strike. These areas will be examined by the Engineer to ensure complete
removal of the metal in the affected area.
.10 Plug and Slot Welds
Plug welds or slot welds shall not be permitted.
6.4
Other Fabrication Requirements

.1 All plate material for main members and any plate material welded to the main
member shall be flame cut using an automatic cutting machine. Shearing is not
allowed.
.2 Additional splices, other than those shown on the shop drawings, will require review
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the cost of inspection of these splices.
11
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 12 OF 19
2015
.3 Lapped joints in the tubular members shall be of sufficient length to develop the full
strength of the lapped members. The ends of the plates in the joint shall not be
chamfered over more than 50% of their thickness.
.4 Each column, arm, extension, clamp and bracket shall be fabricated from one piece
of sheet steel unless approved otherwise.
.5 Intermediate circumferential butt welds shall not be allowed, however horizontal
members greater than 12m span may have a bolted splice.
.6 Columns, arms, extensions and clamps shall be brake press formed or roll formed.
The brake press knife shall have a radius suitable for the thickness of the material
and nature of the bend.
.7 All plate edges shall be free of notches and gouges.
.8 The depth or projection of any imperfections on the inner or outer surfaces shall not
exceed 15% of wall thickness. Any depth or projection up to 33% of wall thickness
may be repaired by welding. Any excessive projecting weld metal shall be removed.
.9 The diameter of bolt holes in base plates shall be 10 mm larger than the bolt
diameter.
.10 Punching of full size holes will not be permitted. The holes shall be circular and
perpendicular to the member and shall be deburred to ensure a proper faying
surface.
.11 Hand holes with cover plates on top and bottom of columns are to be provided for
illuminated sign structures or when required as per special provisions.
.12 Hand hole (when required) shall be stiffened by providing a reinforcing rim with semicircular ends. The rim shall be welded to the member with a full penetration groove
weld supplemented with an all around fillet weld.
.13 Only low stress stamps shall be used for identification marks. The stamps and
specific location shall be shown on the shop drawings and approved by the
Engineer.
6.5
Dimensional Tolerances
All fabrication shall meet the tolerances described below:
.1 Straightness
The straightness of any item shall not exceed the overall length divided by 300 from
the surface at any point. This shall be measured with a straight line joining the
surface at both ends. The difference between the straight line and the surface shall
then be measured to determine the straightness.
12
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 13 OF 19
2015
.2 Twisting
The twist in the overall length of any column, arm, or extension shall not exceed 7.
The base plate shall be installed true and accurate at 90 degrees to the axis of the
column, arm, or extension with a deviation of not more than 0.5 degrees.
.3 Length
The specified length of any item shall be within 0 to 60 mm or -0 to +5% (whichever
is less) with the exception of sign bridge spans which shall be within 5 mm of the
specified dimensions in unloaded condition. The tolerance for height shall be 0 to
+60 mm.
.4 Across the Flat Dimensions
The average of all across the flats dimensions from a given cross section shall be
within 1% of the specified dimension. In addition, the ratio of the maximum to
minimum across the flats dimensions shall be less than or equal to 1.05.
.5 Tolerance for Flatness of Base Plates and Flange Plates
Surfaces of column base plates shall be flat to within 3 mm tolerance in 305 mm, and
to within 5 mm tolerance overall. Faying surfaces of flange plates shall be flat to
within 2 mm tolerance overall.
.6 Arm Rise
Arm rises apply to unloaded structure in the standing position.
6.6
Pre-Assembly
After welding and fabrication, but prior to galvanizing, the Contractor shall pre-assemble
all structures complete with welded sign clamps to check the fit and geometry.
Pre-assembled structures shall be inspected by the Engineer.
Following inspection by the Engineer, the structures shall be disassembled for
galvanizing.
6.7
Galvanizing
.1 Galvanizing shall conform to:
ASTM A-123 "Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products".
All materials to conform to chemical composition restrictions as recommended in
ASTM A385, latest edition, and Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc
Coatings (Hot Dip)
13
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 14 OF 19
2015
.2 Qualifications of galvanizers: galvanizers shall be certified in accordance with can3 z299.4, latest edition. Certification to be submitted to the City
.3 Minimum zinc retention to be 600g/m2
.4 All steel components including anchor bolts, high strength bolts, nuts and washers
shall be galvanized after fabrication.
.5 All steel surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, welding slag, paint, varnish, rust, or
anti-spatter compounds prior to galvanizing.
.6 Galvanizing shall be continuous and uniform in appearance, colour and texture.
.7 Any sharp edges caused by galvanizing drippings shall be filed smooth and coated
with an approved cold galvanizing compound.
.8 All threaded holes or threaded couplings shall be retapped after galvanizing and
painted with an approved cold galvanizing compound.
.9 All loose galvanizing slag and spatter shall be removed from all components after
galvanizing.
.10 The galvanizer shall safeguard against embrittlement in accordance with ASTM
a143/ a143m, latest edition.
.11 Repair of galvanizing shall only be done if bare areas are infrequent, small, and
suitable for repair. A detailed repair procedure shall be submitted and approved prior
to its use. It should be noted that repairs may require complete removal of the
galvanized coating and regalvanizing. Repair shall be in compliance with
ASTM a780, latest edition, and method a3 metalizing. The thickness of the
metalizing shall be 180 m, and the repair tested for adhesion. The finished
appearance shall be similar to the adjacent galvanizing. The Engineer will determine
the acceptability of repaired areas.
6.8
Testing and Inspection

.1 Quality Assurance
The Engineer will implement a Quality Assurance program by auditing the
Contractors Quality Management System and shall reserve the right to inspect the
products during all stages of fabrication at any time in the fabricator's plant. The
Contractors Quality Management System shall be submitted to the Engineer, and
include quality control of all materials and workmanship, including galvanizing and
painting. The Contractor shall co-operate with the inspection agency and shall
furnish the inspector with all Quality Control data and information requested.
.2 The Engineer's Review
The Engineers inspections and review of the products shall not constitute final
acceptance. Final acceptance of any product will not be granted until it has been
installed and is operating to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
14
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 15 OF 19
2015
.3 Testing by the Contractor

.1
The Contractor shall provide quality control throughout the course of fabrication.
All test records made by the fabricating shop in the course of normal quality
control shall be open to the Engineer for inspection. Testing and inspection
made necessary by the repair of faulty work shall be paid for by the Contractor.
.2
The Contractor shall arrange to have all full penetration welds inspected either
by ultrasonic testing or radiographic inspection methods by a company certified
to CSA-W178.1, latest edition. A copy of test results shall be provided to the
Engineer.
.3
Engineer does not require destruction of product for testing penetration of seam
welds; however, the Contractor shall provide evidence that seam welds meet
the requirements of the approved CWB weld procedure by performing periodic
random testing of test samples. Sample seam welds for each CWB approved
seam weld procedure required by this specification shall be cut, etched and
checked for penetration. Testing for all approved seam weld procedures shall
be done by a company certified to CSA-W178.1, latest edition. The testing
company shall provide evidence that the samples were taken randomly from the
production run.
.4
The frequency of seam weld testing shall be as follows:

.1 For a continuous production, each plate thickness shall be tested at the
beginning of the machine set-up, at 50% production and at the
completion.
.2 The testing interval shall not exceed 2 days.
.3 If the production is for a day or less only one testing is required.
.5
The results of seam weld testing shall be provided to the Engineer within 72
hours of the testing. All the cost associated for seam testing including re-testing
when required and non-destructive inspection of full penetration welds shall be
borne by the Contractor
.6
The Contractor shall be responsible for all travel, boarding and lodging costs for
a Citys representative to attend the pre-job meeting and two additional trips
during the course of fabrication when the sign structures are being fabricated
outside the province of Alberta.
.4 Testing by the Engineer

The visual, radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle and any other inspection that
may be specified or required will be performed by the Engineer or by his testing
agencies at the Engineer's expense.
15
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 16 OF 19
2015
.5 Inspection Station
To insure that each stage of inspection is performed in an orderly manner, during the
fabrication, Inspection Stations will be set up at specific points. Certain items of the
work will then be checked, and deficiencies shall be corrected, prior to the work
being sent to the next stage of fabrication. These check points are to be agreed to
by the City and Engineer and the Fabricator prior to commencement of fabrication.
The City and Engineer reserves the right to stop detrimental fabrication between
checkpoints if deemed necessary.
.6 Non-Destructive Methods of Examination
The methods of non-destructive examination shall be in accordance with the
following standards:
.1
Radiography CSA W59, Latest Edition
.2
Ultrasonic CSA W59, Latest Edition
.3
Magnetic Particle - ASTM Standard E-709, Latest Edition
.7 Inspection Schedule
All welds will be visually inspected.
Ultrasonic inspection will be performed on full penetration welds.
7.0
INSTALLATION
7.1
Miscellaneous
Any product damaged in shipping or during installation shall be replaced at no extra cost
to the City.
Prior to construction, the Contractor shall confirm utility conflicts with the sign bases, and
immediately inform the Engineer of these conflicts
The Contractor shall not erect the structural steel until the substructure concrete has
been cured a minimum of three days and achieved 80% of the 28 day specified concrete
strength requirement.
All components shall be handled with care to prevent stress to the components through
bending or twisting. The use of steel chairs as slings will not be permitted. Any damage
to the components through overstress, scratching or denting shall be required or
replaced at the contractors expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pole shafts shall mount directly on concrete bases and where necessary, shall be true to
plumb using galvanized levelling shim plates. The shim plates must be located so that a
minimum of 75 mm of distance is provided from shims to grout edge. The method of
forming and pouring the grout shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Dry-pack
methods of constructing grout pads will not be approved.
16
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 17 OF 19
2015
Handhole bolts shall be coated with anti-seize lubricant.

All scratches in poles and all field-drilled holes shall be repaired by metalizing, as
specified in Section 6.7.11 of this document or, at the discretion of the Engineer, they
may be repaired by coating with Crown No, 67007 cold galvanizing compound spray
type (or approved alternative, i.e. Zinga). The application of the cold galvanizing
compound shall conform to the Manufacturers instructions.
7.2
High-Tensile-Strength Bolted Connections

Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled. Contact surfaces shall be free of
dirt, grease, burrs, pits and other defects that would prevent solid seating of the parts.
Connections shall be assembled with a hardened washer under the bolt head or nut,
whichever is the element turned in tightening. Surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the
bolt head and nut shall be parallel.
7.3
Bolt Tension
Each bolt shall be tightened so as to provide, when all bolts in the joint are tight, at least
the minimum bolt tension shown in the following table for the size of bolt used:
Table 1
BOLT TENSION
Specified
Bolt Size
(A325M Bolts)
Minimum Bolt Tension

Kilonewtons
poundsforce
M16X2
M20X2.5
M22X2.5
M24X3
-M30X3.5
-M36X4
94
147
181
212
-337
-490
21,180
33,050
40,700
47,660
-75,760
-110,160
Commonly
Supplied
Equivalent
Imperial
Size
(A325
Bolts)
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 3/8
1 1/2
Minimum Bolt Tension

Kilonewtons
poundsforce
85
126
175
227
251
319
380
463
19,200
28,400
39,250
51,500
56,450
71,700
85,450
104,000
All structural bolts shall be tightened by using turn-of-nut method to provide bolt tension
specified in Table 1. There shall first be enough bolts brought to a "snug tight" condition
to ensure that the parts of the joint are brought into full contact with each other. Snug
tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full
effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench.
Following this initial operation, bolts shall be placed in any remaining holes in the
connection and brought to snug tightness. All bolts in the joint shall then be tightened
additionally by the applicable amount of nut rotation specified below, with tightening
progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. During
this operation there shall be no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench.
17
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 18 OF 19
2015
Amount of rotation of nut relative to bolt, regardless of which is turned:

.1 1/3 turn where bolt length is 4 bolt diameters or less
.2 2 turn where bolt length is over 4 bolt diameters and not exceeding 8 bolt diameters
.3 2/3 turn where bolt length exceeds 8 bolt diameters
Notes:
.1 Tolerance 1/6 turn (60o) over, nothing under
.2 Length of bolt measured from underside of head
8.0
FOUNDATION
8.1
Design
The Contractor shall have the foundations designed and sealed by an Engineer licensed
to practice by the Association of Professional Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists
of Alberta (APEGGA). The Contractor shall submit design calculations and Shop
Drawing for review by the Engineer. The design shall be based on loads provided by the
sign structure Design Engineer.
The Contractor shall undertake any geotechnical work at his own cost in order to obtain
sufficient site-specific information necessary to perform foundation design in accordance
with Guidelines and Standards referenced in this document.
The Contractor shall determine the type and size of foundation required and shall carry
out the necessary design.
Foundations shall be designed to allow for local frost conditions.
Foundation base shall be designed so that base plate elevation is minimum 150 mm
above ground
8.2
Construction
.1 Excavation and Backfill
The Contractor shall excavate holes to a minimum of 300 mm larger than the base
and the base shall be installed in the centre of the excavation.
The backfill around the base shall be placed in thin layers and shall be thoroughly
compacted for the full depth.
The maximum allowable width of excavation shall be site-confirmed and include safe
slope and shoring as required. A rigid traffic barrier system shall be used as a
protection within a roadway.
All backfill material shall be free of organics.
18
THE CITY OF CALGARY

PAGE 19 OF 19
2015
Cementitious materials shall not be used as backfill, unless specified otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
The disturbed area around installations shall be restored to the original contours.
Soft spots shall be removed and cleaned and the soil at the bottom of holes shall be
thoroughly compacted to provide a firm bearing. These areas shall be inspected
prior to construction of the foundation.
.2 Drilled Cast-in-Place Piles
All pile drilling equipment, drilling procedures and pile materials placement shall be
submitted for review by the Engineer before the installation has started.
Temporary casing shall be used where risk of collapse of the pile holes exists due to
ingress of water.
Drilled pile holes shall be covered until the time of filling them with concrete. The
covers shall be of sufficient strength to sustain any construction potential
construction load.
Adequate spacers shall be used to ensure minimum 100 mm concrete cover to
reinforcing steel.
Specified shape and dimensions of concrete piles above grade shall be obtained by
use of suitable forms.
Pile installation in cold weather conditions shall be managed by use of insulated
forms and tarps, over sizing pile diameters and other forms of protection. The
requirements of CAN/CSA A23.1, latest edition for cold weather concreting shall be
met.
9.0
ROADWORK
Where the existing median is to be reconstructed to accommodate the pedestal for a
sign bridge, the face of the median shall maintain the standard barrier profile as required
on the adjacent median sections.
10.0
WARRANTY
As per the General Conditions, the Contractor shall warrant that all of the products are
free from defect (material and workmanship) for a two year period starting from the
Construction Completion Certificate date of issue.
For all galvanizing finishes, the Contractor shall provide a warranty for a five year period,
starting from the Construction Completion Certificate date of issue. The attached
Warranty forms for galvanizing of steel structures shall be signed and sealed jointly by
the Supplier and Installer.
END OF DOCUMENT
19
CITY OF CALGARY
FIFTH EDITION, 2015
APPENDIX "B" DESIGN SUBMITTALS

B1:
TITLEBLOCK
B2:
DESIGN BRIEF FORMAT
B3:
ASSURANCE OF ENGINEERING FIELD REVIEW AND COMPLIANCE FORM
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
Page: 1 of 7
DESIGN BRIEF
City Structural Title Block:
Design Codes:
Other References:
CAN/CSA-S6 (latest edition)

The City of Calgary Design Guidelines for Bridges and Structures
(latest edition)
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
Page: 2 of 7
Project Scope & Short Description of Structure:

ITEM
Geometry
REV
DESCRIPTION
Span No. and Length(s):

Horizontal Alignment:
Vertical Alignment:
Skew:
Lane Widths & Clear Roadway:
Roadway Width:
Clearance Box:
Design
Parameters
Live Load:
Pedestrian Load:
Fatigue Limit State:
Roadway Class:
Traffic Volume:
Wind Load:
Temperature Range:
Earth Pressures:
Ice Loads:
Earthquake:
Soil Bore Hole Data:
Geotechnical Features:
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
ITEM
Structural
Materials
Page: 3 of 7
REV
DESCRIPTION
Concrete:
Stainless Steel Rebar:
Galvanized Rebar:
Reinforcing Steel:
Prestressing Steel:
Post-Tensioning Steel:
Structural Steel:
Other Materials:
Abutments
Type:
Foundation:
Bearing Seat:
Backwall:
Wingwalls:
Curtain Wall:
Roof Slab:
Approach Slab:
Pigmented Sealer Colour:
Finishes & Sealing:
Slope Protection:
Drain Troughs:
Special Features:
Additional Comments:
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
ITEM
Piers
Page: 4 of 7
REV
DESCRIPTION
Type:
Foundation:
Footing Elevation:
Footing Shape:
Bracing:
Nose Plates:
Finishes & Sealing:
Special Features:
Bearings
Type:
Expansion:
Fixed:
Orientation:
Corrosion Protection:
Special Features:
Girders
Method of Analysis:
Girder Type:
Girder Number and Spacing:
Continuity:
Transverse Connectivity:
Wheel Line Distribution:
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
ITEM
Page: 5 of 7
REV
DESCRIPTION
Diaphragms:
Finishes:
Special Features:
Deck Slab
Nominal thickness:
Total Deck Width:
Haunches:
Crown or Superelevation:
Wearing Surface (Current & Future):
Curbs:
Sidewalks:
Barriers:
Railings:
Median:
Deck Drains:
Utilities:
Deck Joints:
Special Features:
Expansion
Joints
Type:
Expansion:
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
ITEM
Page: 6 of 7
REV
DESCRIPTION
Location:
Special Features:
MSE
Retaining
Wall
Type:
Maximum Panel Size:
Length of Wall:
Maximum Height of Wall:
Other
Lighting:
Signage:
Utilities:
Construction
Special Features:
Approving Authorities:
Features
Preliminary
List of
Drawings
Drawing No.
Drawing Title
1
2
Cover Sheet
General Layout
Data Sheet
Geotechnical Information
Piling Layout and Details
Abutment 1 Layout and Details
Abutment 2 Layout and Details
Abutment Details Sheet 1
Abutment Details Sheet 2
10
Girder Layout
PROJECT TITLE
Prepared By:
Date:
ITEM
Scheduling
Unresolved
Major Items
Primary
Contact:
Page: 7 of 7
REV
DESCRIPTION
11
Girder Details Sheet 1
12
Girder Details Sheet 2
13
Diaphragms
14
Bearings
15
Deck Layout and Details Sheet 1
16
Deck Layout and Details Sheet 2
17
Expansion Joints
18
Approach Slabs Layout and Details
19
Traffic Barriers
20
Guardrails and Handrails Layout
21
Guardrails and Handrails Details
22
Slope Protection
23
Miscellaneous Details
24
Landscape Details
25
Electrical Details
Detailed Design Schedule

60%, 90%, 100 Complete Drawings
100% Complete Specifications
60% and Pre-Tender Cost Estimate
Construction Schedule and Completion Date
ASSURANCE OF ENGINEERING FIELD REVIEW AND COMPLIANCE
To:
The City of Calgary
Re:
Project
I herby give assurance that

(a) I have fulfilled my obligations for field reviews;
(b) I have enclosed documents supporting all approved changes to the plans
and specifications prepared by me which was issued for this project;
(c) The components of the project are in general conformance with the plans,
specifications and other project-related documents;
(d) I have enclosed Record Drawings reflecting all approved changes to the
Drawings and Specifications;
(e) I am a registered Engineer in Alberta (APEGA).
Signature
Date
Name
I have signed on behalf of

Firm
Name
Address
Postal Code
133 6 Avenue SE, 10th Floor Andrew Davison
Calgary AB T2G 0P6
Tel: (403) 268-4700 Fax: (403) 268-4799
Page 1 of 1
CITY OF CALGARY
FIFTH EDITION, 2015
APPENDIX "C" STANDARD CITY SPECIFICATIONS

02510 (a)
BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SINGLE LIFT
02510 (b)
BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING MULTIPLE LIFTS
02510 (c)
BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING REHABILITATION
02850
NOISE BARRIERS
03200
03300
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03301
03483
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH RETAINING WALLS
05210
STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPLY AND FABRICATION
07100
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section 02510 (a)

Page 1 of 8
2015
Provide all labour, materials and equipment required to place a polymer modified
asphalt membrane / mastic surface wearing course.
Related Work
.1
The City of Calgary, Traffic Field operations section may install permanent plastic
lane markings at the time of this work. The Contractor shall contact Traffic Field
operations a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to this work to inform them of his
intended schedule. The Contractor shall provide a drum roller and operator to assist
in carrying out this work.
.2
Notwithstanding 1.2.1 above, lane markings will be painted by The City of Calgary,
Traffic Field operations following completion of this work.
Testing/Inspection
.1
All products and workmanship will be inspected by the Engineer and/or by an

independent Testing Agency, appointed and paid for by the Owner.
.2
Component products and random batches of production mixes will be tested for
conformance to the specified requirements by the Testing Agency.
.3
Notify the Engineer and the Testing Agency in ample time to permit inspection and
testing.
.4
Co-operate with the Engineer and Testing Agency on the inspection of materials and
sampling.
.5
Do not cover any work before inspection and testing unless authorised by the
Engineer, in writing.
.6
Remove and replace or repair defective products or work which fails to meet the
specified requirements as directed by the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner.
Curing Requirement
.1
1.5
BRIDGE DECK ASPHALTIC

CONCRETE PAVING SINGLE LIFT
No traffic shall be allowed on newly placed asphalt until required densities have been
reached and the surface has cooled down to 32C.
Protection of Expansion Joint Seals

.1
Where applicable, expansion joint seals are to be protected by filling with sand or
covering with two (2) layers of duct tape.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
1.6
1.7
Section 02510 (a)

Page 2 of 8
2015
Haul Routes
.1
Haul routes shall be approved by the municipal authorities having jurisdiction and in
accordance with the Standard General Conditions.
.2
Ensure that all vehicles used are equipped to prevent spilling or leaking of any part
of the load.
Equipment
.1
Pavers: Mechanical automatic grade controlled self-powered pavers capable of

spreading mix within specified tolerance, true to line, grade and crown indicated.
.2
Rollers: Sufficient number of rollers of type and weight to obtain specified density of
compacted mix. Vibrators on vibratory rollers shall NOT be activated. The Engineer,
at his sole discretion, may allow the Contractor to activate vibrators on vibratory
rollers not exceeding 5 tonnes in weight.
.3
Haul trucks: Shall be of adequate size, speed and condition to ensure orderly and
continuous operation and as follows:
.4
1.8

.1
Boxes shall be tightly sealed to prevent leakage of material.
.2
Covers of sufficient size and weight to completely cover and protect asphalt
mix when truck fully loaded.
.3
In cool weather or for long hauls, insulate entire contact area of each truck
box.
Hand Tools:
.1
Lutes or rakes with covered teeth during spreading and finishing operations.
.2
Tamping irons having mass not less than 13 kg and a bearing area not
exceeding 310 cm2 for compacting material along curbs, gutters and other
structures inaccessible to roller. Mechanical compaction equipment, when
approved by the Engineer, may be used instead of tamping irons.
.3
Straight edges, 4.5 m in length, to test finished surface.
Longitudinal Joints
.1
If the application of the wearing course is stopped or delayed for 6 hours or more, or
the edge of the longitudinal joint has been deformed due to vehicles driving over the
new wearing course then the edge shall be saw cut and Bakor 570-05 edge sealer
applied to the vertical face of the joint.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:

PRODUCTS
2.1
Products - SINGLE LIFT

.1
Section 02510 (a)

Page 3 of 8
2015
Materials
.1
Binder for the mix shall be Polymer Modified Bridge Mastic as supplied by
Husky Oil Ltd. meeting the requirements given in Table 'A'. No alternatives
will be allowed.
.2
Aggregate shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following
gradation requirements. Fine aggregate shall have fracture evident on a
minimum 80% of grain.
Sieve Size
10 mm
5.0 mm
2.5 mm
.160 mm
.080 mm
% Passing
100
91 96
71 77
8 16
48
.3
Coarse aggregate: Of the particles retained on the 5.0mm sieve at least 70%
shall have two or more fractured faces.
.4
Tack coat material shall be anionic emulsified asphalt binder (SS-1) subject
to approval of the Engineer
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:

Section 02510 (a)

Page 4 of 8
2015
TABLE 'A':
BRIDGE MASTIC PROPERTIES
UNITS
ASTM NO.
MIN
MAX
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Low Service Temperature
Stiffness Modulus @ -20oC
(Loading Time, 500 sec)
(Recommended Method)
Pa
5x107
Pen @ 0oC, 200 g 60 sec

(Alternate Method only)
Dmm
D5
30
Pa.s
D4402
600
Toughness
Benson Test
(or equivalent)
10
Tenacity
Benson Test
(or equivalent)
Kinematic Viscosity @ 135oC
mm2/s
D 2170
Flash Point
D 92
High Service Temperature

Viscosity @ 60oC
(Shear rate 5 x 10-2 s-1)
Elastic Behavior
(@ room temperature)
TECHNOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3000
230
AGING CHARACTERISTICS - Test After Thin Film Oven Test

Weight Loss
Ageing Index
Ageing Index =
D 1754
Viscosity at 60oC (Shear rate 5 x 10-2s-1 after TFOT)

Viscosity at 60oC (Shear rate 5 x 10-2s-1 before ageing)
1.0
4.0
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
.2

Section 02510 (a)

Page 5 of 8
2015
Mix Properties
.1
Submit job mix design for review by the Engineer 4 weeks prior to
commencing the work. At least 72 hours prior to the use of the job mix on
work covered by these specifications the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a sample minimum weight of 60kg, of the mix (dry batched),
binder not required to be used. The Engineer shall cause the sample to be
tested by an approved independent testing laboratory to assure compliance
to each and every applicable design specification. When the testing
indicates such compliance the Engineer shall approve in writing the use of
the mix. Thereafter, the test results shall constitute the design mix formula
for the mix for purposes of determining deviations and variations.
.2
Mix design shall meet the requirements given in Table 'B' below for a
laboratory compacted mix, mixed at 180C and compacted at 168C with 50
blows from a mechanical compactor. Mix temperature at the plant shall not
exceed 185C.
Table 'B'
LABORATORY MIX PROPERTIES
ASTM No.
PROPERTY
LIMIT
Binder Content (%)
8.5 min
Marshall Stability (N)
6000 min
Flow (250 m)
20 max
VMA (%)
14.0 min
Air Voids (%)
24
Permeability @ 70 kPa (cm/s)

Film Thickness (m)
.3
10-7 Max
D 2172 /ATT12 Part II

D 1559
D 1559
D 5084-90
8.0 min
Allowable variations in aggregate gradation between the job mix and the
approved mix design:
3% on material retained on the .160mm and coarser sieve.
1% on material retained on the .080mm sieve.
EXECUTION
3.1
Surface Preparation
.1
Blow dry the deck using min. of 125 CFM compressed air to ensure that no mud, dirt,
standing water, or surface moisture is left in place.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
3.2
3.3

Section 02510 (a)

Page 6 of 8
2015
.2
Depressions greater than 10mm in depth shall be brought level with surrounding
areas by manual application and tamping of the mastic pavement mixture.
.3
Apply a tack coat of SS-1 emulsion at a rate of 0.5 litres per square metre.
Complete drying of the tack coat is required before paving can commence. The tack
shall be a mixture of equal parts SS-1 and water.
.4
Care shall be taken to protect adjacent structures and appurtenances from being
spattered by the tack coat. The Contractor shall remove any spattering and make
good the affected surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Owner.
.5
Apply a uniform coating of SS-1 emulsion along gutter lines, adjacent to expansion
joints and around deck drains using a brush or squeegee. Vertical faces of curbs
and other appurtenances shall be brush coated with a rubberised asphaltic
compound such as Bakor 570 - 05 Rubber asphalt edge sealer or approved equal.
Delivery
.1
Transport mix to job site in vehicles cleaned of foreign material.
.2
Paint of spray truck beds with light oil, limewater, soap or detergent solution, at least
once a day or as required. Elevate truck bed and thoroughly drain. No ponding of
solution will be permitted.
.3
Schedule delivery of material for placing in daylight, unless the Engineer approves
artificial light.
.4
Deliver material to the paver at a uniform rate in an amount within capacity of paving
and compacting equipment.
.5
For the purpose of checking asphalt temperatures of delivered asphalt mix, trucks
shall have a 15mm hole drilled into its box, at a distance of 300mm from the floor of
the box.
.6
Deliver loads continuously in covered vehicles and immediately spread and compact.
.7
Loaded or empty trucks shall not be turned around on the bridge deck.
.8
Ensure vehicle tires are clean of deleterious material prior to driving onto the bridge
deck.
.9
Maintain asphalt at a temperature greater than 160o C. The load will be rejected if
the asphalt temperature falls below 160o C.
Placing
.1
Placing - SINGLE LIFT

.1
Standard paving machines shall be adjusted to place a continuous mat of

asphalt to match existing thickness.
.2
Temperature is above 10o C and rising. Intermediate rolling will be

completed before the temperature of the mat falls below 55oC.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
3.4
3.5

Section 02510 (a)

Page 7 of 8
2015
.3
Final lift thickness after a minimum achieved density of 98% of submitted

Marshall Mix design will be reported as 85% of the placed asphalt mix as
measured behind the asphalt spreader during placement.
.4
The thickness of the single lift membrane / wearing course pavement shall
not be less than 45mm in any given area. Some adjustment of mat thickness
may be required to match the elevations of existing features.
.5
Placing may be suspended by the Engineer if segregation of mix material

occurs until such time as the cause can be determined and corrected.
Compacting
.1
Asphaltic concrete shall be compacted to not less than 98 percent of the maximum
Marshall density.
.2
Steel and pneumatic-tired rollers shall be kept slightly moistened by water. Steel
rollers shall be equipped with scrapers. Pneumatic tire rollers shall be equipped with
coco mats. Excessive use of water will not be permitted. Both steel and pneumatic
tire rollers shall be available on site at all times. Dual steel and rubber tire rollers
shall not be used.
.3
The finished surface of the mat shall be free from waves, hairline cracks, roller
marks and other unevenness. The finished surface shall be free from depressions
exceeding 6mm as measured in any direction with a 4500mm straight edge.
.4
If the finished surface of the mat does not comply with the above requirements, the
Contractor shall remove and replace the deficient areas at no cost to the Owner.
The replacement of the mat shall be performed in accordance with these
specifications.
.5
No traffic shall be allowed on newly placed asphalt until densities have been reached
and surface has cooled down to 32C.
Plant Operations (Drum Plant)

.1
Shall follow requirements as outlined in ASTM D995
.2
Cold feed bins are to be emptied and completely cleaned out prior to production.
.3
Plant production temperatures are to be obtained with the introduction of cold feed
aggregates and the asphalt cement.
.4
A small quantity of asphaltic mix will be processed through the plant and delivered to
a truck box. At this time, asphalt temperatures shall be taken to ensure the asphalt
mix is within specified temperature limits. Also, at this time a visual inspection of the
mix should be undertaken to ensure consistency of the asphaltic mix. This asphalt
should be disposed of. If all requirements appear to be achieved, the plant may then
start to introduce the asphaltic mix into the heated silos.
.5
Asphaltic Silos. Prior to use, the specifications of the proposed asphaltic hot mix
silos shall be submitted for written approval. The Engineer reserves the right to
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:

Section 02510 (a)

Page 8 of 8
2015
withdraw approval if asphaltic hot mix shows evidence of potential segregation or

loss of temperature
.6
If at any time during production the asphalt drum plant is used to produce various
other mixes, the plant and all cold feed bins shall be cleaned out prior to the
production of the bridge mastic asphaltic mix.
.7
The Engineer reserves the right to request, for review, the asphalt plant calibration
data, seventy-two hours prior to commencement of production.
PAYMENT
4.1
Payment for the work of this section shall be on a unit price basis per square meter of deck
as tendered which shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, and equipment
necessary to complete the work, including all subsidiary and incidental items thereto for
which separate payment is not elsewhere provided.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 1 of 12
Tender No:
CONCRETE PAVING MULTIPLE LIFTS
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
1
GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
.1
1.2
Related Work
.1
1.3
The City of Calgary, 2015 Standard Specifications, Roads Construction.
Source Sampling
.1
1.5
Bridge Deck Waterproofing: Section 07100
Reference Standards
.1
1.4
Provide all labour, materials and equipment required for the supply and
placement of bituminous tack coat and hot mix asphalt concrete to the bridge
deck and approaches.
Sampling and testing procedures used to determine material characteristics shall

be as outlined in the City of Calgary Roads Construction Specification Section
307.02.03 or Section 307.03.03 Sampling and Testing, as applicable, unless
otherwise specified.
Submittals
Submittals to be provided at least four (4) weeks prior to commencing work.
.1
Viscosity-temperature chart for asphalt cement to be supplied showing either

Saybolt Furol viscosity in seconds or Kinematic Viscosity in centistokes,
temperature range 105C to175C.
.2
Manufacturer's test data and

requirements of this Section.
.3
Mix design as per City of Calgary Roads Construction Specification Section

307.00.00 unless noted otherwise in this Section.
.4
Aggregate source name(s) and location(s).
.5
The gradation of each aggregate to be used in the mixture using the sieve sizes
listed elsewhere in this Contract.
.6
The percentage by mass of each aggregate to be used in the mixture.
.7
The mix design gradation of the combined aggregate.
.8
Other characteristics of the combined aggregate specified in Calgary Roads

Construction Specification Section 307.02.00 for a Superpave design or Section
307.03.00 for a Marshall design.
.9
All mix design characteristics, including graphs used in arriving at the final mix
design, the bulk specific gravity of the combined aggregates, graph of theoretical
certification
that
asphalt
cement
meets
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 2 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
maximum specific gravities, the asphalt absorption of the combined aggregates
and tensile strength ratio both with and without freeze-thaw conditioning (for
Superpave).
1.2
1.3
.10
Identification of each asphalt supplier by name, location and types and grades of
asphalt to be supplied.
.11
Percent uncompacted voids (Fine Aggregate Angularity) of loosely compacted

minus 2500 portion of the combined aggregate in accordance with TLT-125 for a
Marshall design. No minimum value specified.
.12
For each asphalt supplied, asphalt specific gravity and recommended mixing and
compaction temperatures for the preparation of design specimens.
.13
Voids table to include Air Voids, VMA and Voids Filled with Asphalt for various
asphalt contents (0.1% increments) and bulk densities (increments of 5 kg/m3).
.14
Mix design submissions using RAP shall include the RAP source name(s) and
location(s), all RAP asphalt content and gradation test results, the bulk specific
gravity of the RAP aggregate, the percentage by weight of RAP to be used in the
mixture, and, when required, all RAP rheological test results, the design rheology
and all blending information used.
Delivery and Storage

.1
When necessary to blend aggregates from one or more sources to produce

required gradation, do not blend in stockpiles.
.2
When dryer drum mixing plant is used, stockpile fine aggregate separately from
course aggregate.
.3
Provide approved storage, heating tanks and pumping facilities for asphalt
cement.
Testing/Inspection
.1
Products, workmanship and testing shall conform to the standards specified in

this Section.
.2
All products and workmanship will be inspected by the Engineer. To facilitate in

this process, the Contractor shall provide representative samples of each of the
aggregate components, asphalt cement and RAP for verification purposes. A
sufficient quantity of each component shall be provided to result in a 100 kg
sample of combined aggregate at design proportions. The cost of such mix
design verification will be borne by the City.
.3
Products and mixes will be tested for conformance to the specified requirements
by an independent testing agency.
.4
Notify the Engineer and testing agency in ample time to permit inspection and
testing.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 3 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
.5
Cooperate with the Engineer and testing agency on the inspection of materials
and sampling.
.6
The Contractor shall not produce any asphalt mix prior to receiving the
Engineers written notice that the mix design has been verified. Any mix
produced prior to receiving such notice will not be accepted.
.7
The aggregate proportioning (including RAP), target gradation, asphalt content

and air void content for the accepted mix design will then be the Design Mix
Formula and will become the Job Mix Formula for the start in production of
asphalt mix.
.8
The Contractor shall be responsible for producing mixes which conform to the
Specifications.
.9
Do not cover any work before inspection and testing unless authorized by the
.10
specified requirements as directed by the Engineer, at own cost.
Examination
.1
Examine the drawings and visit the site to determine existing conditions. No
additional compensation will be made for extra work due to existing conditions
which such examination should have disclosed.
.2
Examine previously constructed work. Notify the Engineer, in writing, of any

conditions which may prejudice proper completion of this work. Commencement
of work implies acceptance of existing conditions.
Protection
.1
Protect all monuments, bench marks, stakes and lines located on site. Protect
existing structures, appurtenances, trees and shrubs.
.2
Repair or replace items damaged by this work to the Engineers approval; at no

extra cost to the City.
Cooperation
.1
Cooperate with other trades and other contractors to expedite progress of the
work.
.2
The work of this Section must be fully coordinated with the work of the bridge
deck waterproofing section. The hot mix asphalt concrete must be placed as
soon as possible but within seven (7) days maximum as per manufacturer's
recommendations after the protection boards for the waterproofing are placed
and immediately after the tack coat is cured.
Haul Routes
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 4 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
.1
Haul routes to be approved by the municipal authorities having jurisdiction and

the General Conditions.
.2
Equip vehicles to prevent spilling or leaking of any part of the load.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Material
.1
Asphalt cement: to conform to the City of Calgary Roads Construction

Specification Section 307.01.00, as per Contract design requirements.
.2
Aggregates:
.1
.3
Tack Coat:
.1
.4
The tack coat material shall be anionic emulsified asphalt binder (SS-1)
subject to approval.
Joint Sealant:
.1
2.2
To conform to the City of Calgary Roads Construction Specification

Section 307.02.00 meeting Marshall Mix Type B, C or Section
307.03.00, meeting Superpave 12.5 mm (Fine Graded) as per Contract
design requirements.
Joint Sealant: Bakor 570-05, Meadows 164, Trem THC 200 or Hydrotech
Hot Poured Seal 6160.
Mix Design
.1
See requirements of the City of Calgary Roads Construction Specification

Section 307.02.00 or Section 307.03.00, as applicable.
.2
Submit job mix design as per Contract design requirements for review by
the Engineer four (4) weeks prior to commencing the work.
.3
Design of mix: to conform to the City of Calgary Roads Construction

Specification Section 307.00.00. When Marshall is specified in Contract,
the Marshall mix shall meet Mix Type B or C requirements including
other related requirements in this Section. When Superpave is specified
in Contract, the Superpave mix shall meet Superpave 12.5 mm (Fine
Graded) requirements including other requirements in this Section.
.4
Measure physical requirements in accordance with the requirements of

the City of Calgary Roads Construction Specification Section 307.02.00
or Section 307.03.00 for Superpave or Marshall design requirements
respectively, as per Contract design requirements.
.5
Do not change job-mix without prior approval. Should a change in a

material source be proposed, a new job-mix formula is to be provided to
be approved.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 5 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
.6
Return plant dust collected during processing to mix in quantities not

injurious to mix properties.
.7
All costs incurred in mix design formulation are the responsibility of the
Contractor. Shipping costs for samples sent to the Engineer for
verification and approval are the responsibility of the Contractor.
EXECUTION
3.1
Plant and Mixing Requirements

.1
Batch and continuous mixing plants:

.1
Shall conform to ASTM D995.
.2
Heat asphalt cement and aggregate to mixing temperature directed by

Engineer. Do not heat asphalt cement above the lower of the what is
recommended in writing by the asphalt supplier or 160C.
.3
Before mixing, dry aggregates to a moisture content not greater than 1%

by mass or to a lesser moisture content if required to meet mix design
requirements.
.4
Make available current asphalt cement viscosity data at plant. With

information relative to viscosity of asphalt being used, Engineer will direct
temperature of completed mix at plant and at paver after considering
hauling and placing conditions.
.5
Feed cold aggregates to plant in proportions that will ensure continuous

operations.
.6
Immediately after drying, screen aggregates into hot storage bins in sizes
to permit recombining into gradation meeting job-mix requirements.
.7
Store hot screened aggregates in a manner to minimize segregation and

temperature loss.
.8
Maintain temperature of materials within 5C of specified mix

temperature during mixing.
.9
Mixing time:
.1
In batch plants continue wet mixing as long as necessary to obtain

a thoroughly blended mix but not less than 30 s or more than 75 s.
.2
In continuous mixing plants, mixing time shall be as long as

necessary to obtain a thoroughly blended mix but not less than
45 s.
.3
Do not alter mixing time unless approved.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 6 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
.2
.3
.4
Dryer drum mixing plant:

.1
Feed aggregates to burner end of dryer drum by means of a multi-bin

cold feed unit and blend to meet job-mix requirements by adjustments of
variable speed feed belts and gates on each bin.
.2
Meter total flow of aggregate by an electronic weigh belt system with an

indicator that can be monitored by plant operator and which is interlocked
with asphalt pump so that proportions of aggregate and asphalt entering
mixer remain constant.
.3
Provide for easy calibration of weighing systems for aggregates without

having material enter mixer.
.4
Make provision for conveniently sampling the full flow of materials from
the cold feed.
.5
Provide screens or other suitable devices to reject oversize particles or

lumps of aggregate from cold feed prior to entering drum.
.6
Provide a system interlock which will stop all feed components if either
asphalt or aggregate from any bin stops flowing.
.7
Accomplish heating and mixing of asphalt mix in an approved parallel flow

dryer-mixer in which aggregate and asphalt enter drum at burner end and
travel parallel to flame and exhaust gas stream. Control heating to
prevent fracture of aggregate or excessive oxidation of asphalt. Equip
system with automatic burner controls and provide for continuous
temperature sensing of asphalt mixture at discharge, with a printing
recorder that can be monitored by plant operator. Submit printed record of
mix temperatures at end of each week.
.8
Mixing period and temperature to produce a uniform mixture in which

particles are thoroughly coated, and moisture content of material as it
leaves mixer to be less than 2%.
Temporary storage of hot mix:

.1
Provide mixture storage of sufficient capacity to permit continuous

operation and designed to prevent segregation.
.2
Do not store asphalt mix in storage bins in excess of 3 metres.
Mixing tolerances:
.1
Permissible variation in aggregate gradation and asphalt cement from job

mix (percent of total mass) shall conform to City of Calgary Roads
Construction Specification Section 307.02.02 or Section 307.03.02 as
applicable.
.2
Permissible variation of mix temperature at discharge from plant must

remain within the viscosity/temperature curve for the asphalt cement.
Provide chart from asphalt supplier showing this curve.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 7 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Equipment
.1
Pavers: mechanical automatic grade controlled self-powered pavers capable of

spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade and crown indicated.
.2
Rollers: sufficient number of rollers of type and weight to obtain specified density
of compacted mix.
.3
Haul trucks: of adequate size, speed and condition to ensure orderly and
continuous operation and as follows:
.4
3.3
.1
Boxes with tight metal bottoms.
.2
Covers of sufficient size and weight to completely cover and protect

asphalt mix when truck fully loaded.
.3
In cool weather or for long hauls, insulate entire contact area of each
truck box.
.4
Trucks which cannot be weighed in a single operation on scales supplied

will not be accepted.
Hand tools:
.1
Lutes or rakes with covered teeth during spreading and finishing

operations.
.2
structures inaccessible to roller. Mechanical compaction equipment, when
approved, may be used instead of tamping irons.
.3
Preparation
.1
The tack coat shall be applied to the top surface of protection boards and the
approaches. The tack coat shall be applied uniformly at a rate of 0.5 L/m2.
.2
The tack coat shall be applied only when the surface to be treated is dry, when
the weather is not foggy or rainy, and when the surface temperature is above
5C.
.3
Before applying the tack coat, loose dirt or other objectionable material shall be
removed from the prepared surface by brooming and other methods. Temporarily
plug all deck drains and catch basins.
.4
The tack coat shall be applied by means of a self-propelled pressure bituminous

material distributor subject to approval.
.5
The tack coats shall be applied in a single application.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 8 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
3.4
3.5
.6
The contractor shall be responsible for accidents or damage resulting from the
use of excessive temperatures and shall replace, at no expense to the City, any
material destroyed.
.7
Adjacent structures and appurtenances shall not be spattered by the tack coat.
The contractor shall remove, at no direct expense to the City, any spattering
caused by his operations.
.8
Areas missed by the distributor or inaccessible to the distributor, shall be treated

using hand-spray prior to tacking section adjacent.
.9
No traffic (construction vehicles) shall be allowed on the tack coat until the
material is fully cured.
Delivery
.1
.2
Paint or spray truck beds with soap or detergent solution at least once a day or
as required. Elevate truck bed and thoroughly drain. No excess solution will be
permitted.
.3
Schedule delivery of material for placing in daylight, unless use of artificial light is
approved.
.4
Deliver material to paver at a uniform rate and in an amount within capacity of

paving and compacting equipment.
.5
Deliver loads continuously in covered vehicles and immediately spread and

compact. Deliver and place mixes at a temperature within range directed, but
generally not less than 135C.
.6
.7
Ensure vehicle tires are clean of deleterious material prior to driving onto
protection board.
Placing
.1
Place asphalt concrete to thicknesses, grades and lines indicated in the Contract
documents or as directed by the Engineer.
.2
Placing conditions:
.1
Place asphalt mixtures only when air temperature is above 5C and

secondary rolling of the asphalt concrete will be completed before the
temperature of the mat falls below 55C.
.2
When temperature of surface on which material is to be placed falls below

10C provide extra rollers as necessary to obtain required compaction
before cooling.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 9 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
.3
Do not place hot-mix asphalt when pools of standing water exist on

surface to be paved, during rain, or when surface is damp or frozen.
.3
Place asphalt concrete on the bridge in two nominal 40 mm compacted lifts, with
a tack coat between each lift. The tack coat shall be applied uniformly at a rate
of 0.5 L/m2.
.4
Strips to be placed in such lengths as to enable the complete surface width to be

completed in one days operation.
.5
Spread and strike off mixture with self propelled mechanical finisher.
.1
Construct longitudinal joints and edges true to line markings. Lines for
paver to follow to be parallel to centerline of proposed pavement, and
approved. Position and operate paver to follow established line closely.
.2
When using pavers in echelon, have first paver follow marks or lines, and
second paver follow edge of material placed by first paver. Work pavers
as close together as possible and in no case permit them to be more than
30 m apart.
.3
If segregation occurs, immediately suspend spreading operation until

cause is determined and corrected.
.4
Correct irregularities in alignment left by paver by trimming directly behind

machine.
.5
Correct irregularities in surface of pavement course directly behind paver.

Remove by shovel or lute excess material forming high spots. Fill and
smooth indented areas with hot mix. Do not broadcast material over such
areas.
.6
Do not throw surplus material on freshly screeded surfaces.
.7
Ensure that no displacement of protection boards or rubberized membranes

occurs during the paving operation.
.8
The trucks shall dump part of their load into the paver and then move up the deck
away from the paver. The paver shall not push the truck. Any hot mix material
spilled in front of the paver shall be removed immediately so that it is not ground
into the waterproofing membrane or protection board.
.9
When hand spreading is used:

.1
Wood or steel forms, approved and rigidly supported to assure correct

grade and cross section, may be used. Use measuring blocks and
intermediate strips to aid in obtaining required cross-section.
.2
Distribute material uniformly. Do not broadcast material.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 10 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
3.6
.3
During spreading operation, thoroughly loosen and uniformly distribute

material by lutes or covered rakes. Reject material that has formed into
lumps and does not break down readily.
.4
Following placing and before rolling, check surface with templates and
straight edges and correct irregularities.
.5
Provide heating equipment to keep hand tools free from asphalt. Avoid
high temperatures which may burn material. Do not use tools at a greater
temperature than temperature of mix being placed.
Compacting
.1
Vibratory rollers shall be operated in static mode.
.2
The minimum average Marshall density of the first lift shall be 95% with no
individual test less than 93 percent. The remainder of the first lift shall have a
minimum Marshall density of 95 percent. The minimum average Marshall density
of the second lift (top lift) shall be 97% with no individual test less than 95
percent.
.3
rollers shall be equipped with scrapers. Pneumatic tire rollers shall be equipped
with coco mats. Excessive use of water will not be permitted.
.4
The speed of steel tire rollers shall not exceed 5 km/hour. The speed of
pneumatic tire rollers shall not exceed 8 km/hour.
.5
Rollers shall be operated with the drive wheels nearest the paving machine.
.6
Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the paving operation.
.7
After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, rolling shall start
longitudinally at the edge and gradually progress toward the centre of the mat.
.8
The roller shall not be driven onto or off the mat over the longitudinal edge of
mat.
.9
All of the first lift is to cool to 110C before commencing with the breakdown
rolling. Do one pass with the static steel roller only. The remaining rolling is to be
done with pneumatic-tired rollers with overlapping passes. Do not allow the hot
mix design to soften the waterproofing such that the protective boards will squirm
under the roller and crack the hot mix around the perimeter of the board. The
second lift may be rolled in the usual manner as specified. Rollers shall be
operated to prevent pick-up of the HMA on the tires.
.10
Do not turn rollers around on the deck. The roller must run off the deck to stop
and turn.
.11
The line of rolling shall not suddenly be changed or the direction of rolling
suddenly reversed. Any pronounced change or direction shall be made on stable
material.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 11 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
3.7
.12
Rollers shall not be permitted to stand on the mat.
.13
marks and other unevenness. The finished surface shall be free from
depressions exceeding 6 mm as measured in any direction with a 4.5 m straight
edge.
.14
If the finished surface of the mat does not comply with the aforementioned
smoothness requirements, the Contractor shall remove and replace deficient
section(s) at his own expense. The replacement of the mat shall be performed
with a paving machine and shall comply with the specified riding quality.
Joints
.1
.2
.3
General:
.1
Trim old pavements to vertical face to provide true surface and cross
section against which new pavement may be laid. Remove loose
particles.
.2
Paint joint face with thin coat of hot asphalt cement or preheat joint face
with approved heater, prior to placing of fresh mixture.
.3
Overlap previously laid strip with spreader by 100 mm.
.4
Remove surplus material from surface of previously laid strip. Do not

dispose on surface of freshly laid strip.
.5
Construct joints between asphalt concrete pavement and Portland

cement concrete pavement as indicated.
.6
Paint contact surfaces of existing structures such as manholes, curbs or

gutters with bituminous material prior to placing adjacent pavement.
.7
Where possible, lateral joints shall be skewed at 30 or more from the

perpendicular to the direction of travel. Joints in new asphalt shall be
raked to a 30 slope.
Transverse joints:
.1
Construct and thoroughly compact transverse joints to provide a smooth

riding surface.
.2
Stagger joint locations in adjacent lanes by minimum 2 m.
.3
Offset transverse joint in succeeding lifts by at least 600 mm.
Longitudinal Joints:
.1
Before rolling, carefully remove, gather and discard coarse aggregate in

material overlapping joint with a lute or rake.
City of Calgary
Section 02510 (b)
Project Name
Page 12 of 12
Tender No:
2015
____________________________________________________________________________
.2
Roll longitudinal joints directly behind paving operation.
.3
When rolling, shift roller over onto previously placed lane in order that not
more than 150 mm of roller rides on edge of newly laid lane, then operate
roller to pinch and press fines gradually across joint. Continue rolling until
a thoroughly compacted neat joint is obtained.
.4
Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding lifts by at least 150 mm.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

.1
Payment for the work of this section shall be on a unit price basis per square
metre of deck or a lump sum basis as tendered in the specified respective
Contract Schedule which shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, and
equipment necessary to complete the work, including all subsidiary and
incidental items thereto for which separate payment is not elsewhere provided.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 1 OF 8
Date: 2015
.1
Provide all labour, materials and equipment required to place a polymer modified
asphalt membrane / mastic surface wearing course.
.2
Planing of asphalt is not allowed.

excavator or back hoe.
Existing asphalt shall be removed by an
Related Work
.1
The City of Calgary, Traffic Field Operations section may install permanent
plastic lane markings at the time of this work. The Contractor shall contact
Traffic Field Operations a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to this work to inform
them of his intended schedule. The Contractor shall provide a drum roller and
operator to assist in carrying out this work.
.2
Notwithstanding 1.2.1 above, lane markings will be painted by The City of

Calgary, Traffic Field Operations following completion of this work.
Testing/Inspection
.1
All products and workmanship will be inspected by the Engineer and/or by an

independent Testing Agency, appointed and paid for by the Owner.
.2
Component products and random batches of production mixes will be tested for
conformance to the specified requirements by the Testing Agency.
.3
Notify the Engineer and the Testing Agency in ample time to permit inspection
and testing.
.4
Co-operate with the Engineer and Testing Agency on the inspection of materials
and sampling.
.5
Do not cover any work before inspection and testing unless authorised by the
.6
specified requirements as directed by the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner.
Curing Requirement
.1
1.5

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
No traffic shall be allowed on newly placed asphalt until required densities have
been reached and the surface has cooled down to 32 C.
Existing Asphalt Depth

.1
Asphalt core data is indicated on the drawings for all bridges.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
1.6
1.8
Where applicable, expansion joint seals are to be protected by filling with sand or
covering with two (2) layers of duct tape.
Haul Routes
.1
Haul routes shall be approved by the municipal authorities having jurisdiction and
in accordance with the Standard General Conditions.
.2
Ensure that all vehicles used are equipped to prevent spilling or leaking of any
part of the load.
Equipment
.1
Pavers: Mechanical automatic grade controlled self-powered pavers capable of

spreading mix within specified tolerance, true to line, grade and crown indicated.
.2
Rollers: Sufficient number of rollers of type and weight to obtain specified density
of compacted mix. Vibrators on vibratory rollers shall NOT be activated. The
Engineer, at his sole discretion, may allow the Contractor to activate vibrators on
vibratory rollers not exceeding 5 tonnes in weight.
.3
Haul trucks: Shall be of adequate size, speed and condition to ensure orderly
and continuous operation and as follows:
.4
1.9
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 2 OF 8
Date: 2015
Protection of Expansion Joint Seals

.1
1.7

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
.1
Boxes shall be tightly sealed to prevent leakage of material.
.2
Covers of sufficient size and weight to completely cover and protect

asphalt mix when truck fully loaded.
.3
In cool weather or for long hauls, insulate entire contact area of each
truck box.
Hand Tools:
.1
Lutes or rakes with covered teeth during spreading and finishing

operations.
.2
structures inaccessible to roller. Mechanical compaction equipment,
when approved by the Engineer, may be used instead of tamping irons.
.3
Longitudinal Joints
If the application of the wearing course is stopped or delayed for 6 hours or more, or the
edge of the longitudinal joint has been deformed due to vehicles driving over the new
wearing course then the edge shall be saw cut and Bakor 570-05 edge sealer applied to
the vertical face of the joint.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
PRODUCTS
2.1
Products - SINGLE LIFT

.1
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 3 OF 8
Date: 2015
Materials
.1
Binder for the mix shall be Polymer Modified Bridge Mastic as supplied by
Husky Oil Ltd. meeting the requirements given in Table 'A'. No
alternatives will be allowed.
.2
Aggregate shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following
gradation requirements. Fine aggregate shall have fracture evident on a
minimum 80% of grain.
Sieve Size
% Passing
10 mm
100
5.0 mm
91 96
2.5 mm
71 77
.160 mm
8 16
.080 mm
48
.3
Coarse aggregate: Of the particles retained on the 5.0 mm sieve at least

70% shall have two or more fractured faces.
.4
Tack coat material shall be anionic emulsified asphalt binder (SS-1)

subject to approval of the Engineer
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 4 OF 8
Date: 2015
TABLE 'A'
BRIDGE MASTIC PROPERTIES
UNITS
ASTM NO.
MIN
MAX
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Low Service Temperature
Stiffness Modulus @ -20oC
5x107
Pa
(Loading Time, 500 sec)

(Recommended Method)
Pen @ 0oC, 200 g 60 sec
(Alternate Method only)
dmm
D5
30
Pa.s
D4402
600
Toughness
Benson
Test
(or equivalent)
10
Tenacity
Benson
Test
(or equivalent)
Kinematic Viscosity @ 135oC
mm2/s
D 2170
Flash Point
D 92
High Service Temperature

Viscosity @ 60oC
(Shear rate 5 x 10-2 s-1)
Elastic Behaviour
(@ room temperature)
TECHNOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3000
230
AGING CHARACTERISTICS - Test After Thin Film Oven Test

Weight Loss
D 1754
Ageing Index
Ageing Index=
1.0
4.0
Viscosity at 60oC (Shear rate 5 x 10-2s-1 after TFOT)

Viscosity at 60oC (Shear rate 5 x 10-2s-1 before ageing)
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
.2

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 5 OF 8
Date: 2015
Mix Properties
.1
Submit job mix design for review by the Engineer 4 weeks prior to
commencing the work. As least 72 hours prior to the use of the job mix
on work covered by these specifications the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a sample minimum weight of 60kg, of the mix (dry
batched), binder not required to be used. The Engineer shall cause the
sample to be tested by an approved independent testing laboratory to
assure compliance to each and every applicable design specification.
When the testing indicates such compliance the Engineer shall approve in
writing the use of the mix. Thereafter, the test results shall constitute the
design mix formula for the mix for purposes of determining deviations and
variations.
.2
Mix design shall meet the requirements given in Table 'B' below for a
laboratory compacted mix, mixed at 180C and compacted at 168C with
50 blows from a mechanical compactor. Mix temperature at the plant
shall not exceed 185C .
Table 'B' LABORATORY MIX PROPERTIES

PROPERTY
LIMIT
ASTM No.
Binder Content (%)
8.5 min
D 2172 / ATT-12
Part II
Marshall Stability (N)
6000 min
D 1559
Flow (250 m)
20 Max
D 1559
VMA (%)
14.0min
Air Voids (%)
2 4
Permeability @ 70 kPa (cm/s)
10-7max
Film Thickness (m)
.3
D 5084-90
8.0 min
Allowable variations in aggregate gradation between the job mix and the
approved mix design:
3% on material retained on the .160 mm and coarser sieve.
1% on material retained on the .080 mm sieve.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
EXECUTION
3.1
Removal of Asphalt
3.2
3.3

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 6 OF 8
Date: 2015
.1
The use of milling equipment is prohibited. A minimum of 90% of the area of the
concrete bridge deck must be visible after the removal operation. Any asphalt
left in place shall not exceed 10 mm in height. Remove all unbonded, loose
asphalt by scraping.
.2
Place protection in all expansion joints prior to the removal operation. Protection
to be left in place until after paving is completed.
.3
Clean bridge surface after removal operation is complete and blow dry entire
concrete deck.
.4
Temporary ramping is to be placed at all manholes and expansion joint and left in
place until just prior to paving.
Surface Preparation
.1
Blow dry the deck using min. of 125 CFM compressed air to ensure that no mud,
dirt, standing water, or surface moisture is left in place.
.2
Depressions greater than 10 mm in depth shall be brought level with surrounding

areas by manual application and tamping of the mastic pavement mixture.
.3
Apply a tack coat of SS-1 emulsion at a rate of 0.5 litres per square metre.
Complete drying of the tack coat is required before paving can commence. The
tack shall be a mixture of equal parts SS-1 and water.
.4
Care shall be taken to protect adjacent structures and appurtenances from being
spattered by the tack coat. The Contractor shall remove any spattering and
make good the affected surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to
the Owner.
.5
Apply a uniform coating of SS-1 emulsion along gutter lines, adjacent to

expansion joints and around drain pipes using a brush or squeegee. Vertical
faces of curbs and other appurtenances shall be brush coated with a rubberised
asphaltic compound such as Bakor 570 - 05 Rubber asphalt edge sealer or
approved equal.
Delivery
.1
.2
Paint of spray truck beds with light oil, limewater, soap or detergent solution, at
least once a day or as required. Elevate truck bed and thoroughly drain. No
ponding of solution will be permitted.
.3
Schedule delivery of material for placing in daylight, unless the Engineer

approves artificial light.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
3.4
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 7 OF 8
Date: 2015
.4
For the purpose of checking asphalt temperatures of delivered asphalt mix,

trucks shall have a 15mm hole drilled into its box, at a distance of 300mm from
the floor of the box.
.5
Deliver material to the paver at a uniform rate in an amount within capacity of

paving and compacting equipment.
.6
Deliver loads continuously in covered vehicles and immediately spread and

compact.
.7
.8
Ensure vehicle tires are clean of deleterious material prior to driving onto the
bridge deck.
.9
Maintain asphalt at a temperature greater than 160C. The load will be rejected if
the asphalt temperature falls below 160C.
Placing
.1
3.5

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
Placing - SINGLE LIFT

.1
Standard paving machines shall be adjusted to place a continuous mat of

asphalt to match existing thickness.
.2
Place asphalt mixtures only when air temperature is above 12oC and
deck temperature is above 10C and rising. Intermediate rolling will be
completed before the temperature of the mat falls below 55C.
.3
Final lift thickness after a minimum achieved density of 98% of submitted

Marshall mix design will be reported as 85% of the placed asphalt mix as
measured behind the asphalt spreader during placement.
.4
The thickness of the single lift membrane/wearing course pavement shall

not be less than 45 mm in any given area. Some adjustment of mat
thickness may be required to match the elevations of existing features.
.5
Placing may be suspended by the Engineer if segregation of mix

materials occurs until such time as the cause can be determined and
corrected.
Compacting
.1
Asphaltic concrete shall be compacted to not less than 98 percent of the

maximum Marshall density.
.2
rollers shall be equipped with scrapers. Pneumatic tire rollers shall be equipped
with coco mats. Excessive use of water will not be permitted. Both steel and
pneumatic tire rollers shall be available on site at all times. Dual steel and rubber
tire rollers shall not be used.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
.3
.4
.5
3.6

CONCRETE PAVING
REHABILITATION
Section: 02510(c)
Page: 8 OF 8
Date: 2015
marks and other unevenness.
The finished surface shall be free from
depressions exceeding 6 mm as measured in any direction with a 4500 mm
straight edge.
If the finished surface of the mat does not comply with the above requirements,
the Contractor shall remove and replace the deficient areas at no cost to the
Owner. The replacement of the mat shall be performed in accordance with these
specifications.
No traffic shall be allowed on newly placed asphalt until densities have been
reached and surface has cooled down to 32C.
Plant Operations (Drum Plant)

.1
Shall follow requirements as outlined in ASTM D995
.2
Cold feed bins are to be emptied and completely cleaned out prior to production.
.3
Plant production temperatures are to be obtained with the introduction of cold

feed aggregates and the asphalt cement.
.4
A small quantity of asphaltic mix will be processed through the plant and
delivered to a truck box. At this time, asphalt temperatures shall be taken to
ensure the asphalt mix is within specified temperature limits. Also, at this time a
visual inspection of the mix should be undertaken to ensure consistency of the
asphaltic mix. This asphalt should be disposed of. If all requirements appear to
be achieved, the plant may then start to introduce the asphaltic mix into the
heated silos.
.5
Asphaltic Silos. Prior to use, the specifications of the proposed asphaltic hot mix
silos shall be submitted for written approval. The Engineer reserves the right to
withdraw approval if asphaltic hot mix shows evidence of potential segregation or
loss of temperature.
.6
If at any time during production the asphalt drum plant is used to produce various
other mixes, the plant and all cold feed bins shall be cleaned out prior to the
production of the bridge mastic asphaltic mix.
.7
The Engineer reserves the right to request, for review, the asphalt calibration
data, seventy-two hours prior to commencement of production.
PAYMENT
4.1
Payment for the work of this section shall be on a lump sum basis as tendered which
shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, and equipment necessary to
complete the work, including all subsidiary and incidental items thereto for which
separate payment is not elsewhere provided.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
1
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
NOISE BARRIERS
Section 02850
Page 1 of 12
2015
Scope of Work
.1
Concrete Noise Barrier construction shall include the design, fabrication,

supply, construction and all associated work and incidentals necessary to
install the sound barriers in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
.2
The Contractor shall supply all materials. A complete job is called for,
therefore any labour, equipment, tools, or other items not specifically
mentioned, but necessary to complete the Work, shall be considered
incidental to the Work and no separate or additional payment be made.
.3
Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall

cover the cost of engineering, quality control, quality assurance and
project closure documentation including Record Drawings. The
Contractor shall provide a maintenance manual which includes repair and
replacement procedures,
.4
Geotechnical will be undertaken by the City and made available to

Tenderers, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
Aesthetic Requirements
.1
Aesthetic requirements for the noise barriers, such as finish, texture, color
and special features shall be as specified in the Contract Documents, and
are subject to the approval by the City.
.2
The noise barrier wall profile shall be as specified in the Contract

Documents, and are subject to the approval by the City. The maximum
step height between adjacent panels is 300 mm.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections, if applicable.

.1
Excavation and Backfill
.2
Concrete Piles
.3
Concrete Reinforcing
.4
Cast-in-Place Concrete
.5
.6
Miscellaneous Metals
Design
City of Calgary
Section 02850
Project Name:
Page 2 of 12
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
2015
.1
A site specific design shall be performed for each individual application
and is to be carried out by or under the supervision of a Professional
Engineer registered in the Province of Alberta.
.2
Design drawings and construction Specifications shall be authenticated

by a Professional Engineer registered in Alberta.
.3
The design shall conform to CAN/CSA S6, latest edition, The City of
Calgary Design Guidelines for Bridges and Structures, latest edition,
CAN/CSA Z107.9, latest edition, and all other relevant reference
standards.
.4
The design life of the Noise Barrier shall be 50 years, with a minimum
predicted maintenance free- period of 20 years.
.5
Include in the Drawings the details of reinforcing, dimensions, joints,

foundations, construction tolerances, horizontal and vertical geometry,
shimming, height stepping, drainage, utility crossing and any other sitespecific features. Specify all materials, products and accessories as well
as construction procedures.
.6
The construction drawings, details and Specifications shall be submitted

to the City for review. Contractor shall allow a minimum of 2 (two) weeks
for the City to review and return comments. Construction shall not
proceed until all comments have been resolved to the satisfaction of the
City, unless approved otherwise. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the
City for information only.
.7
The designer of the Noise Barrier shall be the Engineer of Record. The
Engineer of Record or designate shall be responsible for the construction
inspection and review and shall submit a report with each progress
invoice to the City. Reports shall indicate construction progress and shall
include documentation to verify that, as a minimum, one inspection of pile
installation and one inspection of wall fabrication and construction per 100
lineal meters of installed Noise Barrier was completed and that the
construction conforms to the design. The Engineer of Record or
designate shall supervise any remedial action required to correct
deficiencies in construction. The Engineer of Record shall file a letterconfirmation of the construction compliance with the requirements of the
design (see attached form).
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Concrete for Precast Concrete Noise Barrier Zero Slump shall conform
to Sections 316.03.01 and 316.03.02 of the City of Calgary Standard
Specifications, Roads Construction, latest edition.
.2
Masonry units to conform to CAN/CSA Standards on concrete masonry

units A165 Series-04.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
.3
Wood noise barrier shall not be used.
2.2
Section 02850
Page 3 of 12
2015
.4
Concrete to conform to CAN/CSA-A23.1, latest edition and to the

specifications as listed in Part 1. Cement for pile concrete to be consistent
with geotechnical report recommendation.
.5
Silane sealer shall conform to the latest Alberta Transportation Product

List for Concrete Sealers Type 2a.
.6
Pigmented sealer shall conform to the latest Alberta Transportation

Product List for Concrete Sealers Type 3.
Acceptable Noise Barrier Systems are:

.1
Precast Noise Barrier as detailed in the current City of Calgary Standard

Specifications, Roads Construction, latest edition, Standard Drawing
454.1001.021 and as specified in Section 316.000.
.2
CCI AB Fence: site-specific design with details and technical

specifications contained in the October 30, 2003 submission to the City of
Calgary;
.3
Lafarge Block Noise Barrier: site-specific design as per November 16,

2005 Letter of Approval;
.4
Basalite Vista DSM Block Noise Barrier: site-specific design as per March
17, 2006 Letter of Approval;
.5
StoneTree Concrete Fence Walls; site-specific design as per January 18,

2008 Letter of Approval.
.6
Con-Force Noise Wall System: site-specific design as per October 23,

.7
Stonecrete Noise Wall System: site-specific design as per January 19,

.8
Concrete Cedar Fence System (DDS Consulting): site specific design as

per March 10, 2015 Letter of Approval.
.9
Verti-crete Noise Wall System (Advantage Concrete): site specific design

as per April 8, 2015 Letter of Approval
.10
Verti-crete Noise Wall System (TAL Stone): site specific design as per
April 8, 2015 Letter of Approval
.11
An alternative to the above systems may be accepted subject to the

satisfactory submission of the product information, review and
acceptance of the system by the City of Calgary, Transportation
Infrastructure.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
2.3
Concrete Materials
2.4
2.5
.1
Cement: Type GU or HS conforming to CAN/CSA A3001, latest edition.
.2
Fine Aggregate: conforming to CAN/CSA-A23.1, latest edition.
.3
Coarse Aggregate: conforming to CAN/CSA-A23.1, latest edition, Group

I, 14 mm to 5 mm.
.4
Water: conforming to CAN/CSA-A23.1, latest edition
.5
Materials are to be obtained from the same source of supply or

manufacturer for the duration of the project.
.6
New mix design and trial batch testing shall be done in the case of
changes with the source of supply.
Cementing Materials
.1
Cement: Type GU, Normal Portland cement conforming to CAN/CSAA3001, latest edition. Type HS (High Sulphate-Resistant hydraulic
cement) is acceptable in piles, grade beams, and other foundations.
Above grade structures can utilize Type HS cement only for sound
barriers (precast) designs with no steel reinforcement.
.2
The cement shall not contain a total sodium oxide equivalent in excess of
0.6% by mass.
Supplementary Cementing Materials

.1
Silica fume, if used, shall meet the requirements for Type SF

supplementary cementing material as specified in CAN/CSA-A3001,
latest edition.
.2
Fly ash, if used, shall be Type F pozzolan and shall conform to

CAN/CSA-A3001, latest edition, with the following exception:
.1
.3
2.6
NOISE BARRIERS
Section 02850
Page 4 of 12
2015
Calcium oxide content of type F fly ash shall not exceed 12%.
The use of fly ash to reduce minimum cement content limits is not
permitted. Supplemental fly ash to a maximum of 20% of the cement
content will be permitted.
Admixtures
.1
Air Entrainment: conforming to ASTM C260, latest edition.
.2
Chemical Admixtures: conforming to ASTM C494/C494M, latest edition.

Accelerating and/or retarding admixtures to be used only as approved by
the Engineer.
City of Calgary
Section 02850
Project Name:
Page 5 of 12
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
2015
.3
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be
used in concrete.
2.7
2.8
.4
Concrete pigmenting admixtures, if specified, shall be included in mix

design and shall be submitted for review by the Engineer, prior to use in
the Work.
.5
Use of efflorescence mitigating admixtures is encouraged. Submit

detailed product data and evidence of performance of the performance
enhancing admixtures.
.6
Documentation indicating the compatibility of all proposed admixtures in

combination shall be submitted with the mix design for review by the
Engineer.
Durability Requirements
.1
Noise barriers shall have uniform appearance, be free of laitance,

efflorescence and staining.
.2
The dry-cast segmented concrete elements shall have adequate freezethaw properties in accordance with ASTMC1372
.3
Concrete masonry units shall have maximum absorption rate of 6%.
.4
The wet-cast (precast and cast-in-place) concrete elements shall meet

the requirements of exposure class C-1 concrete in accordance CSA
A23.1, latest edition, Table 1 and Table 2.
.5
The required concrete cover to reinforcement shall be within the limits

and tolerances specified on the Drawings, and shall conform to CAN/CSA
S6, latest edition, The City of Calgary Design Guidelines for Bridges and
Structures, latest edition, CAN/CSA Z107.9, latest edition, and all other
relevant reference standards.
Mock-up
.1
2.9
A mock-up, of a full noise barrier section complete with finishing, shall be

provided for the City and Engineer of Records review and acceptance.
The mock-up may be permanently built into the work.
Non-Conformance
.1
Noise barriers that are constructed not meeting the requirements of the
accepted noise barrier mock-up, shall be considered as non-conformance
work.
.2
Non-conforming noise barrier materials are materials that are placed out
of position or are damaged and/or not conforming to size, length and
material specifications.
City of Calgary
Section 02850
Project Name:
Page 6 of 12
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
2015
.3
Report any non-conforming materials and repair or correct to the
Engineers satisfaction.
.4
If removal of non-conforming materials is required, the Contractor shall

remove the amount of Work performed since the last successful test or
installation check.
EXECUTION
3.1
Quality Control
3.2
.1
The Contractor is responsible for the quality of materials and products

provided for incorporation in the work and for the quality of the work.
.2
The Contractor shall perform inspections and testing necessary to ensure

that the works conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.3
Conform to the standards, as referenced in the Contract Documents.
.4
Tests of Noise Barrier alternative materials will be required to ensure

conformance with requirements stated herein.
.5
The Contractor is responsible for the concrete. Copies of mix design with
quantities shall be submitted to the City or their designate for review. The
review of the mix design does not constitute acceptance of the final
product.
.6
Tests of cement, supplementary cementing materials (SCMs) and

aggregates will be required to ensure conformance with requirements
stated herein.
.7
Alkali Aggregate Reaction Test results shall be submitted for the

aggregate used in the concrete mixes. Test results older than 2 years
shall be verified by re-testing. In the absence of the current test results
the Contractor shall submit an assessment of potential for deleterious
alkali aggregate reactivity in accordance with CSA A23.2-27A. The
aggregate shall be considered moderately reactive for the assessment
.8
Where no previous history has been established, pre-construction

laboratory or field trials shall be performed to demonstrate the
compatibility of admixtures with the cementitious materials.
.9
The Contractors Quality Control Plan and record documentation shall be

submitted for review by the City.
Quality Assurance
.1
The City will undertake, through an independent CSA certified testing

firm, random sampling, inspection and testing for the purpose of
determining the compliance with the Specifications and other Contract
Documents.
City of Calgary
Section 02850
Project Name:
Page 7 of 12
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
2015
.2
Provide access to all portions of work, manufacture and fabrication plants,
and cooperate with Citys representatives.
3.3
.3
Allow ample time for notification, inspection and corrective work. The
Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hours notice when requesting
an inspection.
.4
In case of the ambiguity whether the product, system or work conforms to

the applicable standard, the City reserves the right to have such product
or system tested or re-inspected to ascertain the conformance. The cost
of such testing will be borne by the City in the event of conformance and
by the Contractor in the event of non-conformance with the Contract
Documents.
.5
The City may perform a quality assurance audit at the batching /

precasting plant.
Concrete Strength Requirements

.1
.2
3.4
.1
The average of all tests shall exceed the specified strength.
.2
The average of any three consecutive tests shall be equal to, or

greater than, the specified strength.
.3
No individual strength test shall be in excess of 3.5MPa below the

specified strength.
If any of the foregoing criteria are not met, the City shall have the right to
require one or more of the following, the costs of which shall be borne by
the Contractor:
.1
Changes in the mix proportions for the remainder of the work.
.2
Stop further concrete placement until the Contractor demonstrates

through testing of trial mixes, that the revised mix design will
produce the specified physical properties.
.3
Removal and replacement of all non-conforming concrete.
Survey
.1
3.5
In order to conform to the concrete strength requirements of this

Specification, the results of tests performed on laboratory cured cylinders
for each class of concrete shall meet the following:
The City will provide survey for the horizontal alignment of the Noise
Barrier. The Contractor is responsible to provide survey for individual
piles and other required survey points.
Erection
City of Calgary
Section 02850
Project Name:
Page 8 of 12
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
2015
.1
Erection of Precast Concrete Noise Barrier shall be in accordance with
Section 316.03.04 of the City of Calgary Standard Specifications, Roads
Construction , latest edition.
.2
The Contractor shall install the Noise Barrier and component pieces in
such a way as to avoid damage to the noise barrier and component
pieces. In the event that any portion of the noise barrier or component
pieces is broken, damaged or defaced, the Contractor shall replace the
broken, damaged or defaced elements as directed by the Engineer at no
additional cost to the City, including any costs associated with removing
or dismantling the noise barrier and component pieces and reconstructing
or reinstalling the noise barrier and component pieces.
.3
The Contractor shall install the Noise Barrier and component pieces in
such a way as to avoid any visible gaps between the panels, between the
panels and the posts and between the panels and the finished grade.
.4
For gaps smaller than 15 mm in the finished wall, the Contractor shall
provide a repair procedure for the Engineers review and the City for
acceptance. The repair procedure shall address both the function and
the aesthetic aspects of the finished wall, and the remedial work shall be
at no additional cost to the City. For gaps that are 15 mm or greater that
are in the finished wall, the Contractor shall remove or dismantle the
noise barrier and component pieces and reconstruct or reinstall the noise
barrier and component pieces as directed by the Engineer to eliminate
the visible gaps to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall be at no
additional cost to the City.
.5
The installed top of wall profile of the Noise Barrier shall meet or exceed
the required elevation of the design top of wall profile.
.6
The exposed surface of the Noise Barrier shall be uniform, free of

staining, discoloration or other aesthetic defects.
.7
Should the successful bidder propose the Allan Block Fence System it
must employ the use of an Allan Block Fence Certified Installer as per
CCI Industries Ltd.
.8
Other approved Noise Barrier systems shall be installed only by Installers

Certified by the respective product suppliers. The installers shall be
identified in the Tender form.
.9
Cold weather concreting shall conform to CAN/CSA-A23.1, latest edition.
.10
Methods of concrete construction shall conform to CAN/CSA-A23.1, latest

edition and the Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Specification
for Masonry Structures (refer to attached Table 1 and Table 2)
.11
The Contractor shall provide shimming details on the Drawings, for

approval. Do not use alternative shimming methods, unless approved in
City of Calgary
Section 02850
Project Name:
Page 9 of 12
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
2015
writing by the Engineer. The maximum height allowable for shimming is
20mm.
.12
The Contractor shall provide details on stepping the pile foundation on the
Drawings for approval. The Contractor shall install steps by forming, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.13
The Contractor shall install the Noise Barrier and the landscaping in such
a way so that the piles and pile caps will not be exposed above the final
grade.
.14
The Contractor shall install the Noise Barrier in such a way so as to

maintain the existing drainage patterns, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
.15
Protection
.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any hazards

created by the construction. Cover all excavated pile shafts,
footing trenches, etc that may pose a hazard. Clearly mark and
cap dowels, and any projecting or sharp elements. Protect
concrete units from damage or adverse impacts. Clean and
restore the site as specified in the Contract Documents.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
4.1
Measurement
.1
4.2
Section 02850
Page 10 of 12
2015
Unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, Noise Barriers will be

measured in square metres of face area of wall from the original ground
profile to the design top of wall profile.
Payment
.1
Unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, Noise Barriers will be

paid by square metres on the area of wall installed from the original
ground profile to the design top of wall profile. The unit price shall be full
compensation for all labour, equipment and material required to survey
the individual piles and other survey requirements and to supply,
engineering design and construct the walls, posts, post caps, post
foundations, and connection of noise barrier to adjoining fences including
repair to any fencing that is damaged or disturbed as a result of noise
barrier installation.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
Section 02850
Page 11 of 12
2015
Table 1
Summary of MSJC Cold-Weather Masonry Construction Requirements
Ambient Temperature
Special Requirements
0 to 5C
-4 to 0C
-7 to -4C
-7C and below
Don't lay masonry units having a temperature below

-7C or with frozen moisture, ice, or snow on their
surface.
Remove visible ice and snow from foundations and
masonry by heating to melt the ice.
Don't heat water or sand above 60C.
Provide mortar between 5 and 49C by heating sand
or mixing water.
All of the above, plus:
Keep mortar temperature above freezing until it's
placed.
Heat aggregate and water to provide grout between
21 and 49C. Keep grout above 21C until it's
placed.
Heat autoclaved aerated concrete (AAC) units to 5C
before using thin-bed mortar.
Heat masonry surfaces under construction to 5C.
Provide wind break when wind speed is above 24
km/h.
Heat masonry to a minimum of 5C prior to grouting.
Provide heated enclosure at grouting locations.
Exterior wall surface must be above freezing.
* Minimum daily temperature for grouted masonry or average daily temperature for
ungrouted masonry. Average daily temperature is the average of the daily high and low
temperatures: (high + low)/2.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
NOISE BARRIERS
Section 02850
Page 12 of 12
2015
Table 2
Summary of MSJC Cold-Weather Masonry Protection Requirements
Temperature*
Special Requirements
-4 to 5C
Protect wall surface with plastic sheet for 24 hours

after construction.
-7 to -4C
Protect wall surface with insulating blanket for 24

hours after construction. Extend insulation period
to 48 hours after construction for grouted
masonry.
-7C and below
Maintain newly constructed masonry above 0C

for at least 24 hours after construction using an
acceptable heat source. Extend heating period to
48 hours after construction for grouted masonry.
* Minimum daily temperature for grouted masonry or average daily temperature for
ungrouted masonry. Average daily temperature is the average of the daily high and low
temperatures: (high + low)/2.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Section 03200
Page 1 of 8
Tender No.
1
2015
GENERAL
This Specification shall cover the supply, fabrication, and placement of uncoated, hot dip
galvanized, stainless, and epoxy coated reinforcing steel. Reinforcing bars shall be
supplied in the lengths and shapes, and shall be installed, as indicated on the Drawings
or as stipulated by reference Standards, upon consent of the Engineer. Use of epoxy
coated reinforcing is not acceptable unless approved, and requires Approval on projectspecific basis.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Work Included
.1
Plain, galvanized and stainless reinforcing steel bars for cast-in-place or

precast concrete complete with tie wire.
.2
Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports and spacers for reinforcing.
.3
Fabrication, storage, handling, placing, splicing and fastening.
Related Work
.1
.2
.3
Precast Concrete
.4
Other specifications relevant to the Project
Reference Standards
.1
Comply with the Canadian Standards requirements of CAN/CSA-S6 Canadian

Highway Bridge Design Code, CSA G30.18M, and CSA A23.1, A23.2 and A23.3
(latest editions) as applicable, except where otherwise specified.
.2
Galvanizing to ASTM A767 (latest edition) Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement, except as specified herein.
.3
ASTM A780 (latest edition) Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip
Galvanized Coatings.
.4
ASTM A143 (latest edition) Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of

Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting
Embrittlement.
.5
Epoxy Coating to ASTM A775/A775M (latest edition) Standard Specification for

Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
.6
ASTM D3963/D3963M (latest edition) Standard Specification for Fabrication and

Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
1.4
1.5
Section 03200
Page 2 of 8
2015
.7
ASTM A276 (latest edition) Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
.8
ASTM A955M (latest edition) Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
.9
ASTM A185 (latest edition) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
.10
ASTM A497M (latest edition) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for
Concrete.
.11
Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada - Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard

Practice (latest edition).
Quality Control
.1
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the quality of materials and
products provided for incorporation in the work and for the quality of the work.
The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Plan at the beginning of project.
.2
The Contractor shall perform inspections and testing necessary to ensure that
the works conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents; and shall
provide copies of such test reports for the Engineers review before proceeding
with construction. The standard tests include but are not limited to: Mill test
reports of reinforcement supplied indicating physical and chemical analysis, test
results (elongation, strength), reports from fabrication and galvanizing of
reinforcing steel, test results for bar support chairs, bolsters and spacers.
.3
Contractor shall provide copies of inspection and test reports to the subContractor, of work being performed.
.4
Work shall conform to the standards, as referenced in the Contract Documents

and in this design guideline. Any and all non-conforming work shall be replaced
and repaired at the Contractors expense at the discretion of the Engineer.
Quality Assurance
.1
The City will undertake, through an independent CSA certified testing firm,
random sampling, inspection and testing for the purpose of determining
compliance with the Specifications and other Contract Documents.
.2
The Contractor shall provide access to all portions of work, storage or loading
areas, manufacturing and fabrication plants, and cooperate with the Citys
representatives.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03200
Page 3 of 8
2015
.3
The Contractor shall allow ample time for notification, inspection, corrective work,
if required, and obtain the Engineers approval before scheduling concrete
placement.
.4
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for review by the Engineer in
accordance with the General Conditions. The shop drawings shall be legible and
of adequate quality to be reproduced and scanned. Review of shop drawings by
the Engineer shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the
responsibility for errors and omissions. The Contractor remains responsible for
the work as per its obligations under the Contract.
.5
The Contractor shall submit an original of a Certificate of Compliance from a

galvanizing applicator confirming that the hot-dip galvanizing process and the
amount and quality of coating meets or exceeds the specified requirements.
.6
The Contractor shall submit proof that applicator of epoxy coating is certified by
the manufacturer and that the application is certified under the Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Voluntary Certification Program for Fusion
Bonded Epoxy Coating Applicator Plants.
.7
Concrete reinforcement shall be inspected "in place". The Contractor shall notify
the Engineer when reinforcing installation is complete and before forms are
closed, minimum twenty-four hours in advance of any concrete placement.
.8
If, in the opinion of the Engineer any reinforcing steel provided for the concrete
works exhibit flaws in manufacture, galvanizing, epoxy coating, or field
contamination of stainless steel, such material shall be immediately removed
from the site and replaced with acceptable reinforcing steel.
.9
In case of an ambiguity whether the product, system or work conforms to the

applicable standards and Contract documents, the Engineer reserves the right to
have such product or system tested or re-inspected to ascertain conformance.
The cost of such testing will be borne by the City in the event of conformance
and by the Contractor in the event of non-conformance. Any non-conformant
work shall be rejected at the Engineers discretion, and replaced and repaired by
the Contractor at its sole expense.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Reinforcing steel shall conform to CSA G30.18:

.1
Grade 400R shall be used for plain and epoxy coated reinforcement
(without galvanized coating). Additional requirements for grade 400R as
stipulated by latest edition of CAN/CSA-S6, Clause 8.4.2.1 shall apply.
.2
Grade 400W shall be used for galvanized reinforcement.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
2.2
Section 03200
Page 4 of 8
2015
.2
Galvanized reinforcing shall also conform to ASTM A767M, Specification for

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Coating to
conform to Class II (610 g/m2). Supplementary requirement S1 shall apply.
.3
Chromating of galvanized coating may be omitted.
.4
Stainless steel reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars
and Shapes; and ASTM A955M Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement, including annexes, minimum Grade 420.
.5
Stainless steel reinforcement shall be one of the designations as defined by the

Unified Numbering System (UNS) that is on the approved product list of Alberta
Transportations latest edition of Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction,
Section 5 Reinforcing Steel. Proof of compliance with relevant test standards
such as ASTM A262, Practice E for Austenitic grades; and/or ASTM A923,
Method A for Duplex grades, shall be supplied for the appropriate steel type.
Only one type of stainless steel shall be used throughout the project.
.6
Epoxy Coated Reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A775/A775M, Standard

Specification for Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. Coating shall be
Scotchcote 213, Fusion Bonded epoxy coating, thickness 300 + 85 micrometres
as manufactured by the 3M Company or Approved equivalent.
.7
Wire mesh, if specified, shall be supplied in flat sheets only and shall conform to
ASTM A185 (latest edition) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; and ASTM A497M (latest edition) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete.
Accessory Materials
.1
Tie Wire: minimum 1.6 mm annealed type or patented system Approved by the
Engineer. Plastic coated tie wires shall be used for galvanized, stainless steel, or
epoxy coated reinforcing.
.2
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: adequately sized for strength and
support of reinforcing steel during construction. Metal chairs shall be galvanized
for galvanized reinforcing and shall conform to CSA G40.20/G40.21. Chairs and
spacers for stainless steel reinforcing shall be of stainless steel material in
conformance with ASTM A276. Precast concrete or plastic supports shall be
used for all exposed faces.
.3
Precast mortar/ concrete blocks: acceptable for support of bottom layer of bars
in slabs on grade shall have compressive strength higher than the required
compressive strength of the concrete structure designed.
.4
Masonry bricks, pebbles, metal or wood pieces are not acceptable.
.5
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: where adjacent to exposed concrete

surfaces and for epoxy coated reinforcement, shall be of plastic type.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
2.3
Section 03200
Page 5 of 8
2015
Storage and Handling

.1
All bars shall be shipped in bundles appropriately tagged and identified with lot
number, manufacturer, steel type, Grade, bar mark and designation etc. Deliver,
handle and store concrete reinforcement in a manner so as to prevent damage,
contamination with dirt or other materials and distortion
.2
Use padded bundling bands and multiple supports to prevent bar abrasion or
contamination for galvanized bars, stainless steel bars, and epoxy coated bars.
.3
Reinforcing steel shall be covered and protected at all times during transportation
and storage. Reinforcing steel of differing material types shall be strored
separately on platforms, skids or other suitable means to keep the material off
the ground surface.
.4
Store epoxy coated bars away from long term direct sunlight. Cover as required.
.5
The surface finish shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly

distributed as possible, and free from any defect detrimental to the stated end
use of the reinforcement and coated article.
.6
Coating adhesion shall withstand normal handling consistent with the nature and
normal use of reinforcing bars.
.7
Bar-to-bar abrasion and excessive sagging of bundles shall be prevented by

using spreaders and non-metallic slings.
EXECUTION
3.1
Fabrication
.1
Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with latest edition of CSA S6, CSA
A23.1 and Drawings.
.2
Galvanized coating applicator shall follow the procedures contained in the Quality
Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association. Safeguard against
hydrogen embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143.
.3
The applicator for epoxy-coating of reinforcing steel is to be certified under the

CRSI Voluntary Certification Program for Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating
Applicator Plants.
.4
Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum

stress. Obtain the Engineer's written approval of lap splice locations. Unless
otherwise noted, provide tension lap splices, Class B.
.5
All bars shall be cold bent at fabricators shop. Minimum fabrication temperature
to conform to CSA A23.1. Heating of bars to facilitate bending will not be
permitted.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03200
Page 6 of 8
2015
.6
Bars shall be cut by shearing or with fluid cooled saws. Torch cutting of bars shall
not be permitted.
.7
Fabrication of stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be so that the surface of the
stainless steel bars do not get contaminated with non-stainless steel ferrous
deposits, dirt or oil, and are not damaged by straightening or bending.
.8
Pins around which galvanized and epoxy coated reinforcing bars are bent shall
have a minimum diameter as follows:
.1
For 10M to 30M inclusive, 8 bar diameters.
.2
For 35M or greater, 10 bar diameters.
.9
Fabricate to the Drawings and to site-confirmed dimensions within the tolerances

specified in Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC) Manual of Standard
Practice (latest edition) unless specified otherwise.
.10
Reinforcing steel that is to be hot dip galvanized shall be galvanized after

fabrication.
.11
Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted without written approval of the

Engineer.
.12
All surfaces of sheared ends of bars as well as cracking and other visible
damage or deterioration of the hot-dip galvanizing as a result of handling or
installation operations, or any other causes, shall be repaired with ZINGA or
Approved equal formulation, in accordance with ASTM Specification A780M. All
field-applied galvanized coatings shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by the Engineer. Repairs to the
reinforcing bars shall be done prior to placing the bars in forms.
.13
All epoxy coated reinforcing bars are to be coated in the fabrication process with
a primer or conversion coating to improve adhesion to epoxy.
.14
Inspect epoxy coating visually for continuity after cure. Ensure coating is free
from holes, voids, contaminants, cracks and damaged areas.
.15
All sheared ends, mechanical splices, welded splices and damaged areas as a
result of handling or installation operations, or any other causes, shall be coated
with an Approved repair material.
Do not carry out repairs when the
surroundings are less than 5 degrees Celsius or when moisture is present on
bar.
.16
Allow for additional quantity of regular, stainless steel, galvanized and/or epoxy
coated reinforcing as determined in the Contract Documents.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
3.2
Section 03200
Page 7 of 8
2015
Installation
.1
Place reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA A23.1.

Conform to
recommendations of the American Galvanizers Association for installation and
inspection of galvanized reinforcing.
.2
Reinforcing steel shall be free from loose rust, scale, dirt, oil, paint or other
deleterious material. Stainless steel shall be pickled in shop to remove such
foreign material or rejected.
.3
Adequately support reinforcing and secure against displacement within the

tolerances permitted.
.4
Bars shall be tied at all intersections except when the bar spacing is less than
250 mm in each direction; alternate intersections may be tied at these locations.
.5
Splicing of bars, unless shown on plans, shall not be allowed, unless Approved
by the Engineer in writing. For lapped splices the bars shall be placed in contact
and wired together in such a manner as to maintain a clearance of not less than
the required minimum clear distance to other bars, and the required distance to
the concrete surface.
.6
Contact points between stainless steel, galvanized and black reinforcing steel
bars are to be separated by a non-conductive material such as rubberized pads,
rubber hose rings or polyethylene tape.
.7
Distances from forms shall be maintained by means of spacers, chairs or stays.

Metal chairs shall not be used to support reinforcement on surfaces which are to
be exposed or are to be finished; where possible, this reinforcement is to be
supported entirely from above. Obtain Approval of the Engineer for use of
spacers used at the exposed concrete surfaces.
.8
Preferably, spacers for separating layers of reinforcing shall be precast concrete

blocks.
.9
Any metal chairs protruding through the surface of hardened concrete, where
Approved, shall be cut back at least 25 mm and the holes filled in accordance
with Cast-in-Place Concrete Specification or High Performance Concrete
specification, as applicable, included in the Contract Documents.
.10
Provide concrete cover to steel reinforcement of thickness indicated on the

Drawings.
.11
Do not damage epoxy reinforcing steel by dropping, dragging, skidding or

supporting on abrasive materials.
Contractor to inspect epoxy coated
reinforcement before and after placing.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
3.3
Section 03200
Page 8 of 8
.12
Obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to cutting of reinforcing to

accommodate openings or embedded items. Allow for additional splice material
which may be required to reinforce these cut bars as directed by the Engineer.
.13
Use plastic-sleeved concrete vibrators while placing concrete around epoxy

coated reinforcing.
Cleaning and Repair

.1
Ensure all loose scale, loose rust and other deleterious matter from surfaces of
reinforcing is removed in a manner which is acceptable to the Engineer.
.2
Stainless steel reinforcing bars with any single area of iron contamination greater
than 100 mm, two or more areas of contamination greater than 50 mm in length,
or frequent small occurrences of contamination along the full length of the bar
shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced at the Contractors expense.
Measurement and Payment
4.1
Measurement
4.2
2015
.1
The reinforcing steel incorporated in the concrete will be measured in kilograms,

based on the total mass of bars as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise
Approved by the Engineer.
.2
Allow for additional quantity of regular, stainless steel, galvanized and/or epoxy
coated reinforcing as determined in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall keep records of the additional reinforcing used and credit the contract with
the unused balance at completion of work.
Payment
.1
Payment for reinforcing steel will be per unit rate Tendered which shall include
material supply, fabrication, required accessories, placement and all incidentals
necessary to acceptably complete the work.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
.1
This Section outlines cast-in-place concrete work including, but not limited to
concrete foundation work such as piles, grade beams, foundation walls, piers,
abutments and concrete superstructure such as decks, elevated slabs, and
diaphragms. Also included are retaining walls and coping, concrete tunnels,
track slabs, overhead signs structural bases, sidewalks and stormwater
structures.
.2
The companion Section 03301 outlines High Performance Concrete (HPC)

requirements and supersedes this section wherever noted. Where not
specifically stated in Section 03301, the provisions of this section are applicable
also to HPC.
.3
Install materials specified to be supplied under other sections of these project

specifications and in the contract drawings. Materials include but are not limited
to:
.1
1.2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Section 03300
Page 1 of 23
2015
Fabricated components, anchor bolts, bearing plates, sleeves and other

inserts to be built into concrete.
Related Work
.1
Concrete Piles
.2
Concrete Formwork and Falsework
.3
.4
Precast Concrete
.5
.6
Pre-stressed and Post-Tensioned Concrete
.7
MSE Retaining Walls
.8
Metal Fabrications [to be cast in concrete]
.9
MSE Retaining Walls
.10
.11
Other Sections specific to the Project
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
1.3
Section 03300
Page 2 of 23
2015
Reference Standards
Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the following standards, except
where specified otherwise. All standards to be latest issue at time of tender. Provide
one copy on site of the first two standards listed below.
1.4
1.5
.1
CAN/CSA-S6, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code.
.2
CAN/CSA-A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.
.3
CAN/CSA-A23.2, Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete.
.4
CAN/CSA-A283, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories.
.5
CAN/CSA-A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium.
.6
ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
.7
ASTM C494, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
.8
ASTM Standards where noted.
Supply Provisions
.1
Supply of concrete shall be governed by the provisions of CAN/CSA-A23.1

Clause 4.1.2, Annex J, Table 5, Alternative 1, except that additional requirements
as specified herein shall apply.
.2
All ingredients shall be selected on the basis of the performance parameters

included in this specification. The Contractor shall design all specified concrete
mixes and implement a program of testing as specified herein to demonstrate
that the quality of the concrete material will be achieved.
Quality Control
.1
Submit a Quality Control Plan for review before any concrete work commences.
.2
The Contractor is to maintain responsibility of coordination of forming, placing

reinforcing steel, placing other required material and placing concrete. Ensure a
full-time qualified superintendent representing the Contractor is in attendance to
inspect and check all phases of this work.
.3
The Contractor is responsible for the quality of materials and products provided
for incorporation in the work and for the quality of the work. The burden of proof
is on the Contractor for the quality of the work. The absence of quality control
documentation may result in work being deemed incomplete or deficient and may
result in corrective work, costs of which are to be borne by the Contractor.
.4
The Contractor is responsible for the concrete. Submit the proposed mix
designs, including quantities, for all concrete mix types to the Engineer for review
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 3 of 23
2015
four (4) weeks prior to their initial use. The review of the mix design does not
constitute acceptance of the final product, the requirements for which are
included elsewhere in these Specifications.
.5
The Contractor shall submit a Pour Procedure to the Engineer for review a
minimum of seven (7) days before the concrete is to be poured.
.6
The Contractor shall conduct Quality Control testing on site, including air content,
slump, and compressive strength, in accordance with the Contractors Quality
Control Plan and meeting the requirements of CSA A23.1. Testing shall be
performed by an independent CSA certified testing firm. If a concrete pump is
used, test samples shall be taken from the discharge end. All test results shall
be made available to the Engineer, upon request. All costs of this testing shall
be borne by the Contractor.
.7
Provide copies of inspection and test reports to the Sub-Contractor performing

the work.
.8
the work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.9
The Contractors Quality Control Plan shall include the frequency of tests for
slump, air content and temperature and compressive strength for each structural
element. At a minimum, the following is required, unless otherwise specified:
.1
Tests for slump, air content and temperatures shall be carried out on a
minimum of the first three (3) concrete loads until satisfactory control is
established. Satisfactory control is established when concrete from three
(3) consecutive loads is within the specified requirements as stated in
Table A without field adjustments.
.2
After satisfactory control has been established, testing shall be carried out
as per the Contractors Quality Control Plan.
.3
If testing indicates that a load does not meet the requirements, testing
shall resume on each load until satisfactory control is re-established.
.4
In addition to the above, air, slump and temperature tests shall be carried
out whenever compressive test cylinders are cast.
.10
Secure sufficient early strength test cylinders for testing of concrete to ensure
quality control and sufficient strength for application of construction loads and
stripping. Cost for all Quality Control tests are to be borne by the Contractor.
.11
The Contractor shall conduct Quality Control of temperature for mass pours to
ensure that both the gradient temperature within the concrete and the maximum
temperature in the concrete meet the specifications as per CSA A23.1.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 4 of 23
2015
.1
A mass pour is defined as any pour with minimum dimensions of 1.0 m

each direction
.2
Thermocouples are to be installed to monitor temperature for mass pours.

A plan showing location of thermocouples is to be provided to the
Engineer for review. Temperature readings are to be taken at a
minimum:
.1
Every four (4) hours for the first twelve (12) hours
.2
Every twelve (12) hours for the following 72 hours
.3
Temperature data is to be provided to the Engineer and the City for

review.
.4
Corrective action for concrete not within temperature requirements shall

be outlined in the Contractors Quality Control Plan.
.12
Submit data sheets for all proposed pre-mixed grouts to the Engineer for review.
.13
Tests of cement and aggregates will be required to ensure conformance with

requirements stated herein.
.14
Submit copies of mill certificate test reports of cement and fly ash.
.15
The Contractor is responsible to confirm that any admixture proposed is fit for the
intended purpose, that its use complies with all the manufacturers
recommendations and will be in no way detrimental to the performance (physical,
aesthetic or other) of the concrete either during pouring, compacting, curing or
throughout the design life of the structure.
.16
Submit data on all concrete accessories specified or proposed.
.17
Submit alkali aggregate reaction test results for the aggregate used in the
concrete mixes. Test results older than one (1) year shall be verified by retesting.
.18
Prior to conducting trial mixes, submit data on all specified or proposed concrete
admixtures with the mix design to the Engineer for approval. Data is to confirm
the compatibility of the water reducing admixture, the superplasticizer, the air
entraining agent, the cement; the fly ash and the silica fume where used.
.19
Where no previous history has been established, pre-construction laboratory or

field trials shall be performed to demonstrate the compatibility of admixtures with
the cementitious materials.
.20
Submit all proposed curing procedures.
.21
Submit proposed methods of protection of concrete when air temperatures are

expected to be above 25C or below 5C.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
1.6
Section 03300
Page 5 of 23
2015
.22
Submit responses to all site review reports confirming that all reported defects
and deficiency items were corrected or stating what action was taken.
.23

submitted for review by the Engineer.
Quality Assurance
.1
The City may undertake, through an independent CSA certified testing firm,
random sampling, inspection and testing for the purposes of determining the
compliance with the Specification and other Contract Documents. This shall in
no way relieve the Contractor of their requirement to carry out Quality Control.
.2
The mix design(s) shall be submitted to the testing firm for review. The testing
firm shall review the mix designs and confirm whether they are suitable for the
intended purpose and are expected to perform to the specified standards. This
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of their requirement to ensure product
performance.
.3
The City may request the testing firm to perform a quality assurance audit at the
batching plant during the concrete pours.
.4
Provide access to all portions of work, manufacture and fabrication plants, and
cooperate with the Citys representatives. The Contractor may be asked to
provide casual labour to the testing firms field personnel for the purpose of
obtaining and handling sample materials.
.5
Concrete sampling will be taken at the point of discharge to the forms.
.6
Allow ample time for notification, inspection and corrective work, if required,
before scheduling concrete placement.
.7
Notify the testing firm, Engineer, and the City minimum twenty-four (24) hours in
advance of concrete placement.
.8
The Contractor is to provide a suitable testing station in a location suitable to the

Engineer and convenient to the point of sampling. The testing station may be
required to be moved from time to time during placement.
.9
Make space available for storage and curing of test samples. The Contractor is
to provide properly designed temperature-controlled storage boxes for test
cylinders, as specified in CSA-A23.2-3C, for a period of at least twenty-four
(24) hours and further protection from adverse weather and mishandling until
removed from the site. The Contractor is to provide a max-min thermometer for
each storage box. Storage in a portable building that will be used by the
Contractors personnel or the Engineer during the first twenty-four (24) hour
storage period will not be permitted. Storage facilities are to be provided,
installed, checked and approved before any concrete may be placed.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
1.7
Section 03300
Page 6 of 23
2015
.10
In case of ambiguity whether the product, system or work conforms to the

applicable standard, the Engineer reserves the right to have such product or
system tested or re-inspected to ascertain the conformance. The cost of such
testing will be borne by the City in the event of conformance and by the
Contractor in the event of non-conformance with the Contract Documents.
.11
Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with Concrete Production
Records for the concrete used in the Work.
.12
Concrete test results shall include the following information:

.1
Name of the project.
.2
Date of sampling.
.3
Mix design, specified strength, slump and air content.
.4
Name of supplier, truck and ticket number.
.5
Time batched and time placed.
.6
Identification of sampling and testing technician.
.7
Cement type and admixtures used.
.8
Exact location in the structure of the concrete sampled.
.9
Ambient air and concrete temperatures.
.10
Nominal aggregate size.
.11
Water added and personnel authorizing additional water.
.12
Concrete density.
Acceptability
.1
Failure to comply with the requirements of these specifications will result in the
structure being considered potentially deficient.
.2
In order to conform to the concrete strength requirements of this Specification,

the results of tests performed on laboratory cured cylinders for each class of
concrete shall meet the following:
.1
.2
The average of any three consecutive tests shall be equal to, or greater
than, the specified strength.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
.3
.3
.4
.5
Section 03300
Page 7 of 23
2015
No individual strength test shall be in excess of 3.5 MPa below the

specified strength.
If any of the foregoing criteria are not met, the Engineer shall have the right to
require one or more of the following, the costs of which shall be borne by the
Contractor:
.1
Changes in the mix proportions for the remainder of the work (changes
are to be reviewed and approved by the Engineer).
.2
Additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the

failed test specimens. Testing of in-situ concrete may be requested
following the extended curing.
.3

through testing of trial mixes, that the revised mix design will produce the
specified physical properties.
.4
Additional tests that the Engineer may choose to perform to verify quality of
product are:
.1
The Engineer may order an independent testing firm to obtain cores, xrays or similar non-destructive tests where evidence points to a potentially
deficient structure.
.2
The Engineer may order a load test and/or analysis, as defined by

CSA-A23.3, if the non-destructive tests are impractical or inconclusive.
If, after the completion of the testing procedure, the Engineer is not satisfied with
the indicated quality of the concrete in the structure, the Contractor may be
required to strengthen or replace those portions which the Engineer deems to be
unsatisfactory. Alternatively, the penalty (or penalties) described in this
Specification may be assessed at the discretion of the Engineer.
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Materials are to be obtained from the same source of supply or manufacturer for
the duration of the project. All exposed concrete is to be consistent in colour.
.2
Documentation indicating the material source/supplier and compatibility of all

proposed admixtures and/or accessories in combination shall be submitted with
the mix design for review by the Engineer.
.3
Concrete shall come from concrete production facilities that have equipment in
good operating condition and with proper capability to produce quality concrete.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 8 of 23
2015
The facility shall have a valid certification from Alberta Ready Mixed Concrete
Association (ARMCA) and shall submit a copy to the Engineer for review.
2.2
2.3
Cementing Materials
.1
Portland cement: Type GU, General use cement conforming to CAN/CSAA3001.
.2
High sulphate resistant hydraulic cement: Type HS cement conforming to

CAN/CSA-A3001. Alternatively, HSb can be used. Cementing material
combinations with equivalent performance may be used. The supplier shall
provide data demonstrating that Type GU cement and fly ash blend is effective in
reducing concrete expansion due to sulphate attack in accordance with
CAN/CSA 23.1, Clause 4.2.1.2, 4.2.1.3 and 4.2.1.4. The maximum expansion
due to sulphate attack should not be greater than 0.05% at 6 months when
tested in accordance with CAN/CSA A3004-C8 test method.
.3
The cement shall not contain a total sodium oxide equivalent in excess of 0.6%
by mass, unless Approved otherwise.
Supplementary Cementing Material

.1
Fly ash is to be a Type F pozzolan to meet the requirements identified in

CSA-A3001 with the following additional requirements:
.1
2.4
Maximum CaO content
12%
Aggregates
.1
All aggregate tests are to be conducted by an approved independent third party

laboratory certified in accordance with CSA-A283 to Category II. Following
completion of all tests, the laboratory is to declare that the aggregate is fully
acceptable for the intended use and that it will provide good long term
performance. All test results and evaluations are to bear the seal of a
professional Engineer registered in the Province of Alberta.
.2
The Contractor is to submit the current results of the aggregate tests for each
source of aggregate to be used. The aggregate shall meet the requirements of
CSA A23.1, Table 12 Limits for deleterious substances and physical properties
of aggregates.
.3
Testing for organic impurities (CSA A23.2-7A should not produce results darker
than standard (Organic Plate Number 3) colour. Aggregates producing a colour
darker than the standard colour will be rejected; provisions 4.2.3.3.2(a) and (b) of
CSA-A23.1 shall not apply.
.4
Fine aggregates shall be graded to limits specified in Table 10 of CAN/CSA

A23.1 and is to conform to the requirements for the specified exposure class.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
2.5
.5
If the fine aggregate consists of a blend from more than one source, the fine
aggregate sieve analysis is to show the gradation of the blended fine aggregates.
Similarly, in the case of blended coarse aggregates, the coarse aggregate sieve
analysis is to indicate the gradation of the blended coarse aggregates.
.6
For all concrete mix types, the coarse aggregate is to conform to the
requirements identified in CSA-A23.1 for the specified exposure class. The
aggregate is to meet the Group I gradation requirements listed in Table 11 of
CSA-A23.1.
.7
Petrographic analysis of course aggregate conducted in accordance with CSA

A23.2-15A should provide Petrographic Number (PN) max. 125.
.8
Aggregates are not to react with alkalies in the cement to an extent that results in
excessive expansion or cracking of concrete. Evaluation of the potential for
alkali-aggregate reactivity and the selection of the preventative measures shall
be performed in accordance with CSA Standard Practice A23.2-27A. In the
absence of test results the aggregate shall be considered highly reactive.
.9
Aside from the potential expansivity test, the analyses of the aggregates are to
be current. Sampling and testing are to be done not more than one (1) year prior
to concrete production unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Additional
analyses of more recent sampling are to be provided periodically if so directed.
.10
All costs associated with these specified aggregate tests are to be borne by the
Contractor.
.11
The source of the aggregate and the method of manufacture or production,

including the type of equipment used, are not to be altered for the duration of the
project following the acceptance of the aggregate.
.12
Nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be as specified in Table A.
Water
.1
2.6
Section 03300
Page 9 of 23
2015
Water for use in concrete production and curing is to be clean and free from
injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, soluble chlorides, organic matter, sediment
or any other deleterious substances as per CSA-A23.1.
Admixtures
.1
Air-entraining admixtures are to conform to the requirements of ASTM C260.

The admixture is to be of uniform consistency and quality within each container
and within the delivery batches.
.2
Water-reducing admixtures are to conform to the requirements of ASTM C494;

Type A. Type D retarding water reducer shall be used only when approved by the
Consultant. The admixture is to be of uniform consistency and quality within
each container and within the delivery batches.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
2.7
Section 03300
Page 10 of 23
2015
.3
Superplasticizers (high-range water reducers) shall conform to the requirements

of ASTM C 494, Type F.
.4
Set accelerating admixtures will not be permitted.
.5
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in

concrete.
.6
No chemical substances other than specified herein shall be added to the

concrete mix or applied to the surface of concrete without Approval by the
Engineer.
Concrete Accessories
.1
If Approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of the construction,

concrete accessories (as listed below) may be used. All concrete accessories
shall be compatible with any sealers or waterproofing used.
.2
Liquid membrane-forming curing compound to conform to ASTM C309.

Preference is to have elements moist cured whenever possible to maximize
durability of concrete.
.3
Membrane Curing Compound - Sealtight 1220, white, pigmented curing

compound by Meadows or approved equal.
.4
Monomolecular Film (evaporation reducer) - Confilm by Master Builders

Technologies, or approved equal. Application in accordance with the
Manufacturers recommendations.
.5
Silane Sealer: Type 1c Penetrating Sealers for Traffic Bearing Surfaces

Products currently approved by Alberta Transportation.
.6
Pigmented Sealer: Type 3 Pigmented Sealers Products currently approved by

Alberta Transportation. Colour to be determined by the Engineer.
.7
Concrete plugs: To fit cone holes formed by compatible form ties. Colour and
texture to match surrounding concrete. Product information to be submitted for
review by Engineer before use on project.
.8
DB-2 ducts as supplied by IPEX or approved equal, complete with all required
accessories, fittings, sleeves, couplers or expansion units as required or
specified.
.9
Joint sealant: Sikaflex 1a or Approved equal.
.10
Cushioning foam: Evazote EV30 by Zotefoams Inc. of Walton Kentucky or other

pre-approved EVA (ethyl vinyl acetate) foam with compressive strength of 35 kPa
at 25% set.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
2.8
2.9
2.10
Section 03300
Page 11 of 23
2015
Crack Repair
.1
Modified Methacrylate (MMA) or High Molecular Weight-Methacrylate (HMWMA)

approved by the Engineer for horizontal cracks.
.2
Low viscosity (100 cps or less) epoxy sealer: Sikadur 55 SLV or Dural 333 or
approved equal for horizontal cracks.
.3
Epoxy for Crack Injection: Viscosity less than 500 cps, meet ASTM C881 Type
IV, Grade 1, Class B or C. Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV/ Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel Crack
Filler/ Cap Seal or approved equal for injection of non-horizontal cracks.
Concrete Patching Material

.1
Horizontal Concrete Patching Material: Type NH Normal Horizontal Products

currently approved by Alberta Transportation.
.2
Non-horizontal Concrete Patching Material: Type OH-V Overhead or Vertical

Products currently approved by Alberta Transportation.
Concrete Mixes Design and Trial Batch Testing

.1
The Contractor, through his supplier, shall undertake the concrete mix designs
and pay for all costs associated with the development, testing and submissions
of the mix designs and results of performance testing.
.2
Trial batches are required for all new mix designs. The results from the trial
batch testing are valid for up to two (2) years.
.3
All testing of the concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall
be performed by an independent, CSA certified testing firm.
.4
Submit mix designs and results of performance testing to the Engineer for
review. Mix design documentation shall include all components of the mix and
quantities of the materials used. All testing, review and consent to selection of
the concrete mix designs must be in place at least four (4) weeks prior to
concrete placement.
.5
The Contractor should note that failure to demonstrate the specified concrete
performance will result in delays for which no claims can be made against the
City.
.6
The design and quality control testing of concrete mixes shall include
assessment of compatibility of the Contractors proposed materials including
cement and admixtures, adequate workability of the mixes, as well as the slump
and air retention properties of the proposed mixtures. Test results older than two
(2) years shall be verified by re-testing.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 12 of 23
2015
.7
In lieu of trial batch testing, the Contractor may submit for review and
consideration by the Engineer, mix design, laboratory and field test results (QC
and QA) from previous works. All performance criteria of this Specification shall
apply. Test results older than two (2) years shall be verified by re-testing.
.8
Required air content retention shall be a minimum of 70% of initially measured air
content after one (1) hour of mixing.
.9
One adjustment of air on site may be allowed, provided that the adjustment is
done under the supervision of qualified personnel.
.10
Concrete mixes that will be placed by concrete pump are to be designed for
pumping.
.11
Slump retention shall be 75% after 45 minutes.
.12
Slump measured immediately prior to placing or pumping of concrete shall

conform to values specified in Table A. Only one re-dose of superplasticizer will
be allowed after batching. The Contractor shall ensure that segregation of
concrete does not occur. No segregated concrete shall be placed in the work.
.13
Addition of water to the batch is not permitted.
.14
In no case will batch adjustment relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the
durability, strength or acceptability of concrete concerned. The Engineer
reserves the right to reject any batch in case of confirmed unacceptability and to
require immediate removal of any concrete from this batch, from the work.
.15
Chloride ion penetrability shall be assessed using ASTM C-1202-97 Standard

Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concretes Ability to Resist Chloride Ion
Penetration, which shall be done on samples cast from the trial batches of
concrete at the age of twenty-eight (28) days and fifty-six (56) days. Acceptable
levels of chloride ions penetrability for concrete for mix Type B, C and E is less
than 1000 coulombs at fifty-six (56) days.
.16
The Engineer reserves the right to request additional testing to measure

tendency for cracking for concrete mixes with high cementitious content (>400
kg) or low water/cementitious ratio (<0.35).
.17
Cast-in-place concrete mix properties shall be as shown in Table A Mix

Properties:
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 13 of 23
2015
TABLE A Mix Properties

Typical
Structural
Element
Application4
Bridge: Deck,
Barrier, Curbs,
Median,
Approach Slab
Substructures1
Mix
Type
Cement
type
Max
Fly
As
(%)
Max
Coarse
Aggregate
Size
Slump
Min
(mm)
Slump
Max
(mm)
Air
Content
(%)
0.4
25
20
50
80
5-8
0.4
30
20
60
100
4-7
W/c
Max
Ratio
HPC1
Retaining walls1
and Coping1,walls
above grade1
Sidewalks ,
Overlays,
Precast LRT
platforms, MSE
Wall and Precast
Deck Panels1
Min
Strength
MPa
*Refer to Section 03301
HPC2
Precast Girders
HPC3
Concrete
Elements not in
splash zone
including
Retaining walls
and Coping,
Substructures,
Tunnel2, Track
Slab, walls above
grade
35
Abutment
Footings, walls
below grade,
Piles and pile
caps, Tunnel3
35
Slope protection1
35
GU
0.4
25
20
50
80
5-8
Other Concrete
25
GU
0.5
30
20
50
80
4-7
GU
HS or
HSb
1 In Splash Zone
2 When waterproofing membrane applied
3 Without waterproofing membrane applied
4 For specific application, refer to project drawings and specifications
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
2.11
2.12
Section 03300
Page 14 of 23
2015
Storage and Handling of Materials

.1
Cement and fly ash to be stored in a suitable weather-tight building that will
protect these materials from dampness. Cement and fly ash shall be free from
lumps at all times during use in the work. Cement and fly ash stored for a length
of time resulting in the hardening or formation of lumps not to be used in the
work.
.2
All aggregates are to be handled so as to prevent segregation and to obtain

uniformity of materials. The separated aggregates and the aggregates secured
from different sources are to be piled in separate stockpiles. The site of the
stockpiles is to be cleaned of all foreign materials and is to be reasonably level
and firm. If the aggregates are placed directly on the ground, material is not to
be removed from the stockpile within 150 mm of the ground level. This material
is to remain undisturbed to avoid contaminating the aggregate with the ground
material.
Ready Mix Concrete

.1
In case of doubt as to the consistent quality of the concrete provided or to be

provided by the proposed supplier, the Engineer may order the Contractor not to
use concrete on the work from such supplier. The Contractor shall arrange for
an acceptable concrete supply without additional compensation or extension of
time.
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
Perform cast-in-place concrete work, including fabrication, placement, finishing

and curing in accordance with requirements of CSA-A23.1 unless indicated
otherwise in the Specification, or on the drawings.
.2
The concrete for a particular structure shall be produced in the same batching
plant. If concrete is produced in a precast plant, the plant shall be certified as
required in CAN/CSA A23.1.
.3
All aggregates for concrete produced for a structure shall be supplied from the
same source.
.4
Not less than two (2) weeks prior to starting the work, submit to the Engineer for
review, a complete description of the method and equipment proposed for the
handling, placing, finishing, curing and protection of the concrete. Include the
equipment for transporting, distributing and vibrating the concrete; and complete
details for the support of such equipment. At the same time, submit a list of key
personnel who will be working on placing and finishing of the concrete, with a
brief resume of their experience. Standby plant and equipment must be available
in case of breakdown and its use shall be only subject to approval by the
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 15 of 23
2015
Engineer. The review of concrete placement plan will not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility for satisfying performance of the final product.
3.2
.5
Selection of the equipment shall be based on site-specific requirements and

constraints.
.6
See City of Calgary Specification 03301 HPC 2015 Section 3. Execution for
Bridge Deck extra requirements for bridge decks.
Placing Concrete
.1
Notify Engineer and testing firm a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours prior to
commencement of any concrete placement. Allow time for corrective work for
areas of unusual formwork and congested reinforcement.
.2
Notify geotechnical engineer to inspect and verify all soil conditions and bearing
pressures of all foundations prior to placing concrete for mud slabs or
foundations.
.3
Do not place concrete against frozen ground, frozen concrete or frosted forms.
.4
Place concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1 and as specified herein.
.5
Ensure all hardware and all other items to be cast into concrete are placed
securely and will not cause undue hardship in placing concrete.
.6
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and

contraction joints and other critical items are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
.7
Revise, re-seat and correct improperly positioned reinforcing hardware and other
embedded items immediately before concrete placement.
.8
The temperature of the concrete during discharge into the forms shall be
between 10C and 20C. The maximum temperatures during hydration shall not
exceed 60C, total temperature gradients shall not exceed that specified by
CAN/CSA-A23.1 Table 21, and temperature rise or drop shall not exceed
maximum heating/ cooling rate of 2C/ hr. Contractor shall record the concrete
temperature at two (2) different locations (at center of concrete mass and at
surface) through use of thermocouples. For larger pours, more thermocouples
may be required and a diagram is to be submitted showing all locations to be
monitored. Employ corrective measures upon identification of non-compliance to
the concrete temperature requirements as per the Contractors Quality Control
Plan.
.9
Comply with Hot/ Cold Weather concrete fabrication, placement and curing
requirements as per CSA A23.1, except as noted in these Specifications.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
3.3
Section 03300
Page 16 of 23
2015
.10
Immediately prior to placing concrete, the forms shall be thoroughly wetted down
with clean potable water. If pour is against hardened concrete, this surface
should also be wetted down.
.11
Ensure specified concrete cover around reinforcing is maintained.
.12
Do not place concrete older than ninety (90) minutes from batch time.
.13
Do not add water on site.
.14
Where concrete is placed on an inclined surface, the placing operation is to begin

at the lower end of the slope and progress upward unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer.
.15
Place concrete in accordance with the lines and levels indicated on the drawings.
.16
Place concrete in approximate horizontal layers such that each lift can be
vibrated into the previous lift.
.17
Maximum vertical free fall of concrete is not to exceed 1200 mm. Confine
concrete with a suitable vertical drop pipe to prevent segregation.
.18
Place concrete directly into its final position in forms. Do not spread concrete
with vibrators.
.19
Compact concrete thoroughly by mechanical vibrators. Ensure concrete is

worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into all areas and corners of
forms.
.20
Mechanical vibrators used in concrete placements containing epoxy-coated

reinforcement are to be rubber or plastic-tipped.
.21
Place concrete as a continuous operation, stopping only at construction joints.
.22
Allow a minimum of three (3) days between adjacent concrete placements.
.23
Maintain accurate records of concrete placement. Record date, location of

placement, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.
.24
Backfill is not to proceed against newly poured concrete until a minimum strength
of 75% of specified 28 day strength is achieved, to the level as shown on the
Contract drawings.
Curing
.1
All concrete is to receive moist curing or use an approved curing method to

prevent moisture losses.
.2
Curing period and regime are as defined in CAN/CSA-A23.1 Tables 2 and 20.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 17 of 23
2015
.3
No concreting is to be allowed until all materials required for the curing phase are
on site and ready for use.
.4
Unformed surfaces are to be cured using one of the following methods as soon
as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent marring. Unformed surfaces
may be covered with burlap or other satisfactory material and kept continuously
and thoroughly wet for the curing period.
.5
.1
Unformed surfaces may be wetted then sealed with polyethylene sheeting

at least 0.150 mm thick, to keep concrete continuously and thoroughly
moist for the curing period.
.2
Only if Approved by the Engineer, the specified membrane curing

compound or a liquid membrane forming curing compound applied at the
rate recommended by the manufacturer which will prevent the moisture
loss from being exceeded may be used. Submit test results indicating
moisture loss is not exceeded. Curing compounds are not to be used on
a surface where bond is required for additional concrete or on surfaces
that are to receive sealers incompatible with the curing compound.
.3
Alternate A for curing unformed surfaces. Wet cure the unformed

concrete surfaces for minimum twenty-four (24) hours, then apply the
specified membrane curing compound to the wet cured surfaces within
two hours of discontinuing wet curing. Concrete surfaces are to be in a
saturated surface dry condition at application.
.4
Alternate B for curing unformed surfaces. Immediately after finishing

apply the specified monomolecular film to the unformed concrete
surfaces. Wait one (1) hour, then apply the specified membrane curing
compound within three (3) hours of applying the monomolecular film.
Formed surfaces to be cured using one of the following methods. Methods to be

submitted and approved by the Engineer.
.1
Formed surfaces may be protected by watertight formwork left in place for

the curing period.
.2
Formed surfaces may be stripped after the concrete has attained

sufficient strength (minimum of twenty-four (24) hours). Apply continual
moist curing to formed concrete surfaces within two (2) hours of breaking
forms away from the concrete surfaces and keep continuously and
thoroughly wet for the curing period.
.3
Only if Approved by the Engineer, the specified membrane forming curing

compound applied at the rate recommended by the manufacturer which
will prevent the specified moisture loss from being exceeded may be
used. Submit test results indicating moisture loss is not exceeded.
Curing compounds are not to be used on a surface where bond is
required for additional concrete or on surfaces that are to receive sealers
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 18 of 23
2015
incompatible with the curing compound. The formwork is to be left in

place for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours, and the curing compound
shall be applied within two (2) hours of formwork removal.
3.4
.6
Curing of deck slabs, approach spans and barriers shall be carried out as
specified in Section 03301.
.7
Membrane curing compounds:

.1
Apply the specified membrane curing compound at a rate specified by the

Manufacturer. Apply the total rate in two (2) passes in perpendicular
directions by spray or roller method.
.2
Where membrane curing compound is used on surfaces to receive

sealers, topping, hardener or other type of bonded finish, completely
remove the membrane curing compound by waterblast or sandblast
methods.
.3
Where silane sealer is specified, provide a waterblast to break-up the

membrane curing compound sufficiently to ensure that the silane sealer is
absorbed into the concrete surface.
.8
During hot weather, begin curing process immediately after finishing.
.9
During cold weather, adequate care should be taken to prevent any heating and
hoarding efforts from drying out the concrete.
Surfacing and Finishing

.1
Refer to Section 03301 for deck finishing and curing.
.2
Form-tie or other accessory recesses should be cleaned and filled with nonshrink grout or other approved material. No concrete accessories shall be left in
place unless Approved. All Approved accessories left in place shall have
Approved corrosion protection and concrete covers as specified in CSA/CAN-S6.
.3
Surface finishes are to be classified as follows (see drawings for extent of

finishes):
.1
Class 1: Ordinary surface finish.
.2
Class 2: Rubbed finish
.3
Class 3: Floated surface finish
.4
Class 4: Trowel finish
.5
Class 5: Broomed finish
.6
Class 6: Floated Surface Finish, Surface Textured
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 19 of 23
2015
.4
All formed surfaces are to receive as a minimum a Class 1 finish. Other finishes
are to be as shown on the drawings or as indicated in the specifications.
.5
Class 1 - Ordinary surface finish:
.6
.7
.1
Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular

projections are to be removed from all surfaces except from those that
are not to be exposed. On all surfaces, the cavities produced by form ties
and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other
defects are to be thoroughly cleaned, and after having been kept
saturated with water for a period of not less than three hours, it is to be
carefully pointed and trued with mortar of cement and fine aggregate
mixed in the portions used in the grade of concrete being finished. Mortar
used in pointing is not to be more than one hour old. The mortar patches
are to be cured as specified under Curing. All construction and
expansion joints in the completed work are to be left carefully tooled and
free from all mortar and concrete. The joint filler is to be left exposed for
its full length and with clean and true edges.
.2
The resulting surfaces are to be true and uniform. All surfaces that
cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer are to be rubbed as
specified for Class 2 - Rubbed Finish.
Class 2 - Rubbed finish: Required for any surface that is to receive a concrete
sealer.
.1
After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete is to be started as soon as

conditions permit. Immediately before starting this work, the concrete is
to be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three
hours. Sufficient time is to have elapsed before the wetting down to allow
the mortar used in pointing of defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be
finished are to be rubbed with a medium coarse carborundum stone using
a small amount of mortar on its face. The mortar used is to be composed
of cement and fine sand mixed in the proportion used in the concrete
being finished. Rubbing is to be continued until all of the form marks,
projections and irregularities have been removed, all voids have been
filled and a uniform surface has been obtained. The paste produced by
this rubbing is to be left in place at this time.
.2
After all concrete above the surfaces being treated has been cast, the
final finish is to be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and
water. This rubbing is to be continued until the entire surface is of a
smooth texture and uniform colour.
.3
After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it is to be
rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and left free from all unsound
patches, paste powder and objectionable marks.
Class 3 - Floated surface finish: Required for all unexposed top surfaces.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
.8
.9
.10
Section 03300
Page 20 of 23
2015
.1
After the concrete has been compacted, the surface is to be carefully

rodded and struck off with a strike board to conform to the cross-section
and grade shown on the drawings. Proper allowance is to be made for
camber if required. The strike board may be operated longitudinally or
transversely and is to be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and
transverse motion, the manipulation being such that neither end is raised
from the side forms during the process. A slight excess of concrete is to
be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times.
.2
After striking off and consolidating, the surface is to be made uniform by

longitudinal or transverse floating or both.
.3
After floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but
while the concrete is still plastic, the surface is to be tested for trueness
with a straight edge. Any depression found is to be immediately filled with
fresh mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. High areas
are to be cut down and refinished. The final surface is to conform to the
required grade and contour such that the deviation is not greater than
6 mm under a 3 m straight edge.
Class 4 - Trowel finish: Required for all exposed top surfaces that are not to
receive a broomed finish, including concrete gutters.
.1
After the concrete has been deposited in place, it is to be compacted and

the surface struck off by means of a strike board. The surface is to be
made uniform, dense and free from voids by wood trowel floating. When
the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface is not to vary by more
than 3 mm under a 3 m straight edge.
.2
It is then to be trowelled to a smooth, dense finish using a steel trowel.
Class 5 - Broomed finish: Required for sidewalk surfaces and approach slabs.
.1

.2
When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface is to be given a

broomed finish. The strokes of the broom are to be square across the
slab with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped so as to produce regular
corrugations not over 3 mm in depth.
.3
Sidewalk surfaces are to be laid out in blocks with an approved grooving

tool as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. An edging
tool is to be used along all edges of the sidewalks.
Class 6 Floated Surface Finish, Surface Textured:
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
3.5
3.6
Section 03300
Page 21 of 23
2015
.1
After the concrete has been consolidated, the surface shall be carefully
screeded to the cross section and profile shown on the drawings. When
the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be finished with a
broom of an approved type. The broom strokes shall be perpendicular to
the edge of the unit, and extended from edge to edge, with adjacent
strokes slightly overlapped producing corrugations of 2 to 3 mm in depth.
Brooming shall be done when the concrete has set sufficiently to produce
clear, crisp brooming marks which do not sag or slump, without tearing
the surface or disturbing coarse aggregate particles. After final brooming,
the surface finish shall be free of porous spots, irregularities, depressions,
pockets and rough spots and must not vary more than 5 mm when
measured using a 3 m straight edge.
.2
Where specified, approved grooving and edging tools shall be used on all
edges and expansion joints after brooming.
Defective Concrete
.1
Immediately after removing forms, all concrete surfaces are to be inspected, and
any imperfect joints, voids, stone pockets or other defective areas as specified
are to be reported to the Engineer at once and repaired before the concrete is
thoroughly dry. Defective areas are to be chipped away to a depth of not less
than 25 mm with the edges perpendicular to the surface. The area to be repaired
and a space at least 150 mm wide entirely surrounding it is to be wetted to a
saturated surface dry condition to prevent absorption of water from the repair
material.
.2
The repair is to be made of the same material and of the same proportions as
used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate is to be omitted and
cement added to match the colour of the surrounding concrete. The amount of
mixing water is to be as little as consistent with the requirements for handling and
placing. The mortar is to be re-tempered without the addition of water by
allowing it to stand for a period of one (1) hour, during which time it is to be mixed
with a trowel to prevent setting.
.3
The repair material is to be thoroughly compacted into place and screeded off to
leave the repair slightly higher than the surrounding surface. It is then to be left
undisturbed for a period of one (1) to two (2) hours to permit initial shrinkage
before being finally finished. The repair is then to be finished to match the
adjoining surface and cured to the requirements noted in this specification.
.4
Report any shapes and lines outside the specified tolerances and repair or
correct as directed by the Engineer.
Carbon Monoxide Equipment

.1
Do not place concrete for slabs if carbon monoxide producing equipment has
been in operation in the temporary enclosure during the twelve (12) hours
preceding the start of concreting.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
3.7
.2
Provide positive ventilation during the twelve (12) hours preceding the start of
concrete placement.
.3
Unless directly used for the concrete placing, do not operate carbon monoxide
producing equipment in the temporary enclosure during or within twenty-four (24)
hours after completing the finishing of any slab section.
Crack Repair
.1
Where a measured crack width in the concrete member exceeds 0.3 mm, a crack
repair procedure outlining products, repair methods and curing shall be submitted
for approval before repair work proceeds.
4.1
Measurement
.1
4.2
When required, measurement of CIP Concrete will be by cubic meter based on

neat structure measurements.
Payment
.1
4.3
Section 03300
Page 22 of 23
2015
Payment for the work of this section shall be on a unit price basis per cubic meter
(based on amount placed within neat lines of structure) and will include all costs
associated with mix designs, batch testing, evaluations, supply, delivery,
placement, finishing, curing, protection and formwork.
Pay Adjustments
.1
Pay adjustments will be made for non-conformance to the specified strength and
durability characteristics. When structural considerations do not govern, strength
and durability penalties apply independently resulting in multiple penalties if the
concrete is deficient in more than one consideration.
.2
The volume of concrete used to adjust the contract amount will be based on
whole truckloads of concrete and will include all truckloads placed after a
complying load up to and including the non-complying load for any one test.
.3
Low Compressive Strength

.1
When structural and durability considerations do not govern, but concrete

fails to meet contractual obligations of strength, the penalty may be
assessed at the discretion of the Engineer, in accordance with Table B:
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.
Section 03300
Page 23 of 23
2015
TABLE B: Payment Adjustment for Low Strength Concrete

3.5 MPa to 4.5 MPa below specified
$120.00/m3
deduction
> 4.5 MPa below specified
.4
$180.00/m3
deduction or remove
and replace.
Low Air Content

.1
When the air content is tested with the prescribed procedure and falls
outside the specified limits, a durability penalty will be assessed in
accordance with Table C:
Table C: Payment Adjustment for Air Entrainment1

Outside the specified range to a maximum of $120.00/m3 deduction
1%
> 1% outside specified range
$180.00/m3 deduction or
remove and replace.
1Plastic concrete air content may be verified by air void characteristics determined on hardened concrete, subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The cost of the verification testing shall be borne by the Contractor
.5
complying load up to and including the non-complying load.
.6
No pay adjustment will be made on the basis of cracking. However, the

Contractor shall repair all cracks greater than 0.30 mm in accordance with this
specification, regardless of the nature of their cause.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 1 of 34
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
2015
.1
This Section outlines the requirements for all High Performance Concrete (HPC)
for use in various elements of bridge and other concrete structures.
.2
High Performance Concrete (HPC) specified in this document shall meet a

combination of performance, and uniformity requirements that are more stringent
than those for normal structural concrete. Some of these performance
characteristics are:
.1
Durability (longer service life)
.2
Dimensional stability
.3
Ease of placement without affecting strength
.4
Early age strength
.5
Load carrying capacity
The above characteristics shall be obtained by using a specified watercementitious material ratio (w/cm), supplementing cementitious component with
silica fume and other pozzolans, enhanced concrete mixing and placing
procedures, and diligent curing procedures.
.3
The performance characteristics will be measured by conformance to the Plastic

Concrete Properties, Hardened Concrete Properties and Durability Properties.
.4
High Performance Concrete shall be used for structure components exposed to

the severe field conditions such as temperature fluctuations, cycles of freezing
and thawing, presence of de-icing chemicals and heavy traffic loading.
Typically the elements cast with HPC shall include the following structure
components:
.1
Bridge decks supported by concrete or steel girders.
.2
Top portion of cast-in-place superstructure.
.3
Sidewalks, traffic barriers, medians and curbs within the bridge decks.
.4
Pre-cast girders.
.5
Pre-cast light rail transit (LRT) platform planks.
.6
Bridge substructure, earth retaining structures and exposed elements of

structural foundations within the traffic splash zone.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 2 of 34
1.2
1.3
2015
.5
Specific elements to be constructed using HPC are as indicated in the Contract

Documents for the specific project.
.6
This Specification incorporates requirements pertinent to concrete exposure

Class C-XL, as defined in the CSA Standard A23.1 Concrete Materials and
Methods of Concrete Construction. Those elements of concrete construction not
specifically addressed in this Section shall conform to other Sections of the
Specifications, Reference Standards and Drawings included in the Contract
Documents.
Related Work
.1
.2
.3
.4
Precast Concrete
.5
Pre-stressed and Post-Tensioned Concrete
.6
Metal Fabrications (to be cast in concrete)
.7
MSE Retaining Walls
.8
Other Sections specific to the Project.
Reference Standards
All standards are to be latest issue at time of tender. Provide one copy onsite of the first
two standards listed below.
1.4
.1
CAN/CSA-S6, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
.2
CAN/CSA-A23.1 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction
.3
CAN/CSA-A23.2 Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete
.4
CAN/CSA-A 3000 Cementitious Materials Compendium
.5
CAN/CSA-A 283 Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories
.6
ASTM Standards where noted.
Supply Provisions
.1
Supply of concrete shall be governed by the provisions of CAN/CSA-A23.1

Clause 4.1.2, Annex J, Table 5, Alternative 1, except that additional requirements
as specified herein shall apply.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 3 of 34
.2
1.5
2015
All ingredients shall be selected on the basis of the performance parameters

included in this specification. The Contractor shall design all specified concrete
mixes and implement a program of testing as specified herein to demonstrate
that the long-term durability of the concrete material will be achieved.
Quality Control
.1
Submit a Quality Control Plan for review before any concrete work commences.
.2
The Contractor shall maintain responsibility for coordination of forming, placing

reinforcing steel, placing other required materials, accessories and placing
concrete. Ensure a full-time qualified superintendent representing the Contractor
is in attendance to inspect and check all phases of this work.
.3
for incorporation in the work and for the quality of the work. The burden of proof
is on the Contractor for the quality of the work. The absence of quality control
documentation may result in work being deemed incomplete or deficient and may
result in corrective work, costs of which are to be borne by the Contractor.
.4
The Contractor is responsible for the concrete. Submit copies of mix design to
the Engineer four (4) weeks prior to their initial use for review. The review of the
mix design does not constitute acceptance of the final product, the requirements
for which are included elsewhere in these Specifications.
.5
The Contractor shall submit a Pour Procedure to the Engineer for review a
minimum of seven (7) days before the concrete is to be poured.
.6
The Contractor shall conduct Quality Control testing on site, including air content,
slump, and compressive strength, with the frequency of testing as per the
Contractors Quality Control Plan and meeting the requirements of CSA A23.1.
Testing shall be performed by a CSA certified testing firm. If a concrete pump is
used, test samples shall be taken from the discharge end. All test results shall
be made available to the Engineer, upon request. All costs of this testing shall
be borne by the Contractor.
.7
Provide copies of inspection and test reports to the Sub-Contractor performing

the work.
.8
the works conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.9
The Contractors Quality Control Plan shall include the frequency of tests for
slump, air content and temperature and compressive strength for each structural
element. At a minimum, testing frequency shall be as follows, unless otherwise
specified:
.1
Tests for slump, air content and temperature shall be carried out on a
minimum of the first three (3) concrete loads until satisfactory control is
established. Satisfactory control is established when concrete from 3
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 4 of 34
2015
consecutive loads are within the specified requirements without field

adjustments, as defined in Table A.
.2
After satisfactory control has been established, testing shall be carried out
as defined in the Contractors Quality Control Plan.
.3
If testing indicates that a load does not meet the requirements, testing
shall resume on each load until satisfactory control is re-established.
.4
In addition to the above, air, slump and temperature tests shall be carried
out whenever compressive test cylinders are cast.
.10
Secure sufficient early strength test cylinders for testing of concrete to ensure
quality control and sufficient strength for application of construction loads and
stripping. Cost for all Quality Control tests are to be borne by the Contractor.
.11
The Contractor shall conduct Quality Control of temperature for mass pours to
ensure that both the gradient temperature within the concrete and the maximum
temperature in the concrete meet the specifications as per CSA A23.1.
.1
A mass pour is defined as any pour with minimum dimensions of 1.0 m in

each direction.
.2
For bridge decks, the Contractor shall record the concrete temperature at
two different locations per each 150 m2 to 200m2 of deck surface. A plan
showing location of thermocouples shall be provided to the Engineer for
review.
.3
Thermocouples shall be installed to monitor temperature for mass pours.

Temperature readings are to be taken at a minimum:
.1
Every four (4) hours for the first 12 hours
.2
Every twelve (12) hours for the following 72 hours
.4
Temperature data shall be provided to the Engineer and the City for
review.
.5
Corrective measures for non-compliant concrete temperatures shall be

outlined in the Contractors Quality Control Plan.
.12
Submit data sheets for all proposed pre-mixed grouts to the Engineer for review.
.13
Tests of cement and aggregates will be required to ensure conformance with

requirements stated herein.
.14
Submit copies of mill certificate test reports of cement and fly ash.
.15
The Contractor is responsible to confirm that any admixture proposed is fit for the
intended purpose, that its use complies with all the manufacturers
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 5 of 34
2015
recommendations and will be in no way detrimental to the performance (physical,

aesthetic or other) of the concrete either during pouring, compacting, curing or
throughout the design life of the structure.
1.6
.16
Submit data on all concrete accessories specified or proposed.
.17
Submit alkali aggregate reaction test results for the aggregate used in the
concrete mixes. Test results older than one (1) year shall be verified by retesting.
.18
Prior to conducting trial mixes, submit data on all specified or proposed concrete
admixtures with the mix design to the Engineer for approval. Data is to confirm
the compatibility of the water reducing admixture, the superplasticizer, the air
entraining agent, the cement; the fly ash and the silica fume where used.
.19
Where no previous history has been established, pre-construction laboratory or

field trials shall be performed to demonstrate the compatibility of admixtures with
the cementitious materials.
.20
Submit all proposed curing procedures.
.21
Submit proposed methods of protection of concrete when air temperatures are

expected to be above 25C or below 5C.
.22
Submit responses to all site review reports confirming that all reported defects
and deficiency items were corrected or stating what action was taken.
.23

submitted for review by the Engineer.
Quality Assurance
.1
Cast-in-place concrete to conform to CSA-A23.1 and as modified by the Contract

Documents.
.2
The City may undertake, through an independent CSA certified testing firm,
random sampling, inspection and testing for the purpose of determining the
compliance with the Specifications and other Contract Documents. This shall in
no way relieve the Contractor of their requirement to carry out Quality Control.
.3
The mix design(s) shall be submitted to the testing firm for review. The testing
firm shall review the mix designs and confirm whether they are suitable for the
intended purpose and are expected to perform to the specified standards. This
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of their requirement to ensure product
performance.
.4
The City may request the testing firm to perform a quality assurance audit at the
batching plant during the concrete pours.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 6 of 34
2015
.5
Provide access to all portions of work, manufacture and fabrication plants, and
cooperate with Citys representatives. The Contractor may be asked to provide
casual labour to the testing firms field personnel for the purpose of obtaining and
handling sample materials.
.6
Concrete sampling will be taken at the point of discharge to the forms.
.7
Allow ample time for notification, inspection and corrective work, if required,
before scheduling concrete placement.
.8
Notify the Engineer and the testing firm a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in
advance of concrete placement.
.9
The Contractor is to provide a suitable testing station in a location suitable to the

Engineer and convenient to the point of sampling. The testing station may be
required to be moved from time to time during placement.
.10
Make space available for storage and curing of test samples. The Contractor is
to provide properly designed temperature-controlled storage boxes for test
cylinders, as specified in CSA-A23.2-3C, for a period of at least twenty-four
(24) hours and further protection from adverse weather and mishandling until
removed from the site. The Contractor is to provide a max-min thermometer for
each storage box. Storage in a portable building that will be used by the
Contractors personnel or the Engineer during the first twenty-four (24) hour
storage period will not be permitted. Storage facilities are to be provided,
installed, checked and approved before any concrete may be placed.
.11
In case of the ambiguity whether the product, system or work conforms to the
.12
Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with Concrete Production
Records for the concrete used in the Work.
.13
Concrete test results shall include the following information:

.1
Name of the project
.2
Date of sampling.
.3
Mix design, specified strength, slump and air content.
.4
Name of supplier, truck and ticket number
.5
Time batched and time placed.
.6
Identification of sampling and testing technician
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 7 of 34
1.7
.7
Cement type and admixtures used.
.8
Exact location in the structure of the concrete sampled.
.9
Ambient air and concrete temperatures
.10
Nominal aggregate size
.11
Water added and personnel authorizing additional water.
.12
Concrete density
2015
Durability Requirements
.1
Requirements for concrete mix proportions and Plastic Concrete Properties are
summarized in Table A. Submit detailed mix designs for all concrete mixes used
on the project and include quantities of all products, components, admixtures and
their proportions for review.
.2
The air content shall be within the range specified for the class of HPC (see
Table A). The hardened concrete shall have average air void spacing factor per
lot of no more than 250 m with no individual test result greater than 300 m as
determined in accordance with ASTM C 457. The air void system will be verified
at the discretion of the Engineer.
The spacing factor may depart from these requirements, if its durability factor
after 300 rapid freezing and thawing cycles performed in conformance with
procedure A of ASTM C 666 is higher than 90%.
Plastic mix air content and the air void system in the hardened concrete shall
conform to this Specification regardless of the method of concrete placement.
Pumped concrete shall be designed to retain required properties at the point of
discharge to the forms.
.3
Rapid chloride permeability of concrete at 28-32 days determined in accordance

with ASTM C1202 shall conform to limits specified in Table B. The Engineer may
accept results of verification test performed on cores retrieved from the hardened
concrete. Coring of in-situ concrete may be done only upon the approval by the
Engineer.
.4
Salt scaling potential shall be verified using the attached modified version of
ASTM C-672. Test samples shall be cast from the trial batch mixes and cured
for a minimum of 14 days. The test surface shall be the unfinished/formed bottom
face of the test slabs.
The surface mass loss during 30 cycles of
freezing/thawing shall be less than 0.4 kg/m2 for the mix to be considered
acceptable for salt scaling.
.5
The required concrete cover to reinforcement shall be within the limits and
tolerances specified in the Contract Documents.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 8 of 34
.6
2015
The success and effectiveness of HPC depends not only on material property
requirements specified herein, but also on an effective quality control program,
and good workmanship in manufacturing, placing and curing the concrete. The
Engineers approval of the Contractors procedure for concrete placement and
curing procedures is required.
Curing shall conform to the requirements spelled out elsewhere in these
Specifications. Submit a detailed procedure for curing of concrete including, but
not limited to:
.7
1.8
.1
Protection against moisture loss due to temperature and wind.
.2
Equipment and materials used.
.3
Detailed schedule of concrete placement, curing, formwork removal and

temperature maintenance.
Concrete in place will be evaluated based on the observed tendency for the
concrete to crack at 28 days against a measurable expected tolerance. Crack
widths greater than 0.3 mm shall be repaired. Crack width measurements will be
used to determine the necessity of implementing the method of Crack Repair
specified in Section 3.8.
Acceptability
.1
.2
In order to conform to the concrete strength requirements of this Specification,

the results of tests performed on laboratory cured cylinders for each type of
concrete shall meet the following:
.3
.1
.2
The average of any three consecutive tests shall be equal to, or greater
than, the specified strength.
.3
No individual strength test shall be in excess of 3.5 MPa below the

specified strength.
If any of the foregoing criteria are not met, the Engineer shall have the right to
require one or more of the following, the costs of which shall be borne by the
Contractor:
.1
Changes in the mix proportions for the remainder of the work (changes
are to be reviewed and approved by the Engineer).
.2
Additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the

failed test specimens. Testing of in-situ concrete may be requested
following the extended curing.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 9 of 34
.4
.5
.3

through testing of trial mixes, that the revised mix design will produce the
specified physical properties.
.4
Additional tests that the Engineer may choose to perform to verify quality of
product are:
.1
The Engineer may order an independent testing firm to obtain cores, xrays or similar non-destructive tests where evidence points to a potentially
deficient structure.
.2
The Engineer may order a load test and/or analysis, as defined by

CSA-A23.3, if the non-destructive tests are impractical or inconclusive.
If, after the completion of the testing procedure, the Engineer is not satisfied with
the indicated quality of the concrete in the structure, the Contractor may be
required to strengthen or replace those portions which the Engineer deems to be
unsatisfactory.
Alternatively, the penalty (or penalties) described in this
Specification may be assessed at the discretion of the Engineer.
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
2.2
2015
.1
Materials are to be obtained from the same source of supply or manufacturer for
the duration of the project. All exposed concrete is to be consistent in colour.
.2
Documentation indicating the material source/supplier and compatibility of all

proposed admixtures and/or accessories in combination shall be submitted with
the mix design for review by the Engineer.
.3
Concrete shall come from concrete production facilities that have equipment in
good operating condition and with proper capability to produce quality concrete.
The facility shall have a valid certificate from Alberta Ready Mixed Concrete
Association (ARMCA) and shall submit a copy to the Engineer for review.
Cementing Materials
.1
Cement: Type GU, General use cement conforming to CAN/CSA-A3001
.2
Silica Fume Type SF conforming to CAN/CSA-A3001 (see Table A).
.3
Portland silica fume blended cement: Type GU-10SF, conforming to CAN/CSAA3001.
.4
The cement shall not contain a total sodium oxide equivalent in excess of 0.6%
by mass, unless Approved otherwise.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 10 of 34
2.3
2.4
2015
.5
Type MH Moderate heat of hydration cement may be specified, upon prior

Approval by the City, where size of the concrete elements requires restrictions
relative to heat of hydration
.6
Type HE High early-strength cement shall not be used in place of Type GU

cement.
Supplementary Cementing Materials

.1
Silica fume shall meet the requirements for Type SF supplementary cementing
material as specified in CAN/CSA-A3001.
.2
Fly ash shall be Type F pozzolan and shall conform to CAN/CSA-A3001, with the
following exception:
.3
Calcium oxide content of type Cl fly ash shall not exceed 12%.
.4
The use of fly ash to reduce minimum cement contents below Table A limits is
not permitted.
Aggregates
.1
All aggregate tests are to be conducted by an approved independent third party

laboratory certified in accordance with CSA-A283 to Category II. Following
completion of all tests, the laboratory is to declare that the aggregate is fully
acceptable for the intended use and that it will provide good long term
performance. All test results and evaluations are to bear the seal of a
professional engineer registered in the Province of Alberta.
.2
The contractor is to submit the current results of the aggregate tests for each
source of aggregate to be used. The aggregate shall meet the requirements of
CSA A23.1, Table 12 Limits for deleterious substances and physical properties
of aggregates.
.3
Testing for organic impurities (CSA A23.2-7A should not produce results darker
than standard (Organic Plate Number 3) colour. Aggregates not complying with
the above requirement shall be rejected; provisions 4.2.3.3.3.2(a) and (b) of CSA
A23.1 shall not apply.
.4
Fine aggregate shall be graded to limits specified in Table 10 of CAN/CSA A23.1

and is to conform to the requirements for the specified exposure class.
.5
If the fine aggregate consists of a blend from more than one source, the fine
aggregate sieve analysis is to show the gradation of the blended fine aggregates.
Similarly, in the case of blended coarse aggregates, the coarse aggregate sieve
analysis is to indicate the gradation of the blended coarse aggregates.
.6
For all concrete mix types, the coarse aggregate is to conform to the
requirements of CSA-A23.1 for the relevant exposure class. The aggregate shall
conform to Group I grading requirements included in Table 11 of CSA-A23.1.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 11 of 34
2.5
.7
Petrographic analysis of coarse aggregate conducted in accordance with CSA

A23.2-15A should provide Petrographic Number (PN) max.125.
.8
Aggregates shall not react with alkalis contained within concrete to an extent
resulting in significant expansion or cracking of concrete. Evaluation of the
potential for alkali-aggregate reactivity and the selection of the preventive
measures shall be performed in accordance with CSA Standard Practice A23.227A. In the absence of test results of concrete expansion in accordance with
CSA A23.4-14A the aggregate should be considered highly reactive.
.9
Aside from the potential expansivity test, the analyses of the aggregates are to
be current. Sampling and testing are to be done not more than one (1) year prior
to concrete production unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Additional
analyses of more recent sampling are to be provided periodically if so directed.
.10
All costs associated with these specified aggregate tests are to be borne by the
Contractor.
.11
The source of aggregate and the method of manufacture or production, including

type of equipment used shall not be altered for the duration of the project.
.12
Nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be as specified in Table A.
Water
.1
2.6
2015
Water for use in production of concrete, surface cleaning, saturation and curing
shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter,
soluble chlorides, sediment or other deleterious matter as per CSA-A23.1.
Admixtures
.1
Air entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C260. The
admixture shall be of uniform consistency and quality within each container and
within the delivery batches.
.2
Water reducing admixtures are to conform to the requirements of ASTM C494,

Type A. The use of Type D retarding water reducer shall be approved by the
Engineer. The admixture shall be of uniform consistency and quality within each
container and within the delivery batches.
.3
Superplasticizers (high-range water reducers) shall conform to the requirements

of ASTM C 494, Type F.
.4
Set accelerating admixtures are not permitted.
.5
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in

concrete.
.6
No chemical substances other than specified herein shall be added to concrete

mix or applied to the surface of concrete without Approval by the Engineer.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 12 of 34
2.7
2.8
2015
Concrete Accessories
.1
If Approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of the construction,

concrete accessories (as listed below) may be used.
.2
Use of curing compound in lieu of wet curing is not permitted, unless Approved.
.3
All concrete accessories shall be compatible with any sealers or waterproofing

membrane used.
.4
Liquid membrane-forming curing compound to conform to ASTM C309.
.5
Membrane curing compound:

Sealtight 1220, white, pigmented curing
compound by Meadows or approved equal.
.6
Molecular Film: (evaporation reducer): Confilm by Master Builders, or approved

equal. Application shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers
recommendations.
.7
Silane Sealer: Type 1c Penetrating Sealers for Traffic Bearing Surfaces Products currently approved by Alberta Transportation.
.8
Pigmented Sealer: Type 3 Pigmented Sealers Products currently approved by

Alberta Transportation. Color to be determined by the Engineer.
.9
Where Fibres are specified: 50mm Xorex steel fibres or approved equal at 60
kg/m3, unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.
.10
All steel accessories shall be corrosion-protected using methods Approved by

the Engineer. Dissimilar metals shall be separated by Approved methods.
.11
Concrete plugs: To fit cone holes formed by compatible form ties. Colour and
texture to match surrounding concrete. Product information to be submitted for
review by Engineer before use on project.
.12
DB-2 ducts as supplied by IPEX or approved equal, complete with all required
accessories, fittings, sleeves, couplers or expansion units as required or
specified.
.13
Joint sealant: Sikaflex 1a or Approved equal.
.14
Cushioning foam: Evazote EV30 by Zotefoams Inc. of Walton Kentucky or other

pre-approved EVA (ethyl vinyl acetate) foam with compressive strength of 35 kPa
at 25% set.
Crack Repair
.1
Modified Methacrylate (MMA) or High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWMA)

approved by the Engineer for horizontal cracks.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 13 of 34
2.9
2.10
2015
.2
Low viscosity (100 cps or less) epoxy sealer: Sikadur 55 SLV or Dural, 333 or
approved equal for horizontal cracks.
.3
Epoxy injection: Viscosity less than 500 cps, meet ASTM C881 Type IV, Grade 1,
Class B or C. Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV / Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel Crack Filler/Cap
Seal or approved equal for injection of non-horizontal cracks.
Patching Material
.1
Horizontal Concrete Patching Material: Type NH Normal Horizontal - Products

currently approved by Alberta Transportation.
.2
Non-horizontal Concrete Patching Material: Type OH-V Overhead or Vertical Products currently approved by Alberta Transportation.
Concrete Mixes Design and Trial Batch Testing

.1
The Contractor, through his supplier, shall undertake the concrete mix designs
and pay for all costs associated with the development, testing and submissions
of the mix designs and results of performance testing.
.2
Trial batches are required for all new mix designs. The results from the trial
batch testing are valid for up to two (2) years.
.3
All testing of the concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall
be performed by an independent, CSA certified testing firm.
.4
Submit mix designs and results of performance testing to the Engineer for
review. Mix design documentation shall include all components of the mix and
quantities of the materials used. All testing, review and consent to selection of
the HPC mix designs must be in place at least four (4) weeks prior to concrete
placement.
.5
The Contractor should note that failure to demonstrate the specified concrete
performance will result in delays for which no claims can be made against the
City.
.6
The design and quality control testing of concrete mixes shall include
assessment of compatibility of the Contractors proposed materials including
cement and admixtures, adequate workability of the mixes, as well as the slump
and air retention properties of the proposed mixtures. Test results older than 2
year shall be verified by re-testing.
.7
In lieu of the trial batch testing, the Contractor may submit for review and
consideration by the Engineer, mix design, laboratory and field test results (Q/C
and Q/A), and in-situ tendency to crack forming assessment from previous
works. All performance criteria of this Specification shall apply. Test results older
than two (2) years shall be verified by re-testing.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 14 of 34
2015
.8
Required air content retention shall be a minimum of 70% of initially measured air
content after one (1) hour of mixing.
.9
One adjustment of air on site may be allowed, provided that the adjustment is
done under the supervision of qualified personnel.
.10
Concrete mixes that will be placed by pump shall be designed for pumping.
.11
Slump retention shall be 75% after 45 minutes.
.12
Superplasticizer shall be used in the High Performance Concrete. Slump

measured immediately prior to placing or pumping of concrete shall conform to
values specified in Table A - Mix Properties.
Only one re-dose of
superplasticizer will be allowed after batching. The Contractor shall ensure that
segregation of concrete does not occur. No segregated concrete shall be placed
in the work.
.13
Addition of water to the batch is not permitted.
.14
In no case will batch adjustment relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the
durability, strength or acceptability of concrete concerned. The Engineer reserves
the right to reject any batch in case of confirmed unacceptability and to require
immediate removal of any concrete from this batch, from the work.
.15
Chloride ion penetrability shall be assessed using ASTM C-1202-97 Standard

Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concretes Ability to Resist Chloride Ion
Penetration, which shall be done on samples cast from the trial batches of
concrete at the age of twenty-eight (28) days. Acceptable level of chloride
penetrability for HPC concrete shall be as shown in Table B - Performance
Characteristics.
.16
For all HPC, trial batches shall include cracking potential tests, which shall be
done on at least three trial mixes, in accordance with the ASTM C 1581-04
Standard Test Method for Determining Age at Cracking and Induced Tensile
Stress Characteristics of Mortar and Concrete Under Restrained Shrinkage. Note
that six weeks are needed for the cracking potential assessment using this test
method.
.17
Trial batch testing shall include salt scaling potential. Salt scaling potential shall
be verified using the attached modified version of ASTM C-672. Test samples
shall be cast from the trial batch mixes and cured for a minimum of 14 days. The
test surface shall be the unfinished/formed bottom face of the test slabs. The
surface mass loss during 30 cycles of freezing/thawing shall be less than 0.4
kg/m2 for the mix to be considered acceptable.
.18
HPC required mix properties shall be as shown in Table A Mix Properties.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 15 of 34
2015
TABLE A Mix Properties

w/cm6
Air
Content
%
Max. Slump
(mm)
After
Adding SP8
Per Mix
Design
0.350.37
5-8
180
1007
14
Per Mix
Design
0.350.37
5-8
180
10
Per Mix
Design
0.280.30
5-7
260
Mix
Type
Typical Structure
Element Application9
Cementitious
Admixtures
(Typ.)
Coarse
Aggr.
Max.
(mm)
Cement
Content
(kg/m)4,5
HPC1
Bridge: Deck, Approach

Slabs, Barriers, Curbs,
Median, Substructures1,
Foundations1, Retaining
Walls1, Sidewalks
Silica Fume
7.5-10%2
Fly Ash
up to 20%3
20
HPC2
Deck Overlays, Pre-cast:

Bridge Deck Panels, LRT
Platform Panels, MSE
Retaining Wall Panels1,
Coping1
Silica Fume
7.5-10%2
Fly Ash
up to 20%3
HPC 3
Pre-cast girders
Silica Fume
10%
1 Within splash zone

2 By weight of cement
3 Classes F, CI
4 Types GU
5 The amount of cement shall be provided as required to achieve the durability and strength performance specifications, however, the Contractor is made aware of increased tendency of
HPC with high cement content, to cracking. Lower dosage of cement within the specified range is encouraged.
6 Water / Cementitious Materials Ratio.
7 Sidewalk concrete only
8 Denotes superplasticizer added at the batching plant
9 For specific application, refer to project drawings and specifications.
.19
HPC specified performance characteristics shall be as shown in Table B

Performance Characteristics.
TABLE B Performance Characteristics

Mix
Structure
Type
Element / Location
28-Day
Chloride Ion
Compressive
Penetrability
Strength
(Coulombs)
Min. (MPa)
45
Max. 100010
Max Air Void

Spacing
(m)
HPC1
Bridge: Deck, Approach Slabs, Barriers,

Curbs, Median, Substructures1;
Foundations1; Retaining Walls1;
Sidewalks in splash zones.
HPC2
Deck Overlays; Pre-cast: Bridge Deck

Panels, LRT Platform Panels, MSE
Retaining Wall Panels1, Coping1
45
Max. 100010
250
Pre-cast girders
70
Max. 100010
250
HPC3
250
1 In Splash Zone
10 Maximum limit, Target shall be set at lower permeability, i.e. 700 Coulombs to allow for variance due to potential inaccuracy of the Chloride Ion
Penetrability test.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 16 of 34
2.11
Ready Mix Concrete

.1
In case of doubt as to the consistent quality of the concrete provided or to be

provided by the proposed supplier, the Engineer may order the Contractor not to
use concrete on the work from such supplier. The Contractor shall arrange for
an acceptable concrete supply without additional compensation or extension of
time.
EXECUTION
3.1
General
3.2
2015
.1
Perform concrete work, including fabrication, placement, finishing and curing in

accordance with requirements of CSA-A23.1, unless indicated otherwise in this
Specification, or on the Drawings.
.2
The HPC for a particular structure shall be produced in the same batching plant.
If concrete is produced in a pre-cast plant, the plant shall have the Certification of
Concrete Production Facilities as required in ARMCA (Alberta Ready Mix
Concrete Association) Inspection Procedures.
.3
All aggregates for concrete produced for a structure shall be supplied from the
same source.
.4
Not less than two (2) weeks prior to starting the work, submit to the Engineer for
review, a complete description of the method and equipment proposed for the
handling, placing, finishing, curing and protection of the concrete. Include the
equipment for transporting, distributing and vibrating the concrete; the concrete
deck finisher and guide rails; finishing bridges and complete details for the
support of such equipment. At the same time, submit a list of key personnel who
will be working on placing and finishing of the concrete, with a brief resume of
their experience. Standby plant and equipment must be available in case of
breakdown and its use shall be only subject to approval by the Engineer. The
review of the concrete placement plan will not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for satisfactory performance of the final product.
.5
Selection of the equipment shall be based on site-specific requirements and

constrains.
Placing and Finishing

.1
The Contractor is advised of the potential impact placement procedures have on

the durability performance of the concrete, especially as it relates to concrete
cracking. Special environmental conditions, procedures, monitoring, and
products may be required to produce the quality of HPC in place expected on this
project.
.2
Placement of HPC shall not commence if:
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 17 of 34
.3
2015
.1
The anticipated air temperature during the pour is expected to exceed

20C for placement of HPC on bridge decks or 22C for placement of
HPC other than on bridge decks.
.2
The anticipated air temperature during the concrete pour is expected to

drop below C
5 at the day of concrete placement and during the
subsequent 7 days unless enclosure and heating are used or insulated
forms, approved by the Engineer, capable of maintaining minimum 10C
are used.
.3
Windy conditions are present or expected during the pour, whereby

combined effects of air temperature, relative humidity, concrete
temperature and wind could result in a surface moisture evaporation rate
in excess of 1 kg/m2 per hour as determined by the CSA A23.1 Annex D.
.4
Rain is predicted for the time of concrete pour.
.5
Any equipment, materials, wind breaks, fog spray equipment, water

supply, and adequate manpower are not available for a continuous
concrete pour.
Placing Guidelines:
.1
Notify Engineer and testing firm a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours prior
to commencement of any concrete placement. Allow time for corrective
work for areas of unusual formwork and congested reinforcement.
.2
Notify geotechnical engineer to inspect and verify all soil conditions and
bearing pressures of all foundations prior to placing concrete for
foundations.
.3
Do not place concrete against frozen ground, frozen concrete or frosted

forms.
.4
Place concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1 as specified herein.
.5
Ensure all hardware and all other items to be cast into concrete are
placed securely and will not cause undue hardship in placing concrete.
.6
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and

contraction joints and other critical items are not disturbed during
concrete placement.
.7
Revise, re-seat and correct improperly positioned reinforcing hardware

and other embedded items immediately before concrete placement.
.8
The temperature of the concrete during discharge into the forms shall be
between 10C and 18C. The maximum temperatures during hydration
shall not exceed 60C, total temperature gradient shall not exceed that
specified in CAN/CSA A23.1 Table 21, and temperature rise or drop shall
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 18 of 34
2015
not exceed maximum heating/cooling rate of C/hr.

2
Contractor shall
record the concrete temperature in the concrete through use of
thermocouples (minimum two (2) per 100 m3), and a diagram is to be
submitted showing all locations to be monitored. Employ corrective
measures upon identification of non-compliance to the concrete
temperature requirements.
.9
Comply with Hot / Cold Weather concrete fabrication, placement and

curing requirements as per CSA A23.1, except as noted in these
Specifications.
.10
The temperature of the mix shall be maintained below the 18C maximum
temperature by the inclusion of ice or liquid nitrogen to the mix at the
plant as reviewed by the Engineer, and as supervised by the testing
laboratory. Special care shall be taken to maintain the consistency of the
designed w/c ratio, while adjusting the mix proportions to account for
addition of ice.
.11
Immediately prior to placing concrete, the forms shall be thoroughly

wetted down with clean potable water. If pour is against hardened
concrete, this surface should also be wetted down.
.12
Ensure specified concrete cover around reinforcing is maintained.
.13
Do not place concrete older than ninety (90) minutes from batch time.
.14
Do not add water on site.
.15
Where concrete is placed on an inclined surface, the placing operation is

to begin at the lower end of the slope and progress upward unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
.16
Place concrete and screed in accordance with the lines and levels
indicated on the drawings.
.17
Place concrete in approximate horizontal layers such that each lift can be
vibrated into the previous lift.
.18
Maximum vertical free fall of concrete is not to exceed 1200 mm. Confine
concrete with a suitable vertical drop pipe to prevent segregation.
.19
Place concrete directly into its final position in forms.

concrete with vibrators.
.20
Compact concrete thoroughly by mechanical vibrators. Ensure concrete

is worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into all areas and
corners of forms.
.21
Mechanical vibrators used in concrete placements containing epoxycoated reinforcement are to be rubber or plastic-tipped.
Do not spread
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 19 of 34
.4
2015
.22
Place concrete as a continuous operation, stopping only at construction

joints.
.23
Allow a minimum of three (3) days between adjacent concrete

placements.
.24
Maintain accurate records of concrete placement. Record date, location

of placement, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.
.25
Backfill is not to proceed against newly poured concrete until a minimum

strength of 75% of specified 28 day strength is achieved, to the level as
shown on the Contract drawings.
Bridge Decks
.1
In order to avoid moisture loss due to raising temperatures, HPC used for
bridge decks shall be placed during the night time periods such that
concrete may reach initial set before 10 A.M. or earlier, depending on the
weather conditions. (Note: The above requirement applies to summer/hot
weather conditions only, as determined by the Engineer).
.2
All deck concrete placing/finishing shall be with a Bidwell Model RF2000

OR Model 364 or Gomaco Model C450. Work bridges shall be installed to
meet the requirements of this Specification.
.3
Concrete bridge decks receiving PMA wearing surface (where approved)

or waterproofing membrane shall be placed/finished using the equipment
specified in this Specification.
.4
The Contractor shall furnish and install finishing machine guide rails to
suit the longitudinal and transverse profile of the deck with an allowance
for the deflection of the structure as determined by the Engineer. Guide
rails shall be adequately supported as recommended by the manufacturer
of the finishing machine and shall be completely in place and firmly
secured prior to placing of concrete. The support for these rails shall be
fully adjustable (not shimmed) to obtain the correct profile and shall be
placed outside the immediate area to be concreted. Do not treat rails with
parting compound to facilitate their removal. Extend the rails beyond both
ends of the scheduled placement length for a distance that permits the
finishing machine to reach all areas of the concrete placed. Ensure that
the equipment can operate within the geometric constrains of the site.
.5
Rail anchorages to provide horizontal and vertical stability and shall not
be ballistically shot into concrete unless that concrete is to be
subsequently overlain. Submit plans for anchoring rails for the Engineers
review. No inserts will be permitted in the finished surface.
.6
After the rails have been set to proper grade and elevation, and prior to
starting the concrete placement, check the clear distance from the bottom
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 20 of 34
2015
of the screed to the top of the prepared concrete surface formwork or

reinforcing steel, in the presence of the Engineer.
.7
Attach a fill strip to the bottom of the screed during this check as a means
of detecting any areas of where the required concrete overlay thickness
might be compromised and to ensure that the minimum specified
concrete cover to the top reinforcing steel can be achieved. Set up
sufficient screed rails to allow the clearance check to be made in one
continuous run for a complete days overlay placement. Make corrections
as directed by the Engineer so as to obtain the specified thickness or
concrete cover.
.8
The finishing machine shall be capable of forward and reverse motion

under the positive control. Provision shall be made for raising the
screeds to clear the screeded surface for travelling in reverse.
.9
Prior to placing any concrete, the adjustment and operation of the

finishing machine shall be verified by moving the machine over the full
length of the section to be placed and traversing the float completely
across all end bulkheads.
.10
Each riding surface shall be finished in one operation with a mechanical

finishing machine spanning the full width of the pour. The method of
finishing must be capable of producing a finished surface meeting the
requirements of Clause 3.2.17, Surface Defects and Tolerances. Hand
finishing shall be kept to a minimum. Finishing bridges that span the full
width of the pour shall be provided for all hand finishing operations.
.11
The vibratory screed shall be moved slowly at a uniform rate. A roll of

concrete shall be maintained along the entire front of the screed at all
times, to ensure the filling and consolidation of the surface concrete.
.12
Screeding shall be completed in no more than two passes. The screed

vibrators shall not be allowed to run except when screeding is actually in
progress. The screeded surface shall not be walked on or otherwise
damaged.
.13
Cement grout that builds up in areas adjacent to edges which cannot be

machine finished, shall be removed. The holes so caused and cavities
left after removal of the machine guide rail shall be filled with concrete
before the remainder of the concrete has reached final set and hand
screeded and finished to conform with the machine finished concrete.
The concrete surface shall be carefully finished around expansion joint
block-outs and deck drains, and care shall be exercised to prevent any
concrete from entering this area.
.14
During the placement and finishing operation the Contractor shall use
fogging and an evaporation retarder. The Contractor shall mix and apply
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 21 of 34
2015
the material in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, no later

than 10 minutes after the longitudinal floating operation.
.15
Longitudinal Bull Floating

The concrete surface produced behind the finishing machine shall be
wood or magnesium floated the minimum amount necessary to produce a
uniform surface, free from open texturing, plucked aggregate and local
projections or depressions.
.16
Deck Sidewalk Finish

Use evaporation retarder immediately after the deck sidewalk surface has
been struck off with a strike board. Float the surface with a wooden or
cork float. Use an edging tool on edges and control joints. Remove
edging tool marks prior to final finishing. The surface shall not vary more
than 3 mm under a 3.6 m straight edge. The surface shall receive a light
broom finish.
.5
.6
Limitations of Operation
.1
If concrete placement is stopped or delayed for a period of 60 minutes or

more, further placement shall be discontinued and may resume only after
a period of not less than 12 hours. This restriction does not prohibit
continuation of placement provided a gap is left in the lane or strip; the
gap shall be sufficient in length for the finishing machine to clear the
previously placed concrete.
.2
All vertical joints and cold joints between adjacent pours shall be
prepared in accordance with CSA A23.1
Surface Defects and Tolerances

.1
The finished surface shall conform to the longitudinal and transverse

profiles as indicated on the Drawings.
.2
The surface shall be free from open texturing, plucked aggregate and
local projections.
.3
The surface shall be such that when tested with a 3 m long straight edge
placed anywhere, in any direction, on the surface, there shall not be a
gap greater than 3 mm between the bottom of the straight edge and the
surface of the deck anywhere below the straight edge.
.4
The surface shall be checked as described above immediately after final

bull floating.
.5
Surfaces that do not meet the required tolerances shall be corrected

immediately.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 22 of 34
3.3
2015
Curing
.1
The Contractor shall employ special precautions following the placement and
screeding of concrete but prior to wet curing, to protect HPC surfaces from the
drying effects of wind and sun.
.2
No concreting is to be allowed until all materials required for the curing phase are
on site and ready for use.
.3
Immediately following finishing of concrete, apply fog misting until the concrete
has enough strength to support the placement of the wet burlap and plastic. The
misting should not be used to apply water to the concretes surface for finishing
purposes. The misting device should not be directed towards the concrete
surface. Only a fine coating or sheen should be applied with the misting device.
.4
Unformed Surfaces
Concrete shall be moist cured by protecting it against loss of moisture, freezing,
rapid temperature changes, rain, flowing water and mechanical injury, for a
period of not less than seven (7) days following its initial set. Curing shall consist
of covering the concrete surface with clean white or light-colour wet burlap as
soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to support the weight of burlap without
excessive marking of the concrete surface. Exercise care to ensure that the
burlap is thoroughly pre-soaked, but well drained. The burlap shall be cut up to
sheets of the size that can be successfully handled off the work bridge or space
outside the wet concrete. Other means of handling placement of burlap may be
required to successfully place and maintain burlap in place.
.1
Failure to apply wet burlap within the required time shall be cause for
rejecting the work so affected. Remove and replace surface concrete in
the rejected area at no additional cost to the City.
.2
Once the burlap has been placed it shall be kept in a continuously wet
condition to prevent wicking of moisture away from the concrete surface
by the fabric and shall be covered with vapour-proof polyethylene clear or
white sheeting. Air flow in the space between the moisture vapour barrier
and the burlap must be prevented.
.3
Furnish both the burlap and vapour proof sheeting in pieces large enough
to cover the entire width of the deck and lap at least 300 mm. Adequately
weigh the top sheeting to prevent displacement or billowing. Maintain the
integrity of the vapour sheeting at all times during the curing period and
patch any damaged pieces immediately; to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
.4
Provide adequate equipment before placement of concrete begins to

ensure that the burlap will be kept wet at all times during its use for
curing. Burlap shall be clean and free of dust prior to pre-wetting.
.5
Supply water for curing as specified for the concrete.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 23 of 34
.6
.5
2015
Regardless of ambient temperature, moist curing with burlap and water

must be provided at all times. During cold weather, burlap must be
prevented from freezing.
Formed Surfaces
.1
Formed surfaces may be protected by watertight formwork left in place for

the curing period, as specified by CSA A23.1 Tables 2 and 20. Horizontal
(exposed) surfaces of concrete shall be moist cured.
.2
Formed surfaces may be stripped after concrete has attained sufficient

strength (minimum 24 hours). Apply continual moist curing to formed
concrete surfaces immediately after breaking forms away from the
concrete surfaces and keep continuously and thoroughly wet. Total curing
time (with and without forms) of formed surfaces shall be minimum seven
(7) days.
.3
Remove side forms as soon as possible after concreting. In case of

elements of significant length-to height ratio, such as retaining walls and
traffic barriers, release side forms within 12 hours after concreting. Apply
continuous moist curing immediately.
.4
Where Approved by the Engineer, a liquid curing compound applied at

the rate recommended by the manufacturer may be applied. Curing
compounds shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive sealers.
.5
Formed surfaces may be stripped after concrete has attained sufficient

strength (minimum 24 hours). Apply curing compound immediately after
breaking forms away from the concrete surfaces. Total curing time (with
and without forms) of formed surfaces shall be minimum seven (7) days.
.6
Form-tie or other accessory recesses should be cleaned and filled with

non-shrink grout or other approved material. No concrete accessories
shall be left in place unless Approved. All Approved accessories left in
place shall have Approved corrosion protection and concrete covers as
specified in CSA/CAN-S6.
.6
During hot weather, begin curing process immediately after finishing. Use
continuous water or absorptive mats.
.7
During cold weather, adequate care should be taken to prevent any heating and
hoarding efforts from drying out the concrete.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 24 of 34
3.4
2015
Surfacing and Finishing

.1
Form-tie or other accessory recesses should be cleaned and filled with nonshrink grout or other approved material. No concrete accessories shall be left in
place unless Approved. All Approved accessories left in place shall have
Approved corrosion protection and concrete covers as specified in CSA/CAN-S6.
.2
Surface finishes are to be classified as follows (see drawings for extent of

finishes):
.1
Class 1: Ordinary surface finish.
.2
Class 2: Rubbed finish.
.3
Class 3: Floated surface finish.
.4
Class 4: Trowel finish.
.5
Class 5: Broomed finish.
.6
Class 6: Floated Surface Finish, Surface Textured
.3
All formed surfaces are to receive as a minimum a Class 1 finish. Other finishes
are to be as shown on the drawings or as indicated in the specifications.
.4
Class 1 - Ordinary surface finish:
.5
.1
Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular

projections are to be removed from all surfaces except from those that
are not to be exposed. On all surfaces, the cavities produced by form ties
and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other
defects are to be thoroughly cleaned, and after having been kept
saturated with water for a period of not less than three hours, it is to be
carefully pointed and trued with mortar of cement and fine aggregate
mixed in the portions used in the grade of concrete being finished. Mortar
used in pointing is not to be more than one hour old. The mortar patches
are to be cured as specified under Curing. All construction and
expansion joints in the completed work are to be left carefully tooled and
free from all mortar and concrete. The joint filler is to be left exposed for
its full length and with clean and true edges.
.2
The resulting surfaces are to be true and uniform. All surfaces that
cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer are to be rubbed as
specified for Class 2 - Rubbed Finish.
Class 2 - Rubbed finish: Required for any surface that is to receive a concrete
sealer.
.1
After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete is to be started as soon as

conditions permit. Immediately before starting this work, the concrete is
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 25 of 34
2015
to be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three

hours. Sufficient time is to have elapsed before the wetting down to allow
the mortar used in pointing of defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be
finished are to be rubbed with a medium coarse carborundum stone using
a small amount of mortar on its face. The mortar used is to be composed
of cement and fine sand mixed in the proportion used in the concrete
being finished. Rubbing is to be continued until all of the form marks,
projections and irregularities have been removed, all voids have been
filled and a uniform surface has been obtained. The paste produced by
this rubbing is to be left in place at this time.
.6
.7
.2
After all concrete above the surfaces being treated has been cast, the
final finish is to be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and
water. This rubbing is to be continued until the entire surface is of a
smooth texture and uniform colour.
.3
After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it is to be
rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and left free from all unsound
patches, paste powder and objectionable marks.
Class 3 - Floated surface finish: Required for all unexposed top surfaces.
.1
After the concrete has been compacted, the surface is to be carefully

rodded and struck off with a strike board to conform to the cross-section
and grade shown on the drawings. Proper allowance is to be made for
camber if required. The strike board may be operated longitudinally or
transversely and is to be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and
transverse motion, the manipulation being such that neither end is raised
from the side forms during the process. A slight excess of concrete is to
be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times.
.2
After striking off and consolidating, the surface is to be made uniform by

longitudinal or transverse floating or both.
.3
After floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but
while the concrete is still plastic, the surface is to be tested for trueness
with a straight edge. Any depression found is to be immediately filled with
fresh mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. High areas
are to be cut down and refinished. The final surface is to conform to the
required grade and contour such that the deviation is not greater than
6 mm under a 3 m straight edge.
Class 4 - Trowel finish: Required for all exposed top surfaces that are not to
receive a broomed finish, including concrete gutters.
.1

City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 26 of 34
2015
.2
.8
.9
3.5
It is then to be trowelled to a smooth, dense finish using a steel trowel.
Class 5 - Broomed finish: Required for sidewalk surfaces and approach slabs.
.1

.2
When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface is to be given a

broomed finish. The strokes of the broom are to be square across the
slab with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped so as to produce regular
corrugations not over 3 mm in depth.
.3
Sidewalk surfaces are to be laid out in blocks with an approved grooving

tool as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. An edging
tool is to be used along all edges of the sidewalks.
Class 6 Floated Surface Finish, Surface Textured:

.1
After the concrete has been consolidated, the surface shall be carefully
screeded to the cross section and profile shown on the drawings. When
the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be finished with a
broom of an approved type. The broom strokes shall be perpendicular to
the edge of the unit, and extended from edge to edge, with adjacent
strokes slightly overlapped producing corrugations of 2 to 3 mm in depth.
Brooming shall be done when the concrete has set sufficiently to produce
clear, crisp brooming marks which do not sag or slump, without tearing
the surface or disturbing coarse aggregate particles. After final brooming,
the surface finish shall be free of porous spots, irregularities, depressions,
pockets and rough spots and must not vary more than 5 mm when
measured using a 3 m straight edge.
.2
Where specified, approved grooving and edging tools shall be used on all
edges and expansion joints after brooming.
Surface Texturing for Bridge Decks not Receiving PMA Wearing Surface
.1
Grooves shall be cut into the new concrete deck surface following the curing
period. Grooving fresh concrete with a rake in place of cutting cured concrete will
not be permitted.
.2
Grooves to be cut perpendicular to traffic flow.
.3
Saw cuts to be 2.5 mm wide, a minimum 6 mm deep and spaced 25 mm on

centre.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 27 of 34
3.6
3.7
2015
.4
The area 600 mm from traffic barriers and curbs is not to be grooved.
.5
Saw cuts shall extend to within 100 mm of expansion joints and deck drains.
.6
The Contractor will supply all water.
.7
All run-off from grooving operations and suspended solids shall be collected at
either end of the bridge off the bridge approaches or deck, in collection tanks,
passed through several settling and filtration processes before it is discharged
into the sewer system. The final effluent shall meet the requirements of
local/provincial standards for water quality.
Defective Concrete
.1
Immediately after removing forms, all concrete surfaces are to be inspected, and
any imperfect joints, voids, stone pockets or other defective areas as specified
are to be reported to the Engineer at once and repaired before the concrete is
thoroughly dry. Defective areas are to be chipped away to a depth of not less
than 25 mm with the edges perpendicular to the surface. The area to be repaired
and a space at least 150 mm wide entirely surrounding it is to be wetted to a
saturated surface dry condition to prevent absorption of water from the repair
material.
.2
The repair is to be made of the same material and of the same proportions as
used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate is to be omitted and
cement added to match the colour of the surrounding concrete. The amount of
mixing water is to be as little as consistent with the requirements for handling and
placing. The mortar is to be re-tempered without the addition of water by
allowing it to stand for a period of one (1) hour, during which time it is to be mixed
with a trowel to prevent setting.
.3
The repair material is to be thoroughly compacted into place and screeded off to
leave the repair slightly higher than the surrounding surface. It is then to be left
undisturbed for a period of one (1) to two (2) hours to permit initial shrinkage
before being finally finished. The repair is then to be finished to match the
adjoining surface and cured to the requirements noted in this specification.
.4
Report any shapes and lines outside the specified tolerances and repair or
correct as directed by the Engineer.
Carbon Monoxide Equipment

.1
Do not place concrete for slabs if carbon monoxide producing equipment has
been in operation in the temporary enclosure during the twelve (12) hours
preceding the start of concreting.
.2
Provide positive ventilation during the twelve (12) hours preceding the start of
concrete placement.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 28 of 34
.3
3.8
2015
Unless directly used for the concrete placing, do not operate carbon monoxide
producing equipment in the temporary enclosure during or within twenty-four (24)
hours after completing the finishing of any slab section.
Crack Repair
.1
.2
Where a measured crack width in the bridge deck or horizontal surfaces exceeds
0.3 mm, the following procedure shall be used in the treatment of the same:
.1
Blow out cracks clean and dry with a jet of oil-free compressed air.
.2
Seal cracks by a slow gravity feed of approved material to maximize the

penetration.
.3
Seed surface with coarse sand.
Where a measured crack width in non-horizontal surfaces exceeds 0.3 mm, the
following procedure shall be used in the treatment of the same:
.1
Blow out cracks clean and dry with a jet of oil-free compressed air.
.2
Seal cracks by pressure injection of approved material.
.3
Injection ports shall be removable and insert type complete with caps or
mechanical means of closure when under pressure.
.4
Injection port pressure shall be equal or greater than the maximum

operating pressure of the pump.
.5
Maximum port spacing along the crack is 150mm.
.6
Port locations shall alternate from one side of the crack to the other for full
depth cracks.
.7
Epoxy mortar binder shall be applied between injection ports to

temporarily seal crack surface during injection.
.8
Injection shall begin at the lower entry port and continue until there is
evidence of resin coming from the port above or adjacent to the one being
injected.
.9
Injection pressures shall be attained prior to discontinuing injections and

opening subsequent injection ports.
.10
Complete pressure injection for all remaining ports until the crack is
sealed.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 29 of 34
4.1
Measurement
.1
4.2
When required, measurement of HPC will be by cubic metre.
Payment
.1
4.3
2015
Payment for HPC will be by cubic metre (based on amount placed within neat
lines of structure) and will include all costs associated with mix designs, batch
testing, evaluations, supply, delivery, placement, finishing, curing, protection and
formwork.
Pay Adjustment
.1
Pay adjustments will be made for non-conformance to the specified strength and
durability characteristics. When structural considerations do not govern, strength
and durability penalties apply independently resulting in multiple penalties if the
concrete is deficient in more than one consideration.
.2
complying load up to and including the non-complying load for any one test.
.1
Low Compressive Strength

.1
When structural and durability considerations do not govern, but

concrete fails to meet contractual obligations of strength, the
penalty may be assessed at the discretion of the Engineer, in
accordance with the Table C:
TABLE C - Payment Adjustment for Low Strength Concrete
.2
3.5 MPa to 4.5 MPa below specified
$450.00/m3 deduction
> 4.5 MPa below specified
remove and replace.
Low Air Content

.1
When the air content is tested with the prescribed procedure and
falls outside the specified limits, a durability penalty will be
assessed in accordance with Table D:
TABLE D - Payment Adjustment for Air Entrainment1

Outside the specified range to a
maximum of 0.2%
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 30 of 34
> 0.2% outside specified range
2015
remove and replace.
1 Plastic concrete air content may be verified by air void characteristics determined on hardened concrete, subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The cost of the verification testing shall be born by the Contractor.
.3
.4
.2
A minimum of one air test for every 20 m3 of concrete placed will

be taken.
.3
The volume of concrete used to adjust the contract amount will be

based on whole truckloads of concrete and will include all
truckloads placed after a complying load up to and including the
non-complying load to a maximum of 20 m3 for any one air test.
Cracking
.1
No pay adjustment will be made on the basis of cracking.
.2
The Contractor shall repair all cracks greater than 0.3 mm, in accordance
with this specification, regardless of the nature of their cause.
Salt Scaling
.1
When concrete is tested for salt scaling potential and the results exceed
the specified limits, payment adjustment will be made for the reduced
durability in accordance with Table E:
TABLE E - Payment Adjustment for Scaling Potential
Less than 0.4 kg per 30 cycles
no deduction
> 0.4 kg per 30 cycles
$420/m3 deduction or apply

alternative protection system*
*At the discretion of the Engineer
.5
Penetrability
.1
HPC penetrability will be measured by the Chloride Ion Penetrability Test,

ASTM C1202-97, utilizing field cast and laboratory cured cylinders.
.2
Penetrability will be determined at the age of 28 days from time of

placement
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No.:
Section 03301
Page 31 of 34
2015
TABLE F - Payment Adjustment for Penetrability *

Less than 1000
No deduction
Coulombs
1001 to 1200
Coulombs
> 1201 Coulombs
$650.00/m3 deduction or remove and replace

at no cost to the City
* Penetrability requirements may be verified, at the discretion of the Engineer, by other durability indicators.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH RETAINING WALLS
GENERAL
1.1
Scope of Work
Section 03483
Page 1 of 24
2015
This Section outlines the requirements for design, supply and construction of
mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) retaining walls. The wall locations are shown on the
Contract Drawings.
The Work is defined as follows:
1.2
Design of the MSE wall by the Contractors Engineer registered in the

province of Alberta.
Fabrication and delivery of all necessary components including but not

limited to: precast concrete face panels, precast or cast-in-place concrete
coping, soil reinforcing materials and accessories.
Construction may include but not be limited to the following: excavation

for the wall, concrete levelling pad, facia panel installation, concrete
coping, concrete barriers, installation of soil reinforcing materials and
accessories, installation of drainage measures, installation of traffic
barrier and pedestrian safety railing and backfill as noted on the Contract
Drawings and as required to complete a fully functional the MSE retaining
system.
Quality Control during design, fabrication, delivery and construction of the

MSE Wall
The Contractor shall cover the cost of engineering, construction, quality

control and project closure documentation including Record Drawings.
Related Work
Precast Concrete
Grout
Metal Fabrications
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
1.3
Section 03483
Page 2 of 24
2015
Other specifications relevant to the Project
Reference Standards
Perform design and construction work in accordance with the following standards and
guidelines, except where specified otherwise. All standards to be latest issue at time of
tender.
Primary References
CAN/CSA S6-06, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code (CHBDC)

including recent updates
The City of Calgary Design Guidelines for Bridges and Structures
CAN/CSA A23.3 Design of Concrete Structures
CAN/CSA A23.4 Precast Concrete Materials and Construction
Secondary References
1.4
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway

accompanying Commentary, latest edition LFRD.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) where noted.
Bridges,
and
MSE Wall System Requirements

The retaining walls shall consist of precast concrete face panels generally consisting of a
size 1.5 X 1.5 m (unless Approved otherwise), mechanically connected to soil reinforcing
members embedded in an engineered backfill, plus accessories as shown or noted.
Precast panels shall have a maximum dimensional ratio, height/width and width/height
1.2. Panels of larger size shall require approval from the City.
The precast concrete facing elements shall have a lip and recess (ship lap) at the
vertical and horizontal joint interfaces to protect the joint material.
All elements of a MSE wall system shall meet The City of Calgary Design Guidelines for
Bridges and Structures and shall be submitted for review by the City.
Aesthetic requirements for the wall, such as finish, texture, color and special features,
shall be as specified in the Contract Documents, and are subject to approval by the City.
Manufacturer Qualifications
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
1.5
Section 03483
Page 3 of 24
2015
All components of the MSE wall system shall be supplied from one MSE wall
supplier.
MSE Wall Acceptable Systems

One of the following City accepted MSE systems shall be used. Only one system shall
be used for all of the MSE walls in a contract.
Reinforced Earth, by Reinforced Earth Company Ltd., 1550 Enterprise

Road, Suite 229, Mississauga, ON, L4W 4P4, (905) 564-0896.
Vist-A-Wall with precast panels by Atlantic Industries Ltd., 220 - 5925 12

Street SE, Calgary AB, T2H 2M3, (403) 730-6980
Nilex Group, 9222 40th Street SE, Calgary, AB, T2C 2P3, (403) 543-5454
An alternative to the above systems may be accepted subject to the satisfactory

submission of the product information, review and acceptance of the system by the City
of Calgary, Transportation Infrastructure.
1.6
Engineer of Record (Owners Engineer)

Engineer of Record is defined as a Professional Engineer registered in Alberta and
engaged by the City to perform the following scope:
1.7
Geometric and site design including utility conflict accommodation
Review of global stability
Review of total and differential settlement (Short term and long term)
Quality assurance review during Contractors design, fabrication and

construction
Review and confirmation of Record Drawings
Contractor Design-Build Responsibilities

Designer Qualifications
The designer of the MSE wall system shall be a Professional Engineer

registered in Alberta experienced in design of soil retaining structures.
Submit in writing the qualifications and experience of the Professional

Engineer who shall be signing and sealing the Contractor design
drawings.
Design drawings, shop drawings and construction Specifications shall be

sealed and signed by the designer.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
DESIGN
2.1
Design Requirements
Section 03483
Page 4 of 24
2015
Location, layout, geometry control, short and long term global stability, allowable rate of
fill placement, and allowable bearing capacity requirements shall be as specified in the
contract documents. The Contractors design responsibility shall include internal and
external stability (sliding and overturning), tensile resistance, pullout resistances, and all
other elements for a complete MSE wall system. The Contractor shall check the global
stability design using actual soil properties upon confirmation of the source of backfill
material.
If the wall system selected by the Contractor requires modification to any component of
the project, the Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs required to complete the
change. Proposed changes to the project shall be submitted to the Engineer and The
City for review and acceptance 3 weeks prior to commencement of detailed design.
Water carrying appurtenances, such as catch basins, drainage inlets/outlets, culverts

etc., shall be placed away from, or beyond the ends of the soil reinforcement zone, and
provisions shall be made to mitigate the detrimental effects of potential leakage.
Obstructions such as foundation piles and associated casings, or casings for future pile
installations in the soil reinforcement zone, shall be accommodated with appropriate
arrangement of soil reinforcing around such obstructions. For those MSE wall systems
that lend themselves to splaying of the soil reinforcement, the splay angle shall not
exceed 20 from the perpendicular of the facing panel. For other MSE wall systems,
coverage ratios of soil reinforcement shall be specifically developed for each project.
Unless a traffic barrier is mounted directly on top of the MSE wall, pedestrian railing,
bicycle barrier, or safety railing shall be mounted on top of MSE wall coping
Design shall be provided for all elements, including but not limited to: excavation and
preparation of original ground, any relocation or treatment of existing buried structures
including utilities, backfill, levelling pads, concrete face panels, concrete coping, rail,
weld plates and connections, soil reinforcing materials, geo textile, and accessories (as
applicable).
The design life for all MSE systems and components shall be 100 years, unless noted
otherwise.
The design shall consider all applicable loads including, but not limited to, the following:
o Superimposed dead load (i.e. railing, barriers, etc)
o Load effects on installations buried within MSE backfill
o Loads due to construction staging
o Hydrostatic pressure
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
o
Section 03483
Page 5 of 24
2015
Effects of other adjacent structures
All surcharge loads on walls shall be specified on the design drawings.

Any soil passive pressure having favourable effects on the stability of the walls shall be
ignored
Walls shall be designed for ultimate and serviceability limit states using load and
resistance factors as given in the latest edition of CAN/CSA S6.
The design must be able to satisfy all geometry requirements including horizontal
curves, wall batters, corners, and slopes.
Acute corners less than 70 inside panels shall not be allowed.
Special corner units shall be used when interior angle between adjacent panels is 130
or less. The special corner panels shall be used to maintain the 20 mm nominal design
joint gap along the front face of panels on either side of the bend line.
The vertical and horizontal joints between precast components shall be designed to be
20 mm nominal unless otherwise approved. Joints between panels shall have a lip and
recess (ship lap) configuration. Butt joints may be used if a precast HPC concrete
backing block is designed and installed along the joint to prevent soil infiltration. Backing
blocks shall overlap adjacent panels a minimum of 200 mm and have a minimum
thickness of 140 mm.
Coping joints shall be evenly spaced and be designed to mitigate

cracking in the coping. Reinforcing should be discontinuous at these
locations to allow cracking to occur. Locations of coping joints should
correspond with panel joints.
The wall shall be designed to accommodate differential settlements of

100 mm in a 10 m length.
An inward batter of 1H: 50V along the height of the wall shall be provided
and shown on drawings.
The top of the concrete wall shall be smooth and have no abrupt changes
in height and a 3% wash slope towards the fascia of the wall.
MSE wall panels shall be fully supported by compacted backfill without
voids on the non-exposed side.
Concrete levelling pad shall be designed for applicable panel loads during
construction. Details of any temporary shoring or temporary support
measures for panels, if required shall be outlined.
For precast panels, minimum concrete cover to reinforcing steel shall be

50 at all faces, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Minimum
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 6 of 24
2015
thickness of precast panels should be 140 mm excluding any additional

thickness required for architectural treatment.
Where staged construction is required and large differential settlement is expected
between stages, appropriately located full height vertical slip joints shall be provided.
All galvanized steel soil reinforcement shall be protected from exposure to roadway deicing salt by an impermeable geomembrane placed above the top layer of soil
reinforcement. The membrane shall be sealed to prevent leakage, and sloped to drain
away from the bridge and connected to an outlet beyond the MSE soil mass. A nonwoven geotextile filter fabric layer shall be placed below and above the membrane to
prevent puncture.
Weep drains consisting of flexible perforated 150 mm diameter pipe complete with filter
sock shall be provided near the front and the back bottom corner of the mechanically
stabilized earth mass. Weep drains shall be day lighted or connected for positive
drainage. Downspouts shall be provided for drainage from deck joints and deck wick
drains. Downspouts shall be rigid PVC type DB2 conduit meeting the requirements of
CSA C22.2 No. 211.1. Coupling shall be solvent bell ends (SBE). Downspouts shall
have a vertical slip joint with a dished top drain inlet cast into the wall coping.
Downspouts shall not be directed through the mechanically stabilized earth mass. Down
spouts shall be recessed full height in a chase formed into the front of panels or by using
special wall panels and covered with a 10 gauge or 2.6 mm thick steel plate. The plate
shall be shop painted with an Approved coating system. Surface preparation shall be in
accordance with the selected coating systems published product data sheet.
Grassed swales with a non-degradable erosion control mat shall be provided behind the
top of MSE walls, and shall have a minimum width of 600 mm and a minimum depth of
150 mm. The swales shall have a bottom liner of impervious geomembrane. Swales
and top of walls shall slope away from bridge abutments.
2.2
Design Submittals
Design notes and calculations shall include design of the face panels, soil reinforcing,
stability of MSE wall system including but not limited to the following.
Internal Stability
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Soil-reinforcement interaction
Pull out capacity of reinforcement
Rupture of reinforcement
Creep in soil and/or reinforcement
Facing
o
Rupture of connection
Rupture of facing elements
Panel sliding failure (column shear failure)
Toppling
Section 03483
Page 7 of 24
2015
Design notes and shop drawings shall be stamped, signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer, registered to practice in the Province of Alberta.
Design notes shall be presented in a legible and logical format, and shall be sufficiently detailed
to allow a technical review of design concepts and assumptions used in the design. Where
necessary, the design package shall be accompanied by properties of materials used together
with the appropriate test certificates
Shop drawings shall be legible and of adequate quality to be reproduced and microfilmed. Each
drawing shall have sufficient blank space for the Engineers review stamp.
As a minimum, shop drawings shall contain:
Wall layout plan and elevation complete with dimensions and elevations, and
typical wall cross-sections.
All component and connection details.
Site drainage and drainage details.
Design drawings shall indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or

anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, drainage, explanatory notes and other information
necessary for completion of the work.
The proposed wall design shall be subject to review by the Engineer of Record to ensure that
overall slope stability requirements are met. The wall supplier shall provide geotechnical
parameters used for design of the soil reinforcing to the Engineer of Record to aid in this review.
Anticipated slope stability requirements, with respect to length of soil reinforcing, shall be
indicated on the drawings.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 8 of 24
2015
Review of the drawings and calculations by the Engineer of Record shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor of his or her responsibility for the completeness and accuracy of his or
her work and its conformance with the contract Drawings and Specifications.
The design notes and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and
acceptance a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of scheduled fabrication.
The design notes and shop drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer solely to ascertain
conformance with codes and specifications. Responsibility of the final design remains solely
with the Contractor. The Engineers review of the shop drawings shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor from his responsibility for errors or omissions in the calculations and
drawings or for the proper completion of the work in accordance with the Contract.
The Contractor shall revise the drawings and calculations as required to the satisfaction of the
Engineer without any additional cost to The City. No fabrication shall commence until all shop
drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall incorporate as-built conditions and re-submit the revised design notes and
shop drawings for records at the completion of construction.
The effect of any existing or planned structures or utilities as shown on the contract drawings in
front of, behind, under or on the wall shall be taken into account in the design and spatial
arrangement of soil reinforcing materials. The designer shall familiarize himself with the
geotechnical reports referenced in the Contract Documents and may need to supplement this
information with additional geotechnical investigative work.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
3
Section 03483
Page 9 of 24
2015
QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE BY CONTRACTOR

The designer of the MSE wall system shall inspect the fabrication of precast concrete
elements, construction of cast-in-place concrete elements and site installation of the
MSE wall system.
Concrete shall be tested in accordance with standard Specifications 03300 Cast in Place
Concrete and/ or 03301 HPC, as applicable.
Provide the Engineer of Record with certified copies of the precast manufacturers
quality control tests related to this project as specified in CSA-A23.4 upon request.
Tolerances for Permanent Walls
Ensure that vertical tolerances (plumbness) and horizontal alignment

tolerances do not exceed 12 mm when measured with a 3 m straight
edge.
The final overall vertical tolerance of the completed wall (plumbness from
top to bottom relative to the plane of wall shown on drawings) shall not
exceed 5 mm per meter of wall height.
The offset of adjacent panel edges at joints shall not exceed 10 mm.
The variation for minimal joint gap shall not exceed 1.5 mm/m.
Walls which do not meet these tolerances will not be accepted by the City
and must be removed and reconstructed at no cost to the City.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.1
General Requirements
The Contractor should allow for inspection of the precast panels by the design Engineer,
the Engineer of Record, and the City before casting the first panel.
The City and Engineer of Record may conduct additional quality assurance inspection of
the fabrication or construction activities at their discretion, and the Contractor shall
accommodate these requests as much as possible.
Engineered backfill and base material required for the MSE retaining wall system is to be
inspected and tested to confirm that it meets design assumptions by a testing firm paid
for by the Contractor. This testing should be part of the Contractors Quality Control
Plan.
The Contractors testing firm shall prepare the necessary Standard Proctor Density
curves for all types of backfill used and will take as many field tests as are required to
properly ascertain compaction of backfill. These curves and data are to be submitted to
the Engineer of Record and the Citys geotechnical testing agency for review.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 10 of 24
2015
The Contractors testing firm shall submit samples of the backfill material to be used and
provide a written report to the Engineer of Record indicating if the backfill material meets
design assumptions and conforms to this Specification. If requested by the City or
Engineer of Record, the Contractor shall submit a 20 kg representative sample of the
backfill proposed for construction to the Citys geotechnical testing agency for testing
and approval two weeks prior to start of construction.
Notify the Engineer of Record and the Citys testing firm a minimum 48 hours prior to
commencing backfill work.
If new materials are introduced to the project, they shall be tested. Additional testing
shall be at the Contractors own expense.
4.2
Material Test Data

The Contractor shall provide test data to confirm performance of the MSE retaining wall
system. These shall include the following tests:
Strength
Compaction tests
Electro-chemical properties of backfill
The Engineer of Record may request additional tests to be performed

specific to the application.
In the case of geo-grid reinforced MSE walls, the long term creep (10 years from
construction) of the geo-grid shall be limited to 5 mm.
Geosynthetic reinforcing shall meet AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
Clause 1.10.6.4.3b. The requirements for applications involving severe consequences
of poor performance or failure shall apply. Results of product specific durability studies
carried out to determine the product-specific long term strength reduction factor (RF)
shall be submitted for the Engineer of Records review and approval. These studies
shall be used to estimate the short term and long term effects of the environment factors
on the strength and deformational characteristics of the geosynthetic reinforcement
throughout the specified design life.
Geosynthetic reinforcing shall meet AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
Clause 11.10.6.4.3b. The requirements for applications involving severe consequences
of poor performance or failure shall apply. Results of product specific durability studies
carried out to determine the product-specific long term strength reduction factor (RF)
shall be submitted for the Consultants review and approval. These studies shall be
used to estimate the short term and long term effects of the environment factors on the
strength and deformational characteristics of the geosynthetic reinforcement throughout
the specified design life.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 11 of 24
2015
Geosynthetic reinforcing materials shall satisfy the requirements of the following tests
with the understanding that the test methods are current at the time of construction:
GG 1 Standard Test Method for Geogrid Rib Tensile Strength
GG 2 Standard Test Method for Geogrid Rib Junction Strength
GG 3 Standard Test Method for Tensile Creep Testing of
Geogrids
GG 4 Standard Practice for Determination of the Long Term
Creep Design Strengths of Geogrids

Geosynthetic reinforcing materials shall contain stabilizers or inhibitors to prevent
degradation of properties due to ultraviolet light exposure.
The nominal long-term reinforcement material design strength (Tal) values for specific
products shall be determined by third party agencies such that as the Highway
Innovative Technology Evaluation Centre (HITEC) or AASHTO National transportation
Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP), and product lines shall be re-tested at least every
3 years.
The design life of the corrosion protection system shall be defined as the time elapsed
for the effects of corrosion to reduce the cross sectional area such that the strength of
the reinforcing is reduced to the point where the average stress over the remaining area
meets the requirements of the design. The design life of reinforcing shall not be less
than 100 years.
4.3
Submittals
The design drawings, details and specifications shall be submitted to the City and Engineer
of Record for review. Contractor shall allow a minimum of 2 (two) weeks for review.
Construction shall not proceed until all comments have been resolved to the satisfaction of
the Engineer of Record and the City.
Submit shop drawings of wall components for information only. Shop drawings should
include overall dimensions of elements, dimensions of any block outs or inserts, schedule
of pieces, as well as reinforcement layout.
Submit data on all concrete mix designs proposed for use to the testing firm and to the
Engineer of Record for approval as per Specifications 03300 and 03301. Contractor shall
allow 2 (two) weeks minimum for review. If a new (to the City) concrete mix is proposed,
trial batch data must also be submitted.
Submit copies of mill test reports of reinforcement according to specification 03200 and
steel straps (if applicable).
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 12 of 24
2015
Submit results of ladle analysis of all reinforcement to be spliced by welding, and submit
manufacturers information and test reports for mechanical splices of all reinforcement
to be mechanically spliced.
Submit Product Data for polymeric bars, if proposed. Also submit a written
methodology to prevent floating of reinforcement during placement of concrete and a
written methodology of cutting the reinforcement, if required.
Submit gradation of uniformly graded low fines crushed granular fill if wall is to be
constructed during cold temperatures (below 0C), and confirm whether any changes in
the design of reinforcing strips, filter fabric or other details have been taken into
account.
The Contractor shall provide a maintenance manual which includes repair and
replacement procedures.
4.4
Sample Panels
Two sample precast face panels shall be constructed for the Engineer of Records
approval demonstrating the required standard for concrete colour, quality and finish.
One panel shall have pigmented sealer applied (colour as per drawings), and the
second panel shall be without colour.
After approval, these samples are to be maintained in the plant as a control sample of
materials and workmanship. These samples may constitute part of the last delivery to
the site and be permanently built into the work.
The standard of these finishes on the sample panels are to be rigidly adhered to, and
any panels not meeting this standard are to be rejected.
4.5
Acceptability
Failure to comply with the requirements of these specifications will result in the structure
being considered potentially deficient, and may be cause for rejection by the City or
application of penalties.
Where evidence points to a potentially deficient structure, the Engineer of Record may
order an independent testing firm to obtain cores, x-rays or similar non-destructive tests
to confirm adherence to the Specifications.
The Engineer of Record may order a load test and/or analysis, as defined by CSAA23.3, if the non-destructive tests are impractical or inconclusive.
PRODUCTS
5.1
Concrete Materials
All materials to conform to the City of Calgary Standard Specifications for Cast-in-Place
Concrete Section 03300 for concrete wall components outside of the splash zone and
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 13 of 24
2015
as per Standard Specification for High Performance Concrete Section 03301 for
concrete wall components within the splash zone.
Concrete coping shall be consistent with panel concrete in material and color.
5.2
Concrete Reinforcing Materials

Reinforcing steel: refer to Standard City of Calgary Specification 03200.
Reinforcing steel shall be 400W grade and conform to CAN/CSA-G30.18.
All reinforcing steel is to be galvanized if the wall panels are in the splash zone.
5.3
Metal Fabrications
Welding, if required, is to conform to CSA-W59.
Galvanizing of steel components to be done in accordance with CAN/CSA-G164.
Lifting inserts shall be cast in the locations shown on the fabrication drawings. Lifting
hook design should be designed so that capacity is adequate for lifting the element
safely without compromising the integrity of the element. Inserts must be clean and free
of all obstructions for rapid connection of lifting devices.
Pins and pipes used for alignment of panels during construction shall be made of
durable materials such as galvanized steel or polypropylene and shall be installed
straight and in the locations shown on the fabrication drawings.
5.4
Formwork Materials
Formwork materials are to be as noted in CIP Concrete Specification 03300.
Form oil should not leave a residue on the concrete panel. All form oil shall be water
soluble and be removed by power-washing prior to application of sealers.
5.5
Soil Reinforcing Materials

All materials shall be inert to all naturally occurring alkaline and acidic soil conditions.
Steel material shall be galvanized to a coating thickness of at least 0.087 mm or as
required by the design but not less than 0.087 mm.
Polymeric materials if approved shall contain stabilizers or inhibitors to prevent
degradation of properties due to ultraviolet light exposure
5.6
Concrete Mixes
Supply concrete as shown in Table A.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
TABLE A MSE Wall Concrete Elements

Structure Element/
Mix Type
Location
Section 03483
Page 14 of 24
2015
Reference Standard
Specification
HPC
Coping, Precast MSE

panels within splash zone
Type B
Coping, Precast MSE

panels not within splash
zone
Section 03300
Type F
Levelling pad unless HSb

cement required per
geotechnical report
Section 03300

Section 03301
Do not change concrete mix proportions or source material for concrete without written
approval of the Engineer of Record.
5.7
Grout Mixes
Epoxy grout: Approved epoxy grout shall be pre-mixed in strict accordance with the
manufacturers instructions to obtain a minimum compressive strength of 100 kPa in 7
days.
Cement grout: Approved cement grout shall be mixed with sufficient water for
placement and hydration, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 20
MPa in 7 days and 35 MPa in 28 days. Grout exposed to freezing conditions to be airentrained 7 to 10%.
Dry pack grout: Approved dry pack grout shall be mixed with sufficient water for the
mixture to make a sound solid pack, capable of developing compressive strength of 35
MPa in 28 days.
Non-shrink grout: Approved non-shrink grout shall be pre-mixed in strict accordance
with manufacturers instructions to obtain a minimum compressive strength of 16 MPa
in 24 hours and 50 MPa in 28 days. Sika Grout 212 or Approved alternate.
Submit type of grout, intended use and related information for approval.
5.8
Backfill Materials
All backfill placed within the wall volume shall be free from organic or otherwise
deleterious substances and shall be within the following gradation limits as shown o
Backfill Materials
The structural backfill shall be Crushed Aggregate Material free of organic matter and
other deleterious substances, conforming to the requirements of the Table B:
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 15 of 24
2015
TABLE B - Backfill Requirements

Designation/Class
Metric Sieve Size
Crushed
Aggregate
(CGSB 8-GP-2M)
Crushed
Aggregate
Material
Material
Crushed
Aggregate
Material
Des 2 Class 25
Des 2 Class 20
Des 2 Class 40
Sieve Size
Percent
Percent
Percent
Passing
Passing
Passing
125 000
80 000
50 000
40 000
100
25 000
100
70 - 94
20 000
100
82 - 97
----
16 000
84 - 94
70 - 94
55 - 85
10 000
63 - 86
52 - 79
44 - 74
5 000
40 - 67
35 - 64
32 - 62
1 250
22 - 43
18 - 43
17 - 43
630
14 - 34
12 - 34
12 - 34
315
9 - 26
8 - 26
8 - 26
160
5 - 18
5 - 18
5 -18
80
2 - 10
2 - 10
2 - 10
% fractures by weight (2 faces)
60+
60+
50+
Plasticity Index
NP - 6
NP - 6
L.A. Abrasion Loss Percent Maximum
50
50
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 16 of 24
2015
In addition, any backfill within the retaining wall volume, whether from a natural or from an
industrial source, shall be tested and meet the following criteria as shown in Table C1 or
C2.
TABLE C1 - Electrochemical Properties of Backfill when using Steel Soil
Reinforcement:
Select Backfill Requirements
Test Method
(ASTM)
Test Method
(AASHTO)
3000 ohm-cm
G57
T 288
5 - 10
G51
T 289
Chlorides
100 ppm
D512
T 291
Sulphates
200 ppm
D516
T 290
1.0%
D2974
T 267
Resistivity
pH
Organic Content
TABLE C2 - Electrochemical Properties of Backfill when using Geo-synthetic

Reinforcement:
Select Backfill Requirements
Test Method
(ASTM)
Test Method
(AASHTO)
pH
3 - 12
G51
T 289
Organic Content
1.0%
D2974
N/A
Design Temperature at the Wall Site
30oC
N/A
N/A
Use of materials other than the criteria stated or referenced above requires the written
consent of the Engineer of Record, and the Contractor must furnish a Certificate of
Compliance certifying that the backfill material for the wall meets the above stated
requirements and any additional requirements specified by the Engineer of Record. All
test results shall accompany the Certificate of Compliance.
In no case shall any backfill within 2000 mm from back of the face panels have more
than 8% passing the .075 mm sieve size.
5.9
Uniformly Graded Low Fines Crushed Granular Fill

If the projected temperatures at the time of fill placement are below 0C for eight hours,
or more, uniformly graded low fines crushed granular fill shall be used. In particular, this
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 17 of 24
2015
material shall be used where compaction is required in winter conditions, but is not
limited to winter use only.
The gradation of the proposed material shall be developed by the design Engineer for
the mechanically stabilized earth wall system. Any changes in the design of the
reinforcing strips, filter fabric, or other details shall also be identified and submitted to
the Engineer of Record for review.
Geotextile fabric shall be placed between all Low Fines Crushed Granular Fill and all
other fill.
Impermeable Geomembrane shall be PVC, HDPE or LLDPE with a minimum thickness
of 0.75 mm, and comply with the following minimum physical properties:
Impervious Geomembrane
Specifications and Physical Properties
Tear Strength (ASTM D1004)
CBR Puncture Strength (ASTM D6241)
45 N
140
Specific designs may warrant the use of roughened surface geomembranes. The
membrane shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
All seams in the
5.10
Panel Joint Materials

Bearing Pads: Bearing pads shall be EPDM rubber pads conforming to ASTM D-2000
M2AA 807, having a durometer hardness of 80 +/- 5
Joint Cover: Horizontal and vertical joints shall be covered by a geotextile. The
geotextile may be either a non-woven needle punched polyester geotextile or a woven
monofilament polypropylene geotextile as approved by wall designer.
Filter fabric: For use behind joints in face panels. Terrafix 270R or Approved equal.
Adhesive: the adhesive used for securing filter fabric to back of panel joints is to be as
per the wall designers recommendations. Application of excessive thickness of
adhesive shall be avoided. Typical application rate is 9 litres per 100 square meters of
joint filter fabric.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
6
EXECUTION
6.1
General
Section 03483
Page 18 of 24
2015
The ground on the exposed side of the wall facing shall slope away from the wall. The
surface water on the backfill side shall be drained away from the wall to prevent runoff
next to the facing panels and ponding above the reinforced zone.
No drilling or driving of posts (sign, guard rail, etc) or any other roadside hardware
through the reinforced backfill shall occur after placement of backfill unless Approved by
the City in writing.
No buried utilities other than specifically Approved shall be placed within the reinforced
earth zone. The placement of drainage components shall occur only during the
construction backfilling.
Water carrying appurtenances, such as catch basins, drainage basins, drainage
inlets/outlets, culverts etc. shall be placed away from or close to the end of the soil
reinforcement zone and provisions shall be made to mitigate the detrimental effects of
potential leakage.
At vertical or horizontal obstructions, the reinforcement shall not be angled more than
15 degrees from perpendicular to the wall. No exceptions to this shall be allowed
without verifying with the design Engineer for the MSE retaining wall system and
Engineer of Record. A minimum of 100mm cover shall be provided between the
obstruction and the reinforcement.
The joint between precast MSE walls and cast-in-place elements shall be protected
from loss of fines and shall allow for differential settlement between the two types of
construction.
Where walls or wall sections intersect with an angle of 130 or less, a special vertical
corner element panel shall be used. The corner element panel shall cover the joints of
the panels that abut the corner, and allow for independent movement of the abutting
panels.
For hillside construction, drainage blankets shall be provided to collect and divert
ground water from the reinforced soil mass.
MSE walls with traffic running parallel to the top of the wall system shall have rigid
traffic barriers meeting requirements of CAN/CSA-S6 Section 12. Such traffic barriers
shall be located on top the MSE walls and supported on a moment slab to resist sliding
and overturning, unless otherwise approved.
Where coping or barrier is used, the wall face panels shall extend up into the coping or
barrier a minimum of 50 mm.
Weeping drains consisting of perforated 150mm diameter pipe complete with filter sock
shall be provided near the front and back bottom corner of the mechanically stabilized
earth mass. The weeping drains shall be day lighted or connected for positive drainage.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 19 of 24
2015
A water level within the mechanically stabilized earth mass shall be assumed to the
invert level of weeping drains.
The soil reinforcement length shall be the same from top to bottom of each wall section.
The reinforcement length defining the width of the entire reinforced soil mass may vary
with wall height along the length of wall.
6.2
Quality Control and Quality Assurance

The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all fabrication and erection
works. Ensure a full-time qualified superintendent representing the Contractor is in
attendance to inspect all phases of this work. Non-performance of a sub-contractor
shall not relieve the contractor for responsibility for quality of the design, submissions
and construction of MSE walls.
A qualified representative from the MSE retaining wall system company shall be on site
to advise the erection crew regarding construction procedures. The representative is to
be present for not less than two days during the initial stages of construction and is to
be available on an as required basis thereafter.
The construction of the MSE retaining wall system shall conform to the details on the
final reviewed design and shop drawings.
The Engineer of Record may perform selective quality assurance inspection and
testing. This quality assurance does not relieve Contractor from responsibilities for
quality control.
6.3
Placing Reinforcing Steel

Place reinforcing steel as noted in the standard specifications 03200.
6.4
Placing Concrete
Place concrete as noted in the appropriate standard Specifications 03300 or 03301, as
applicable.
6.5
Finishing Flatwork
Finish concrete as noted in the standard concrete Specifications 03300 and 03301, as
applicable. The front face of all panels shall have a smooth finish conforming to a Class
2 finish, as described in Specification 03300 unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
Consistency of the finish shall be maintained with the use of the same concrete mix for
the entire project. Rear face of the panel shall be an unformed surface finish, screeded
with no open pockets or distortions in excess of 6 mm. Patch defects and remove fins
exceeding 5 mm.
A cavity produced by temporary inserts, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges
and other defects are to be repaired using Approved procedures and materials.
Repair mortar to be compatible with concrete materials.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
6.6
Section 03483
Page 20 of 24
2015
Curing and Protection of Concrete

Cure and protect concrete as per standard Specifications 03300 or 03301, as applicable.
Steam curing of panels for minimum four days or seven day moist cure for HPC precast
concrete panels is required.
Sandblasting, if Approved, is not to occur before the recommended curing period has
elapsed. Application of silane sealer or pigmented sealer should be per manufacturers
directions and should occur after the curing period.
6.7
Deficient Work
Inspect concrete surfaces immediately after stripping or removing forms. Report
immediately to the Engineer of Record any shapes and lines outside the specified
tolerances.
Remove and replace defective concrete as per submitted and approved repair
procedure and to the satisfaction of the Engineer of Record.
Panels shall be subject to rejection due to failure to meet the requirements specified in
this document. In addition, any or all of the following defects shall be sufficient reason
for rejection:
6.8
Defects that indicate imperfect moulding
Defects indicating honeycombed or open texture concrete.
Lifting inserts, tie strips, pin and pipe not properly set.
Broken or cracked corners or texture details
Soil reinforcement attachment devices improperly installed and/or

damaged
Precast component thickness in excess of 5 mm from that shown on

Contract Documents
Stained front face due to excess form oil or other reasons.
Crack repair shall be done as per Concrete Specification 03300 or 03301,

as applicable.
Precast Panel Tolerances

Precast face panel manufacturing tolerances are to follow:
Precast Component Dimensions: Lateral position of soil reinforcement attachment
devices within 25 mm. All other dimensions within 5 mm.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 21 of 24
2015
Precast Component Squareness: Angular distortion of the component shall not exceed 5
mm in 1.5 m.
Precast Component Surface Finish: Surface defects on smooth formed surfaces
measured on a length of 1.5 m shall not exceed more than 3 mm. Surface defects on
textured finished surfaces measured on a length of 1.5 m shall not exceed 6 mm.
If cumulative distortions or defects are preventing proper installation of the MSE wall
system, panels shall be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor at their own
expense.
6.9
Precast Panel Storage

All panels shall be handled, stored, and shipped in such a manner as to eliminate the
potential for damage such as chipping, cracks, fractures, etc. as well as excessive
bending stresses and damage to protruding or otherwise exposed components.
Precast panels are to be stacked on timber planks and separated by firm timber blocks
300mm in from the panel ends and immediately adjacent to tie-strips to avoid bending
the tie-strips, in stacks of no more than 10 panels high.
Soil reinforcing materials and connectors shall be stored clear of the ground.
All materials shall be covered and protected from rain, snow and dirt.
Panels shall be protected from discolouration and staining of the front face.
Care shall be taken to prevent mud, cement and other contaminants from sticking to the
soil reinforcing materials.
Care shall be taken not to break or pull out geogrid or soil reinforcing strips that are
attached to panels.
6.10
Sandblasting (if applicable and approved)

Use only competent and qualified workers experienced in sandblasting techniques with
adequate plant and equipment.
Protect from damage all surfaces not scheduled for sandblast finish by hoarding around
work area. Make good any damaged surfaces to the satisfaction of the Engineer of
Record.
A mockup area, of minimum dimensions 1 m x 1 m of the sandblast finish is to be
provided for the City and Engineer of Records review. The mockup may be
permanently built into the work
6.11
External Fastening and Coring

Do not core concrete without prior written approval of the Engineer of Record.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
Section 03483
Page 22 of 24
2015
Do not drill inserts or drive power actuated fasteners into concrete without prior written
approval of the Engineer of Record.
6.12
Sealer
Silane or pigmented sealer shall be applied as specified on the Contract Drawings.
Apply Approved coating sealer in strict accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. If panels are to be sealed, please apply to front face, top and sides
of panels. See Specification 03300 for Approved Products.
6.13
Wall Excavation
Establish the locations and extents of all underground services in the work area prior to
commencement of excavation work by notifying applicable agencies. Clearly mark such
locations.
Confirm locations of buried services by careful test excavations.
Protect bench marks, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving, curbs and utilities
that could be damaged by excavation work.
Conform to good construction practice with regard to safety, and comply with the
requirements of the responsible regulatory agencies such as the Workers
Compensation Board of Alberta. The cut slope that can be safely cut shall be determined
by the Contractors Geotechnical Engineer.
When draining excavations, direct discharge from pumps so that damage does not occur
to the site and adjacent properties. Do not discharge water containing silt into city
sewers or rivers.
Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, under-pinning or by other methods
as required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into excavation.
Repair any damage done to existing services at no additional cost to the contract.
When excavation base level is reached, arrange for a base inspection by the
geotechnical inspection and testing firm to confirm conformance of properties to those
assumed in the submitted wall design.
Remove from the site excavated material not used for backfilling.
Remove all organic material from the area.
Use best practices for erosion and sediment control, as defined in the submitted
ECOPlan.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
6.14
Section 03483
Page 23 of 24
2015
Wall Backfilling
Backfill MSE wall excavations with pre-approved free draining material, or uniformly
graded low fines crushed granular fill conforming to material specifications included in
Section 2.
Ensure areas to be backfilled and backfill stockpiles are free from debris, snow, ice and
water. Do not backfill against frozen ground.
Backfill placement is to closely follow erection of each course of panels. Backfill is to be
placed in such a manner as to avoid any damage or disturbances of the wall materials or
misalignment of the face panels. Any wall materials that become damaged during
backfill placement shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. Any
misalignment or distortion of the face panels due to placement of backfill outside the
limits of this specification is to be corrected by the Contractor at his or her expense. The
maximum lift thickness after compaction shall not exceed 200 mm regardless of the
vertical spacing between layers of soil reinforcements.
Use only hand-held power tampers and vibrators for compaction within 750 mm of walls.
At the end of each days operation, the Contractor shall slope the last level of backfill
away from the wall facing to rapidly direct runoff away from the wall face. In addition, the
Contract is not to allow surface runoff from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction
site.
Bring backfill up to 400 mm from final intended grade.
Remove and replace or re-work materials not conforming to the specifications and
drawings. The cost of replacing or re-working and re-testing is to be borne by the
Contractor.
Install drainage swales and any other features as shown on drawings upon completion
and acceptance of the wall erection and backfilling.
6.15
Certification
Certify at the completion of work, under the seal and signature of the Contractors
professional Engineer responsible for this work, that all connections and components
designed by the Contractor are capable of supporting the loads and forces indicated in
the contract specifications and on the contract drawings and that all connections and
components are fabricated and installed in accordance with the reviewed design and
shop drawings.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender No:
7.1
Measurement
Section 03483
Page 24 of 24
2015
Measurement of MSE Structures for variations from the tendered area will be measured
in square meters of total face of wall placed in accordance with the approved shop
drawings. Measurement will be from top of wall to top of levelling pad.
7.2
Payment
Payment for the work of this section shall be on a unit price basis per square meter of
total face of wall as tendered which shall be full compensation for all design, labour,
materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work, including all subsidiary and
incidental items necessary to the complete construction, in accordance with drawings
and specifications.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
GENERAL
1.1
Scope of Work
1.2
1.3
STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPLY

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 1 of 15
2015
.1
This section outlines the requirements for the supply, fabrication, delivery and
erection of structural steel for use in bridges and other steel structures.
.2
The term Girders as used in this document shall be defined as bridge

superstructure including girders, trusses and arches.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections

.1
Submittals
Section 01300
.2
Quality Control
Section 01400
.3
Structural Steel Erection
Section 05121
.4
Metal Fabrications
Section 05500
.5
Painting
Section 09900
Reference Standards
.1
All standards to be latest issue at time of tender.
.2
Provide one copy of required standards on site.
.3
CAN/CSA-S6, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code.
.4
CAN/CSA-G40.20, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural

Quality Steels.
.5
CAN/CSA-G40.21, Structural Quality Steels.
.6
ASTM A123/ A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
.7
ASTM A780-01 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas
of Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings
.8
CSA-W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.
.9
CSA-W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.10
CSA-W178.1, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations.
.11
ASTM A325M, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated
830 MPa Tensile Strength.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
1.4

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 2 of 15
2015
.12
ASTM A490M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes

10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints.
.13
CAN/CGSB 1.171, Inorganic Zinc Coating.
.14
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
.15
ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished.
.16
ASTM A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
.17
ASTM A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
.18
CAN/CSA W48-01, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding
.19
ASTM E709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.
.20
ASTM E165, Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination.
.21
ASTM E103, Standard Test Method for Rapid Indentation Hardness Testing of
Metallic Materials.
.22
AASHTO/AWS D1.5M, Bridge Welding Code.
.23
ASTM A770M, Standard Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of

Steel Plates for Special Applications.
.24
CSA-Z245.1, Steel Pipe.
.25
API 5L, Specification for Line Pipe.
Qualifications
.1
Shop qualification: The Contractor shall be fully approved by the Canadian

Welding Bureau (CWB) as per CSA Standard W47.1, Division 1 or Division 2.1 or
by an equivalent Agency approved by the Engineer. Welding procedures shall
be submitted for each type of weld used in the structure. The procedures shall
bear the approval of the CWB and are also to be approved by the Engineer prior
to use on the structure.
.2
Welder qualifications: Only welders, welding operators and tackers approved by

the CWB or by an equivalent Agency approved by the Engineer in the particular
category shall be permitted to perform weldments. Their qualifications shall be
current and available for examination by the Engineer
.3
Weld Inspection: The organization undertaking to perform weld inspection under

this section shall be fully approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau under the
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 3 of 15
2015
requirements of CSA-W178 or by an equivalent Agency approved by the

Engineer.
1.5
1.6
Submittals
.1
Fabrication drawings or the equivalent shall be submitted by the Contractor.
.2
Submit in writing evidence of qualification for welding under CWB.
.3
Schedules: The Contractor shall provide and keep current a complete fabrication
schedule in a form satisfactory to the Engineer.
.4
Mill certificates: Fabrication shall only be allowed with materials having mill
certificates properly correlated to the materials used on the project that have
been reviewed and Approved.
.5
Proposed fabrication sequence: Prior to commencement of fabrication, the

Contractor shall present for Approval an outline of the fabrication sequence that
clearly describes the order of make-up and assembly of all of the component
parts, as well as shop assembly, inspection stations and cleaning.
.6
Welding procedures: The Contractor shall provide CWB certified welding

procedures for Approval by the Engineer for all joints.
.7
Weld Material: The Contractor shall provide a certificate of the welding

consumables.
.8
Provide a sample panel of steel include machine and manual welds (ground flush
and sanded with laminar discs) and internal and external corners of steel plate no
less than ten (10) mm thick with the coating system applied for Approval. The
weld sample shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of the affected
work to allow time for review by the Engineer and correction by the Contractor
without delaying the work.
Fabrication Drawings
.1
Fabrication drawings (shop drawings) showing all details shall be prepared by

the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer prior to fabrication.
.2
Fabrication drawings shall be submitted at least twenty-one (21) calendar days

prior to the scheduled start of fabrication. Fabrication drawings shall be
submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of the affected work to allow time for
review by the Engineer and correction by the Contractor without delaying the
work. The time shall be proportional to the complexity of the work (to be agreed
in advance with the Engineer), but in all cases the time period shall be at least
three (3) weeks.
.3
Fabrication executed before review of the shop drawings shall be at the

Contractors own risk.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
.4
1.7

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 4 of 15
2015
In addition to specific details, the shop drawings shall include, but not be limited
to the following items:
.1
Drawings showing details of connections designed by the Contractor shall

be authenticated by a Professional Engineer who is duly registered in the
Province of Alberta.
.2
Temporary attachments.
.3
Weld procedure identification shall be shown on the shop drawings in the

tail of the weld symbols.
.4
All material splice locations shall be shown on the Drawings.
.5
Identification of all material heat numbers on the shop drawings shall be

required as per Clause 3.2.2.
.6
Any variations that are proposed, either to suit fabrication in the

Contractors works or to suit the chosen erection scheme, such as extra
welds or relocated joints.
.7
All dimensions shall be correct at 20C unless otherwise noted.
.8
Bearings shall be centred as per setting table shown on the Construction

Drawings.
.9
Shop drawings, shall cover all elements of the bridge. Shop drawings
showing partial details or details of some elements but not all will not be
reviewed until all details are submitted to the Engineer.
.10
No departure from the approved welding procedure or from the details

shown on the drawings shall be made without the Approval of the
Engineer.
Inspection and Testing

.1
All Quality Control and necessary Quality Control Testing as part of the
Contractors Quality Management Plan shall be paid for by the Contractor.
.2
Testing by the City: The City may appoint a testing agency to perform
independent Quality Assurance testing as deemed necessary by the City. The
City may perform visual, radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle testing and
other inspections. These inspections shall be performed by a testing agencies
appointed by the City. This testing is independent of Contractors Quality
Management Plan and shall not replace the Contractors Quality Control testing.
.3
Testing by the Contractor: Quality Assurance testing made necessary by

material substitutions, the repair of faulty work and additional unspecified
material splices shall be paid for by the Contractor. Any test records made by
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 5 of 15
2015
the fabricating shop in the course of Quality Control / Assurance shall be made
available to the Engineer for review in a timely fashion.
.4
Non-destructive methods of examination: The methods of non-destructive

examination shall be in accordance with the following standards:
.1
Radiography:
CSA W59.
.2
Ultrasonic:
CSA W59.
.3
Magnetic Particle:
ASTM Standard E-709.
.4
Dye-Penetrant:
.5
Hardness Tests:
The percentage indicated for every type of non-destructive test applies to every
weld longer than 1.5 m unless otherwise indicated by the Engineer. Welds
shorter than 1.5 m shall be grouped and the inspection shall be done in the full
length to the percentage of welds indicated.
.5
Visual inspection schedule: All welds shall be visually inspected.
.6
Unless otherwise noted, interpretation of flaws detected by radiographic or

ultrasonic examination shall be to CSA W59.
.7
Inspection Schedules
.1
Radiographic or Ultrasonic inspection schedule of Girders:

.1
.2
Trusses
.1
100% of all tension chord butt welds.
.2
50% of all compression chord butt welds.
.3
100% of the groove welds connecting tension and

compression chords.
.4
100% of the groove welds between web members and

compression or tension chords.
.5
100% of the groove welds between floor beams and

tension chords.
Welded plate girders:

.1
100% of all tension flange and stress reversal butt welds,

all diaphragm butt welds, and any groove welded
attachments to flange plates
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
.2

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 6 of 15
2015
.2
A minimum of 25% of all other flange butt welds randomly

selected by the Engineer for each structure. Additional
testing may be required to ensure the quality of welds.
.3
100% of all web butt welds in tension and stress reversal

zones plus additional 300 mm of web butt weld in
compression zone at the end of the web.
Magnetic particle inspection schedule of Girders

.1
.2
Trusses:
.1
50% of the fillet welds between floor beams and tension

chords.
.2
50% of the groove / fillet welds between tension chords

and embedded stiffener plate.
.3
20% of remaining fillet welds.
Plate girders:
.1
50% of the web to flange welds or any filet welds placed

on flange plates.
.2
10% of the web to stiffener plates.
.3
100% of the stiffener to flange welds.
.4
100% of the bearing sole plate to flange welds
.5
20% of the diaphragm connector plate welds
.8
Dye penetrates inspection: Dye penetrates inspection will be performed in areas

of the structure deemed necessary by the Engineer. In particular, the ends of the
weld metal of all flange butt welds after the removal of run-off tabs will be
inspected using this method. Defects discovered by this inspection shall be
repaired by the Contractor and the suspect area re-inspected.
.9
Hardness tests: Hardness tests will be performed by the Contractors Quality

Control testing agency on the flame cut edges of truss members and girder
flanges prior to assembly. Remedial work to the edges that exceed the specified
hardness shall be performed and re-inspected prior to assembly. Unless
otherwise noted, the hardness of the flame cut edges shall not exceed a
maximum Brinell as noted below:
.1
For carbon steels with a yield strength less than and including 300 MPa,
the maximum Brinell shall be 200 BHN.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
.2

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 7 of 15
2015
For carbon steels with yield strength greater than 300 MPa, the maximum
Brinell shall be 220 BHN.
.10
Frequency of hardness tests: Two Brinell hardness tests shall be done per truss
section (one at each end). Each test shall consist of three hits (impressions).
.11
Testing and stud shear connectors: Stud shear connectors shall meet all
requirements as outlined in CSA W59.
.12
Inspection schedules: The Contractor shall ensure that adequate notice of

inspection and schedules is given to the Engineer and inspection agencies and
that access to the work is assured at all times. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with the sequence of fabrication in order that the inspection program
can be properly integrated and agreed to prior to commencement of fabrication.
.13
Inspection Hold Points: To ensure that each stage of inspection is performed in

an orderly manner, during the fabrication of major structures, inspection hold
points shall be set up at specific stages of fabrication. Certain items of the work
shall then be checked, and deficiencies shall be corrected prior to the work
progressing to the next stage of fabrication. These hold points shall be
determined by the Engineer metallurgical testing agency (retained by the
engineer) and the fabricator prior to commencement of fabrication. The Engineer
reserves the right to stop detrimental fabrication between check points if deemed
necessary.
.14
All bolts for all pretension high-strength bolted connections shall be tested.
.15
Notification: The fabricator shall notify the Engineer a minimum of forty-eight (48)
hours prior to contemplate shipment prior to coating. This notice is to facilitate
final inspection of the materials.
.16
Steel work shall be inspected for surface defects and exposed edge laminations
during fabrication and blast cleaning. Significant edge laminations found shall be
reported to the Engineer for evaluation. Following rectification, these areas shall
be re-tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.17
No protective treatment shall be applied to the work until the appropriate

inspection and testing has been carried out.
.18
All loose rust and scale, slag residue and weld spatter shall be removed prior to
inspection.
.19
The Engineer may request additional specific testing during the construction of
the steel structure.
.20
Procedure trials
.1
Procedure trials shall be performed on all non-standard weld types which

shall be tested in accordance to CSA-W59.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
.2
.21
1.9
Procedure trails shall be completed sufficiently in advance of the start of

the affected work to allow time for review by the Engineer and correction
by the Contractor without delaying the work.
Destructive testing shall be performed on all failed procedure trials and as

requested by the Engineer at the Contractors expense.
Acceptability
.1
.2
Additional testing, inspection and evaluation may be required where evidence

points to a potentially deficient structure and shall be paid for by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs and schedule implications for
any corrective action required.
.3
The Contractor shall pay all costs for additional testing, inspection and analysis
required to demonstrate the adequacy of a structure that does not meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for
any project costs associated with schedule delays related to demonstrating the
adequacy of the structure.
.4
Reinforce by additional construction or replace as directed by the Engineer at

Contractors expense all structure or material judged inadequate by structural
analysis or by testing and inspection.
.5
The Engineer may order further testing, inspection and analysis at any time. If
additional testing is outside the scope of this contract, the City of Calgary shall
pay for those tests, inspections or analysis that meet the specified requirements,
and the Contractor will pay for those that do not.
Erection Scheme
.1
1.10
Section 05120
Page 8 of 15
2015
Destructive testing of welds for structural steel

.1
1.8

AND FABRICATION
The Contractor shall submit an erection scheme, as outlined in the specification,

at least three (3) weeks prior to the start of erection to the Engineer for approval.
Access
.1
The Contractor shall provide full facilities for the inspection of material and
workmanship. Allow free access for the Engineer to all parts of the work. The
Contractor shall assist the Engineer and provide resources for checking layout
and performing inspection duties.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Structural Steel
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
.1
2.2
Section 05120
Page 9 of 15
2015
All steel work to conform to CAN/CSA-G40.21, having the minimum yield

strength noted:
.1
W-Shapes and Plates shall conform to:

CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21M-350-WT, Charpy Category 3.
.2
Hollow Structural Sections, Channels and Angles shall conform to:

CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21M-350-W, Charpy Category 3.
.2
Steel shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate

standard. Where steels of differing grades are used in the same Contract, they
shall be so marked.
.3
Welding electrodes: shall be compatible with the structural steel chosen.

Welding consumables for all processes shall be fully approved by the CWB and
certified by the manufacturers as complying with the requirements of this
specification.
Bolts
.1
2.3

AND FABRICATION
All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM Standard A325 or ASTM
Standard A490 where specified. Metric bolts shall be marked with the symbol
A325M or A490M and those of weathering steel shall have the A325M or A490M
symbol underlined. Metric nuts shall be marked with three circumferential lines
with an M between two of them or marked with a 3 if made of a weathering
grade. Washers shall be identified as metric preferably by having an M
indented in the surface or a 3 for weathering grades. Use bolts made of the
same material and avoid contact of dissimilar metals. Certified mill tests reports
for the fastener material shall be provided.
Stud Shear Connectors

.1
All stud shear connectors shall conform to the chemical requirements of ASTM
Standard A108, Grades 1015, 1018 or 1020. In addition, they shall meet the
mechanical properties specified in AWS D1.5, Table 7.1 for Type B studs.
Certified mill test reports for the stud material shall be provided.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
EXECUTION
3.1
Welding

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 10 of 15
2015
.1
Welding code: Except as otherwise noted on the Drawings, all welding, cutting
and preparation shall be in accordance with CSA W59 and all filler material shall
comply with CSA-W48.
.2
Filler metals: Low hydrogen filler, fluxes and low hydrogen welding practices
shall be used throughout. The low hydrogen covering and flux shall be protected
and stored as specified by AASHTO/AWS Standard D1.5M. Flux cored welding
or use of cored filler wires in the submerged arc process or shielding gas process
shall not be permitted.
.3
Cleaning prior to welding: Weld areas shall be clean, free of mill scale, dirt,
grease, etc. and other contaminants prior to welding.
.4
Tack and temporary welds: Tack and temporary welds shall not be allowed
unless they are to be incorporated in the final weld. Tack welds, where allowed,
shall be of a minimum length of four times the nominal size of the weld and
length shall not exceed 15 times the weld size, and shall be subject to the same
quality requirements as the final welds. Cracked tack welds shall be completely
removed prior to welding.
.5
Preheat: Preheat requirements shall be performed and maintained as per

CSA W59.
.6
Welding at stiffener ends: To prevent notching effects, stiffeners and

attachments fillet welded to structural members shall have the fillet welds
terminate ten (10) mm short of edges.
.7
Methods of weldments repair: Repair procedures for unsatisfactory weldments

shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer prior to repair work commencing.
It should be assumed that the preparation for weld repairs shall be by grinding,
chipping, or air-arch gouging followed by grinding and the area proven free of
exposed defects by magnetic particle inspection (MPI). In addition, the cause of
any defect shall be identified and details given to the Engineer.
.8
Arc strikes: Arc strikes are not permitted. In the event of accidental arc strikes,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for Approval a proposed repair
procedure. The repair procedure shall include the complete grinding out of the
crater produced by the arc strike. These areas shall be examined by the
Engineer to ensure complete removal of the metal in the affected area.
.9
Grinding of welds: Butt welds shall be ground flush or to a specified slope on

both sides. Fillet welds not conforming to acceptable profile shall be ground to
the proper profile without substantial removal of the base metal. Grinding shall
be smooth and parallel to the line of stress. Caution shall be exercised to
prevent over-grinding. Acceptability of the welds without grinding shall be only if
Approved. Additional grinding requirements shall be specified on the drawings.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 11 of 15
2015
.10
All welds shall be continuous, full profile and complete joint penetration, unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer. The tolerances of fit up between elements
shall be the most stringent of this Specification or the requirements of CSA-W59.
.11
Spot or slotted welds shall not be permitted unless Approved.
.12
Identification shall be provided to enable each weld to be traced to the welder or

operator who made it.
.13
The Contractor shall submit written procedures for flame cutting before
commencing fabrication. Joint edges shall be ground and free of imperfections.
.14
The Contractor shall submit written procedures for welding stud shear connectors
before commencing fabrication. Documentary evidence shall be submitted to
show that procedures comply with the requirements of CSA-W59. The
procedure trials shall have been witnessed by an independent inspection agency.
.15
Additionally, gaps between parts joined by fillet welds shall not exceed 1 mm
average (measured over 1 m or the length of weld, whichever is smaller). Where
this additional requirement is not achieved, the Contractor shall increase the size
of the fillet weld accordingly, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
.16
The root opening between parts shall not exceed 2 mm. Root openings wider
than that, but not greater than twice the thickness of the thinner part or 20 mm,
whichever is less, may be corrected by welding prior to joining the parts by
welding. In order to do that, the Contractor shall prepare a buttering procedure
certified by an independent inspection authority.
.17
Parts to be joined by groove welds shall be carefully aligned. Where the parts
are effectively restrained against bending due to eccentricity in alignment, the
offset from theoretical alignment shall not exceed 10% of the thickness of the
thinner part joined, but in no case shall be greater than 3 mm. In correcting
misalignment, the parts shall not be drawn into a greater slope than 1 into 25.
.18
The use of filler plates shall not be permitted unless specified on the Drawings or
.19
Parts to be welded shall be fastened properly without excessive constraint to

avoid any heat distortion. Any distortion shall not be corrected by hammering.
.20
In case of weld access holes that must be closed for cosmetic or corrosion
protection reasons, the Contractor shall apply a suitable MASTIC material
.21
Artificial cooling of welds shall not be permitted.
.22
To enable full throat thickness to be provided at the ends of butt welded joints
run-on and run-off plate extension pieces shall be used. Run-on plates and
run-off plates shall comply with the following requirements:
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
3.2

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 12 of 15
2015
.23
One pair of run-on plates and one pair of run off plates prepared to the same
thickness and profile as the parent metal shall be attached, preferably by clamps,
to the start and finish of all butt welds.
.24
Butt welds shall extend at the full weld profile for a distance of 25 mm into both
the run-on and the run off plates.
.25
When removing the run on and run off plates by flame cutting, the cuts shall
not be nearer than 3 mm to the sides of the parent metal and the remaining metal
shall be removed by grinding or another method agreed by the Engineer.
.26
Visible weld surfaces shall be cleaned of slag residue. All weld spatters shall be
removed and affected surfaces dressed and cleaned.
.27
The Contractor shall keep a traceability of the welding consumables used.
Fabrication
.1
Standards: All fabrication shall be in accordance with the CAN/CSA-S6 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code, CSA W59 and this Specification.
Fabrication shall be performed in an adequately heated and enclosed area. The
shop temperature shall be a minimum of 10 Celsius.
.2
Heat number transfer: As the plate is subdivided for webs and flanges, all heat
numbers are to be transferred to each individual section. The numbers shall
remain legible until such time as the material location in the final assembly has
been recorded on an approved set of shop drawings provided for this purpose.
Mill identification numbers stamped into the material shall be removed by
grinding at an appropriate time, as approved by the Engineer.
.3
Marking systems: Methods and medium of marking and the location of marks
are to be Approved by the Engineer. Every part shall be marked with a durable
and distinguished mark in such a way as not to damage the material. Steel
stamps are not to be used. The only exception shall be the marking of splice
plates which may be steel stamped. The location of such stamps is to be
.4
Cutting of Plate: All plate material for main members, splice plates and any plate
material welded to the main member shall be flame cut using an automatic
cutting machine. Shearing is not allowed. Where specified by the Engineer the
flame cut edges shall be ground or machined to remove all visible signs of drag
lines.
.5
Material splices: Splices other than those shown on the contract drawings shall
require Approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the cost of
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 13 of 15
2015
inspection of these splices. Inspection reports shall be made available to the

Engineer and Owner.
.6
Vertical alignment: The structure shall be fabricated to conform to the

requirements of the deflection and vertical curve as noted on the drawings. For
rolled shapes, advantage shall be taken of mill camber that may be inherent in
the material.
.7
Shop assembly:
.1
The exact detailed method of assembly, including points of support,

dimension checks, method of trimming to length, drilling and marking of
splices, shall be to the procedure submitted under Proposed Fabrication
Sequence and as Approved by the Engineer.
.2
Each individual section shall meet the camber requirements for that
particular length, with the splices between these sections falling on the
theoretical camber line for the entire span. When the camber of the
section fails to meet the required tolerance, the Contractor shall submit a
proposed method of repair for review and Approval by the Engineer.
.3
For plate girders and box girders, shop assembly shall be by the
progressive assembly method according to AASHTO, except that only
two, instead of three, sections need to be assembled.
.4
All splices shall be drilled from solid material while assembled or shall be
sub punched or sub drilled and then reamed to full size while in the shop
assembly position. No reaming shall take place until Approval of the
assembly has been obtained from the Engineer.
.8
Bolt holes: Clause 11.4.8 of AASHTO shall apply, except that all bolt holes in
load carrying segments of main members shall be drilled full size or sub punched
and reamed to full size. All holes in girder splices shall be circular and
perpendicular to the member. All holes shall be de-burred to ensure a proper
faying surface.
.9
Dimensional tolerances: Normal tolerance for structural steel fabrication and

fitting between hole groups shall be +3 mm unless specified otherwise. The
dimensional tolerances for structural members shall be within the CSA W59,
Section 5.8, except as otherwise noted below:
.1
The tolerance for Girder depth geometry is to be as specified in CSA

W59, Section 5.8 for built up beams and girders with a depth greater than
1.8 m.
.2
Combined warpage and tilt of flange at any cross section shall be

determined by measuring the offset at the toe of the flange from a line
normal to the plane of the web through the intersection of the centreline of
the web with the outside surface of the flange plate. This offset shall not
exceed 1/200 of the total width of the flange or 3 mm whichever is greater
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:

AND FABRICATION
Section 05120
Page 14 of 15
2015
at bolted splice location. Bolted splices of main stress carrying members

shall have parallel planes and the surfaces shall be in full contact without
any gap.
.3
Camber of Girders shall be uniform, true, and accurate to the centreline of

the top flange. Permissible variation in camber shall be within (0.2Lt +3)
mm; where Lt is the test length in metres, This tolerance applies to
fabricated pieces only, prior to shop assembly. During shop assembly,
splice points shall be located on the theoretical camber line or at a
specified amount from the line should the Engineer choose to correct for
shop camber deviations. Where field splices are eliminated by combining
girder segments into longer girder lengths, the cambers of the girders at
the eliminated splice points shall be within 3 mm.
.4
Fill plates shall not be permitted at main span girder field splices unless
specified.
.10
Milling tolerances: Tolerance for milled to bear stiffeners shall be 0.05 mm with
at least 75% of the area in bearing.
.11
Field weld preparation: The fabrication contractor shall shop prepare all material
for required field welds.
.12
Flame straightening: Flame straightening shall not be performed on any material

or member without approval of the Engineer. The Contractor is to submit a
procedure stating location, temperatures and cooling rates to the Engineer for
approval.
.13
Artificial/Accelerated Cooling of heated areas shall not be permitted.
.14
Stress relieving: When stress relieving is specified, it shall be performed in

accordance with CSA W59. Copies of the furnace charts shall be supplied to the
Engineer.
.15
Handling and storage: All lifting and handling shall be done using devices that do
not mark, damage or distort the assemblies or members in any way. Arches
shall be stored upright, supported on sufficient skids and safely shored to
maintain the proper section without buckling, twisting or in any way damaging or
misaligning the material.
.16
Temporary attachments shall be removed by cutting and not by hitting or

bending. They shall be removed avoiding any damage of the base material of
the structure.
.17
Where ends of stiffeners are required to be fitted, they shall be ground or

otherwise prepared, so that the maximum gap between the end of the stiffener
and the surface against which it is fitted does not exceed 0.25 mm over 75% of
the fitted area and does not exceed 0.75 mm over the remainder of the fitted
area.
City of Calgary
Project Name:
Tender Number:
3.3
Section 05120
Page 15 of 15
2015
.18
Machining at butted joints: Where machining of surfaces at butted joints is

specified, abutting ends of the parts shall be machined after the members have
been fabricated.
.19
Treatment of outside arisings: Outside arisings on plates and sections shall be

smoothed by grinding or filling.
.20
The third repair of a defect shall be unacceptable unless otherwise indicated by

the Engineer.
Surface Preparation
.1
3.4

AND FABRICATION
Blast cleaning: All steel components shall be sandblast cleaned after fabrication
in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council Standard (SSPC) to
level No. SP10. Essentially, this is a surface free of all visible oil, grease, dust,
dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter.
The surface roughness of the cleaned surface shall be from 5 to 15 Fm.
Galvanizing
.1
Galvanizing, when specified, shall be by hot dipped method after fabrication,

conforming to ASTM A123/A123M. Damaged areas of galvanized members are
to be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If repair to damaged
galvanizing is required using sprayed zinc (hot applied metalizing), it shall be
applied in multiple coats to a dry film thickness of 0.20mm.
.2
A galvanizing procedure shall be provided to the Engineer for the review prior to
the dipped or repaired. The plan shall include details required for safe handling,
to prevent warping, provide adequate drainage and all quality control measures.
4.1
Payment
.1
Payment for the work in this section shall be on a unit rate basis as tendered
which shall be full compensation for all labour, material, and equipment
necessary to complete the work, including all subsidiary and incidental items
thereto for which separate payment is not elsewhere provided. Payment for this
work shall be issued upon 100% completion including submission of all
documentation as per this specification.
END OF SECTION
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
1
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
.1
1.2
This Section outlines the requirements for the supply and installation of an
approved bridge deck waterproofing system to the bridge deck area as shown on
the drawings.
Related Work
.1
1.3
Section: 07100
Page 1 of 7
2015
Bridge Deck Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Section 02501
Reference Standards
.1
CAN/ CSA S6 06, latest edition
.2
Alberta Transportation, Specification for Bridge Construction, Bridge Deck

Waterproofing
.3
Appendix E, Typical Details, City of Calgary Design Guidelines for Bridges &
Structures
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
All materials for this application shall be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer.
Materials shall be obtained from the same source of supply or manufacturer for the
duration of the project.
.1
Tack Coat: used in conjunction with the asphalt membrane; shall be primer, cut
back with an equal volume of gasoline type solvent, or an acceptable alternative
cut-back asphalt product and shall be compatible with the asphalt membrane.
.2
Rubber Membrane: shall be 1.2 mm thick butyl rubber. The material shall be
unaffected by the heat generated by the hot mix.
.1
List of Approved Materials:

- Elastosheet 6147
- BP47 Elastomeric Reinforcement
- Bakor 990-25
.3
Hot Applied Asphalt Membrane: shall be hot applied rubberized asphalt and shall
be supplied in cakes ready for melting and application.
.1

- Bakor 790-11
- Tremproof 150
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
Section: 07100
Page 2 of 7
2015
- Permaquick 6100 W.I. 250

- Hydrotech 6125
- Beamalstic 1213 BDM
- Sealtight-73-R
.4
Waterproofing Protection Board: shall be a durable panel of 3mm thickness

specifically designed to provide a protective cushion between the hot mix
asphaltic concrete pavement and the asphalt waterproofing membrane. It shall
have a water absorption property of 5% or less and shall meet the Ontario
Ministry of Transportation and Communications Material Specifications for
Protection Board. The waterproofing protection board shall consist of spun glass
fibres. Cellulose reinforcing fibres are not acceptable.
.1

- Vibraflex MTO Protection Board
- Bakor Asphalt Protection Board
- IKO Protectboard
- Globe Glass Protection Board
.5
Sub-Drain
.1
2.2
2.3
Wick drain shall be CetTeau-Drain CT-D811 or approved equal.
Delivery and Storage

.1
Products and materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations.
.2
Protection Board should be stored in an area that it is free from debris,

contamination, or moisture until time of application. Boards that are dirty,
cracked, or damaged shall not be used. Boards that have been warped,
distorted by manufacture, storage, handling or exposure to weather, shall be
rejected.
Submittals
.1
Sampling and Testing

The Engineer may require that sufficient quantities of the asphalt membrane,
rubber membrane, and protection board be supplied from the materials being
used on the project for analysis, flow tests, water absorption, or other applicable
tests.
.2
Submit detailed installation procedure at least four weeks prior to the application.
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
2.4
2.5
2.6
Section: 07100
Page 3 of 7
2015
Inspection
.1
All products and workmanship shall be inspected by the Contractor.
.2
Deck preparation and application of the waterproofing system will be inspected

by the Engineer.
Quality Control
.1
for incorporation in the work and for the quality of the work.
.2
the works conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.3
The Contractors Quality Control Plan and record documentation shall be made
available for review by the Contractor, upon request.
Quality Assurance
.1
Products and asphalt mix may be tested for conformance to the specified
requirements.
.2
Notify the Engineer at least forty eight hours in advance of any work being
performed.
.3
In case of the ambiguity whether the product, system or work conforms to the
EXECUTION
3.1
Equipment
.1
Heating and Mixing Kettle

An approved heating and mixing kettle shall be used to heat the hot-applied
rubberized asphalt membrane. The kettle shall be of the double boiler oil transfer
type with a built-in agitator and equipped with permanently installed dial type
thermometers to measure the temperature of the melted compound and the oil.
.2
Thermometer
A separate calibrated thermometer with an accuracy of +/- 2C to verify the
material temperature shall be available on the site.
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
.3
Section: 07100
Page 4 of 7
2015
Air Compressor
The compressed air shall be free from oil and water when tested in accordance
with ASTM D4285.
3.2
Installation
.1
.2
Traffic Restrictions
.1
Traffic restrictions apply to all traffic other than the construction

equipment directly associated with the waterproofing operations and the
paving operations that follow.
.2
After sandblasting and shot blasting operations have commenced, traffic

will not be allowed on the sandblasted area until the asphaltic concrete
pavement (ACP) has been placed and cooled to ambient temperature.
Procedure
.1
.3
Waterproofing operations shall be carried out when the air and concrete
surface temperatures are 5C or higher. The Contractor shall perform all
of the operations involved in waterproofing in sequential order, with no
delay between operations other than that as may be required by this
specification.
Surface Preparation
.1
Deck concrete, including barriers, sidewalks and medians, must be

completely dry and cured at least 14 days before application of tack or
membrane can proceed. Fog test, using a poly sheet sealed to the deck
surface may be used to confirm the deck surface dryness.
.2
Any grout tubes shall be cut flush with the deck surface prior to
sandblasting and shall be re-cut flush with the concrete surface if
sandblasting results in the tube projecting from above the concrete.
.3
Deck surface shall be smooth and free of ridges, rough spots and
depressions deeper that 2 mm. Bridge deck surface shall be inspected
by the Engineer, Contractor and waterproofing installer prior to
commencing sandblasting or shot blasting.
.4
The surface of the concrete shall be completely sandblasted or shot

blasted to expose sound, laitance-free concrete. All dirt and debris shall
be removed and disposed of, leaving a prepared surface satisfactory for
tack coating. Prior to commencement of shot blasting and sandblasting
operations, test samples on the bridge deck shall be done for review by
the Engineer, in order to assess the level of desired surface preparation.
Sandblast concrete areas as shown on the drawings.
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
Section: 07100
Page 5 of 7
2015
Tack coating and waterproofing shall not commence until the Engineer
has accepted all surface preparation work.
.4
.5
.6
Tack Coat
.1
Immediately prior to application of the tack coat, the concrete surface

shall be air-blasted to remove all dust and other foreign materials.
.2
The tack coat shall be cut back 50% with gasoline solvent. The
application rate shall be such that the tack material will be absorbed into
the concrete, resulting in a surface that is dull and black in appearance.
The application of an excessive amount of tack as indicated by a shiny
black surface shall be avoided. Tack coat material shall be applied with
approved equipment which will provide uniform application at the required
rate. The tack coat shall be applied only when the concrete is dry and
clean and when the air and concrete surface temperatures are above
5C. Waterproofing equipment or materials shall not be permitted on the
tack coat until it has fully cured and is completely tack-free.
Waterproofing of Joints and Cracks

.1
Special attention shall be paid to waterproofing over all construction

joints, and over any cracks designated by the Engineer that would not be
bridged by the asphalt membrane.
.2
Prior to the application of the asphalt membrane to the deck, a coat of hot
asphalt membrane at least 4 mm thick and wide enough to extend 200
mm on either side of the joint or crack shall be applied in accordance with
Clause 3.2.6 below, to the tack-coated concrete surface. A strip of butyl
rubber membrane material wide enough to extend 150 mm on either side
of the joint or crack shall be applied while the asphalt membrane is still
hot.
.3
Along all curbs, barrier walls, and deck drains, the hot asphalt membrane
shall be applied to the height of the top of the hot mix surface course, and
150 mm onto the deck. The rubber membrane shall extend 40 mm up the
vertical faces, and 110 mm onto the deck surface.
Waterproofing Around Deck Drip Tubes

.1
Special attention shall be paid to waterproofing around the deck drip

tubes. The asphalt membrane shall be carefully applied around the drain
tubes so that a positive seal is obtained.
.2
Tubes shall be temporarily plugged prior to waterproofing in order to

prevent the entrance of hot membrane.
.3
After application of hot membrane, tubes shall be trimmed flush with the
top of the membrane to allow free drainage of water.
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
.7
.8
Section: 07100
Page 6 of 7
2015
Application of Hot-Applied Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane

.1
Cakes of asphalt membrane shall be melted in the mechanically agitated

heating and mixing kettle specified. This unit shall keep the contents
continuously agitated until the material can be drawn free flowing and
lump-free from the mixing units at a temperature not exceeding that
recommended by the Manufacturer.
.2
Membrane shall not be applied until the tack coat has cured completely,
and is free from any surface moisture and dirt. The tack coat shall not be
dried by torch or any other means.
.3
The membrane shall be applied within the temperature range

recommended by the Manufacturer, to the clean, tack-coated concrete
deck, to form a uniform film having a minimum thickness of 5 mm +/- 1
mm.
.4
The laying of the membrane shall be continuous. The laying operation

shall be such that discontinuities in the membrane are avoided and any
joints are lapped 150 mm.
.5
The membrane shall be applied over all waterproofed joints and cracks,
and shall extend up the face of curbs, barrier walls, and deck drains, to
the height of the top of the hot mix surface course. Deck drains and
drainage tubes shall not be plugged.
.6
Place wick drain for full length of deck along gutters on top of the
membrane when membrane is still tacky.
Application of Protection Board

.1
The Contractor shall check and ensure that the asphalt membrane
thickness conforms to the specified requirement prior to placing the
protection board.
.2
Protection boards shall be laid on the asphalt membrane while the

surface is still tacky and laid transverse to the centreline of the deck. The
protection boards shall be placed with all edges overlapping 25 mm both
longitudinally and transversely.
.3
The protection board edge shall be placed within 5 mm of all curbs, wick
drain, drain verticals and concrete paving lip edges.
.4
Protection boards shall be placed such that the joints in the direction of
traffic flow shall be staggered a minimum of 150 mm. Protection boards
shall be placed from the bottom - up in order to Create a shingling effect
and prevent water from flowing to the underside.
City of Calgary
Project Name
File No.:
.9
Section: 07100
Page 7 of 7
2015
.5
Protection boards shall be rolled by means of a linoleum or lawn type

roller while the membrane is still warm, in order to ensure good contact
with the membrane.
.6
Holes shall be cut through the protection board at the drainage tubes to
allow water to drain freely.
.7
In instances where edges of the protection board curl up, the edges shall
be cemented down using hot membrane material to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Top Tack Coat and ACP Placement

.1
Tack coat material shall be applied to the protection board cover with
approved equipment which will provide a uniform application at the
required rate.
.2
The protection board shall be dry and clean when the tack coat is applied.
.3
The tack coat on the protection board shall be placed just sufficiently
ahead of paving to allow for curing.
.4
The diluted tack coat material shall be applied at the rate of 0.5 l/m2.
.5
Binder course pavement shall be placed as soon as possible, but no later

than within seven calendar days of waterproofing.

.1
Payment for Deck Waterproofing shall be made on a unit price basis per square
meter of deck as tendered which shall be full compensation for all labour,
materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work, including all
subsidiary and incidental items necessary to the complete construction such as
deck preparation by sandblasting, shot blasting, supply and application of tack
coat, asphalt membrane, rubber membrane, protection board and wick drain, in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF CALGARY
FIFTH EDITION, 2015
APPENDIX "D" WARRANTY FORMS

D1
BEARINGS
D2
EXPANSION JOINTS
D3
GALVANIZING
D4
COATINGS (PAINTING included)
GUARANTEE FORM
TO:
The City of Calgary
Bridges and Structures
P.O. Box 2100, Stn. M, #8481
Project:
Tender No:
RE:
BEARINGS
Bridge File No:
1 of 2
We the undersigned hereby guarantee The City of Calgary against defects in the said
Bearings or workmanship or both related to their installation for a period of five (5) years
after completion and acceptance of the work on the above-mentioned project. We
guarantee for the Five (5) year period that the said Bearings will perform satisfactorily
within the project specifications, design range of movement and under the design loads.
In the event the Bearings do not perform satisfactorily, the replacement or repairs or both
will be done at no cost to The City of Calgary.
Bridge File Number:
Tender Number:
Type of Bearings:
Installation/Acceptance Date:
Guarantee/Commencement Date:
Guarantee/Termination Date:
Date at Calgary, Alberta:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
Name of Corporation: __________________________________________________________
Name and position of Signing Officer: ____________________________________________
Signature of Signing Officer: ________________________________________________(seal)
SUPPLIER
Name of Corporation: _________________________________________________________
INSTALLER
Receipt of this document is acknowledged this ____ day of ____________, 20__.
The City of Calgary per: _________________________
t:\bridges & structures\rf 1.2 design guidelines\2015 guidelines\january update\07 d1 bearing warrantee final.docx
2 of 2
GUARANTEE FORM
TO:
The City of Calgary
P.O. Box 2100, Stn. M, #8481
Project:
Tender No:
RE:
Expansion Joints
Bridge File No:
1 of 2
We the undersigned hereby guarantee The City of Calgary against defects in the said
Expansion Joints or workmanship or both related to their installation for a period of five
(5) years after completion and acceptance of the work on the above-mentioned project.
We guarantee for the five (5) year period that the said Expansion Joints will perform
satisfactorily within the project specifications, design range of movement and under the
design loads.
In the event the Expansion Joints do not perform satisfactorily, the replacement or repairs
or both will be done at no cost to The City of Calgary.
Bridge File Number:
Tender Number:
Type of Joint:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
SUPPLIER
INSTALLER
2 of 2
GUARANTEE FORM
TO:
The City of Calgary
P.O. Box 2100, Stn. M, #8481
Project:
Tender No:
RE:
Galvanizing
Bridge File No:

We, the undersigned, acknowledge and agree that subject to the exception described
below we are jointly and severally responsible for any and all costs of repairs
reasonably required in connection with any failure or defect in the coating system
described due to the coating system itself or the workmanship in the application of such
coating system, for a period of five (5) years following completion and acceptance of
the coating system on the project.
1 of 2
To the extent that any problem is due to ordinary weathering, ordinary wear and tear,
damage caused by third parties, or damage caused by the negligence or wilful
misconduct by or on behalf of The City or its employees, the undersigned will not be
responsible.
In the event of any failure or unsatisfactory performance of the coating system during the
Guarantee period, except to the extent of the exception described above, the undersigned
or any of them will perform any and all replacement or repair work reasonably required. If
the undersigned are unable or unwilling to proceed with and complete reasonable
required replacement or repair work within a reasonable period, the City may have the
reasonably required replacement or repair work carried out by another contractor or by its
own forces, and the undersigned or any of them will indemnify and save harmless the City
from all reasonable costs in connection with the replacement or repair work, including any
Bridge
File reasonably
Number: incurred.
Tender Number:
legal
costs
Type of Coating:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
SUPPLIER
INSTALLER
t:\bridges & structures\rf 1.2 design guidelines\2015 guidelines\january update\07 d3 galvanizing warrantee final.docx
2 of 2
GUARANTEE FORM
TO:
The City of Calgary
P.O. Box 2100, Stn. M, #8481
Project:
Tender No:
RE:
Coating System
Bridge File No:

We, the undersigned, acknowledge and agree that subject to the exception described
below we are jointly and severally responsible for any and all costs of repairs
reasonably required in connection with any failure or defect in the coating system
described due to the coating system itself or the workmanship in the application of such
coating system, for a period of five (5) years following completion and acceptance of
the coating system on the project (the Guarantee Period).
1 of 2
To the extent that any problem is due to ordinary weathering, ordinary wear and tear,
damage caused by third parties, or damage caused by the negligence or wilful
misconduct by or on behalf of The City or its employees, the undersigned will not be
responsible.
In the event of any failure or unsatisfactory performance of the coating system during the
Guarantee period, except to the extent of the exception described above, the undersigned
or any of them will perform any and all replacement or repair work reasonably required. If
the undersigned are unable or unwilling to proceed with and complete reasonable
required replacement or repair work within a reasonable period, the City may have the
reasonably required replacement or repair work carried out by another contractor or by its
own forces, and the undersigned or any of them will indemnify and save harmless the City
from all reasonable costs in connection with the replacement or repair work, including any
Bridge
File reasonably
Number: incurred.
Tender Number:
legal
costs
Type of Coating:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
Name and position of Signing Officer _____________________________________________
Signature of Signing Officer ________________________________________________(seal)
SUPPLIER
INSTALLER
t:\bridges & structures\rf 1.2 design guidelines\2015 guidelines\january update\07 d4 coating warrantee final 5
year.docx
2 of 2
CITY OF CALGARY
FIFTH EDITION, 2015
APPENDIX "E" TYPICAL DETAILS

DRAWING DG01:
BRIDGE BARRIER SECTION TYPICAL
DRAWING DG02:
INTEGRAL/ SEMI INT. ABUTMENT Approach Slab End Detail
DRAWING DG03:
DRAWING DG04:
DRAWING DG05:
INTEGRAL/ SEMI INT. ABUTMENT APPROACH Slab Interface

Detail
DRAWING DG06:
DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM with 80mm Two-course

Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement
DRAWING DG07:
DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM with 80mm Two-course

Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement

CoC Bridges and Structures Design Guidelines 2015 - Rev 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CoC Bridges and Structures Design Guidelines 2015 - Rev 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CITY OF CALGARY

DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR BRIDGES AND STRUCTURES

THE CITY OF CALGARY

Modifications and Revisions___________________________________________________ 1

Consultant Terms of Reference ________________________________________________ 2

QUALITY AND STANDARDS _______________________________________________ 3

Codes and Standards ________________________________________________________ 3

GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA _______________________________________________ 4

Design Life _________________________________________________________________ 4

Efficiency and Economy ______________________________________________________ 5

Aesthetics of Structures ______________________________________________________ 5

Environmental Considerations _________________________________________________ 6

Special Considerations for Pedestrian Bridges and Structures ________________________ 6

BRIDGE GEOMETRY _____________________________________________________ 7

Vertical Clearance ___________________________________________________________ 7

Horizontal Clearances ________________________________________________________ 8

Grades and Slopes___________________________________________________________ 9

Approach Slabs _____________________________________________________________ 9

Other Requirements ________________________________________________________ 10

Camber and Deflections _____________________________________________________ 11

LOADS AND LOAD EFFECTS ______________________________________________ 12

Live Load _________________________________________________________________ 12

Pedestrian Load ___________________________________________________________ 12

Maintenance Vehicle Load ___________________________________________________ 12

Multiple Use Structure Loads _________________________________________________ 13

Vehicle Collision Load _______________________________________________________ 13

Construction Loads _________________________________________________________ 13

THE CITY OF CALGARY

Seismic Loads _____________________________________________________________ 13

Methods of Analysis ________________________________________________________ 13

Construction and Temporary Load Conditions ___________________________________ 14

Concrete Structures ________________________________________________________ 14

Concrete Cover ____________________________________________________________ 15

High Performance Concrete (HPC) _____________________________________________ 16

Protective Coatings _________________________________________________________ 16

Structural Details __________________________________________________________ 18

Bridge Deck Drainage _______________________________________________________ 19

Deck Drains _______________________________________________________________ 20

Drip Grooves ______________________________________________________________ 20

Utilities on Bridges _________________________________________________________ 20

Steel Structures ____________________________________________________________ 21

Uncoated Weathering Steel __________________________________________________ 21

Masonry Structures ________________________________________________________ 23

Other Materials ____________________________________________________________ 24

Inspection and Maintenance Access ___________________________________________ 24

Approach Slabs ____________________________________________________________ 24

SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES ____________________________________________ 25

Crack Control ______________________________________________________________ 25

Stress Limits ______________________________________________________________ 27

FATIGUE LIMIT STATE ___________________________________________________ 28

Reinforced and Pre-stressed Concrete __________________________________________ 28

Structural Steel ____________________________________________________________ 28

THE CITY OF CALGARY

DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES _______________ 28

Codes and Specifications ____________________________________________________ 29

Geotechnical Report ________________________________________________________ 29

Construction Methods ______________________________________________________ 31

Proprietary Walls __________________________________________________________ 32

Inspection and Quality Assurance _____________________________________________ 32

CABLE STAYED BRIDGES _________________________________________________ 32

Reference Publications ______________________________________________________ 32

Construction Considerations _________________________________________________ 35

Quality Assurance __________________________________________________________ 35

INTEGRAL ABUTMENT BRIDGES __________________________________________ 36